巴利语辭典

诸大德合编

Pavassati: {'def': '[pa+vṛṣ] to “rain forth,” to begin to rain, shed rain S.I,100; Sn.18 sq. (imper. pavassa), 353 (v. l.); J.VI,500 (“cry”), 587 (aor. pāvassi). -- pp. pavaṭṭha & pavuṭṭha: see abhi°. (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + vass + a), 下雨。【过】 ~ssi。【过分】 pavuṭṭha。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+vass下雨+a), 下雨。【过】pavassi。【过分】pavuṭṭha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pavati: {'def': '¹ [pa+vā] to blow forth, to yield a scent Th.1, 528 (=gandhaṁ vissajjati C.). See pavāti. (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [of plu, cp. Vedic plavate to swim & Epic Sk. pravate to jump] to hurry on, to rush VvA.42 (but better read with v. l. patati as syn. of gacchati). (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavatta: {'def': '【形】继续的，跌倒的。【中】(生死)轮回。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of pavattati] 1. (adj.) happening, going on, procedure, resulting Th.2, 220 (assu ca pavattaṁ, taken by Mrs. Rh. D. as “tears shed”); ThA.179; PvA.35, 83 (gāthāyo), 120, esp. with ref. to natural products as “that which comes,” i. e. normal, natural, raw; °phala ready or natural, wild fruit (gained without exertion of picking), in cpds. °phalika SnA 295 sq.; °bhojana (adj.) J.I,6; III,365; Vism.422, and, °bhojin one who lives on wild fruit (a certain class of ascetics, tāpasā) D.I,101; M.I,78, 343; A.I,241; II,206; cp. DA.I,269 sq. & SnA 295, 296. °maṁsa fresh or raw meat (flesh) Vin.I,217 (cp. Vin. Texts II.81). -- 2. (nt.) “that which goes on,” i. e. the circle or whirl of existence Miln.197, 326 (cp. Miln.trslⁿ II.200 “starting afresh in innumerable births,” quot. fr. C.), opp. appavatta freedom from Saṁsāra, i. e. Nibbāna ibid. -- 3. founded on, dealing with, relating to, being in S.IV,115 (kuraraghare p. pabbata); DA.I,92 (ādinaya°), 217 (°pīti-sukha being in a state of happiness). (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】继续的，跌倒的。【中】（生死）轮回。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pavattana: {'def': '(adj. nt.) [fr. pavattati] 1. moving forward, doing good, beneficial, useful; f. °i M.I,214; Pug.35 (spelt pavattinī in T. as well as Pug.A 218). -- 2. execution, performance, carrying out Miln.277 (āṇā,° cp. pavatti). (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. pavattati), 【形】【中】前进(moving forward, doing good, beneficial, useful; f. pavattati, pavattinī)。2.执行(execution, performance, carrying out)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】存在，执行，前进。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pavattar: {'def': '[n. ag. of either pa+vac or pa+vṛt, the latter more probable considering similar use of parivatteti. The P. commentators take it as either] one who keeps up or keeps going, one who hands on (the tradition), an expounder, teacher D.I,104 (mantānaṁ p.=pavattayitar DA.I,273); S.IV,94; Dh.76 (nidhīnaṁ p.=ācikkhitar DhA.II,107). (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavattati: {'def': '(pa + vat + a), 继续行进，着手进行，存在，成为。【过】 pavatti。【过分】 ~ttita。【独】 ~titvā。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+vattati, vṛt] (intrs.) 1. to move on, go forward, proceed Pv.I,5⁷; PvA.8, 131; of water: to flow S.II,31; J.II,104; PvA.143, 154, 198. -- 2. to exist, to be, continue in existence J.I,64; PvA.130 (opp. ucchijjati). -- 3. to result, to go on PvA.45 (phalaṁ), 60 (vippaṭisār’aggi). -- pp. pavatta; Caus. pavatteti (q. v.). (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+vat(梵vrt)逮捕+a), 1.继续行进，著手进行( to move on, go forward, proceed)。2.存在，成为，转起(to exist, to be, continue in existence )。opp. 被停止(ucchijjati))。3.结果，继续(to result, to go on)。【过】pavatti。【过分】pavattita。【独】pavattitvā。pp. pavatta; Caus. pavatteti。suppavatti, 彻底熟练。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pavattayitar: {'def': '[n. ag. to pavatteti] one who sets into motion or keeps up DA.I,273 (see foll.). (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavatteti: {'def': '(pa + vat + e), 使运转（开动），继续，挥，运转。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~ttita。【现分】 ~tenta。【独】 ~tetvā。【不】 ~tetuŋ。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of pavattati] (trs.) 1. to send forth, set going Vin.I,87 (assūni); S.II,282 (id.) J.I,147 (selagulaṁ pavaṭṭ°); esp. in phrase dhammacakkaṁ p. to inaugurate the reign of righteousness Vin.I,8, 11; M.I,171; S.III,86; Sn.693; Miln.20, 343; VvA.165; PvA.21, etc. -- 2. to cause, produce, make arise J.II,102 (mah’oghaṁ); Miln.219. -- 3. to give forth, bestow, give (dānaṁ a gift) Vin.IV,5 (spelt ṭṭ); PvA.19, 123, 139. -- 4. to continue, keep on, practise, go on with DhA.I,257; PvA.29 (attabhāvaṁ), 42 (kammante). -- 5. to move about, behave, linger DhA.I,14 (ṭṭ). ‹-› 6. to display, execute, wield, enforce Miln.189 (āṇaṁ; cp. āṇāpavatti). -- pp. pavattita (q. v.). (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+vat+e)(caus. of pavattati), 使运转(开动)，继续，挥，运转。【过】pavattesi。【过分】pavattita。【现分】pavattenta。【独】pavattetvā。【不】pavattetuṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pavattetu: {'def': '【阳】继续的人，。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】继续的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pavatti: {'def': '【阴】发生，事件，新闻。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. pa+vṛt] 1. manifestation, wielding, execution, giving, in āṇā° royal authority J.III,504; IV,145; ThA.283. -- 2. happening, incident, news J.I,125, 150; II,416; Vism.91; PvA.6, 17, 29, 35, 92, 152, 242, etc.; DhA.I,80 (v. l. pavutti). Cp. pavutti. (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹pa+ vat (梵vrt)转动),【阴】1.显示，行使(权力)(manifestation, wielding, execution, giving)。āṇāpavatti﹐王权(royal authority)。2.发生，事件，新闻，转起 (happening, incident, news) (=pavutti)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pavattin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pa+vṛt] 1. advancing, moving forward, proceeding, effective, beneficial; only in phrase dhammā pavattino A.I,279; DA.I,4=PvA.2; and in suppavattin (good-flowing, i. e. well-recited?) A.IV,140 (of pātimokkha; trs^ld as “thoroughly mastered” J.P.T.S. 1909, 199, V,71 (id.). -- 2. going on, procedure (in f. °inī) Vin.II,271 sq., 277. (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavattita: {'def': '[pp. of pavatteti] set going, inaugurated, established Vin.I,11 (dhammacakka); M.III,29, 77; S.I,191; Sn.556, 557 (dhammacakka); PvA.67 (id.), 140 (saṅgīti); SnA 454. (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavattāpana: {'def': '【中】使持续著，维持，保存。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】使持续着，维持，保存。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pavattāpanatta: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. Caus. II. of pavatteti=pavattāpeti] making continue, keeping going, preservation, upkeep Vism.32 (T. °attha). (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavayha: {'def': '(adv.) [ger. of pavahati] carrying on, pressing, urgently, constantly, always repeated as pavayha pavayha M.III,118=DhA.II,108; M.I,442, 444. (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavaḍḍha: {'def': 'pavaddha, 【形】长大的，强壮的。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of pavaḍḍhati] grown up, increased, big, strong J.V,340 (°kāya of huge stature; so read for pavaddha°; expl^d as vaḍḍhita-kāya). (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Pavaddha,【形】长大的，强壮的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pavaḍḍhana: {'def': '【中】长大，增加。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】长大，增加。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pavaḍḍhati: {'def': '[pa+vṛdh] to grow up, to increase M.I,7; S.II,84, 92; Sn.306 (3^rd sg. praet. °atha); Dh.282, 335, 349; Pug.64; PvA.8 (puññaṁ). -- pp. pavaḍḍha & pavuddha. (Page 442)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + vaḍḍh + a), 生长，增加。【过】 ~ḍḍhi。【过分】 ~ḍhita。【独】 ~ḍhitvā。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+vaḍḍh增长+a), 生长，增加。【过】pavaḍḍhi。【过分】pavaḍḍhita。【独】pavaḍḍhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pavecchati: {'def': '[most likely (as suggested by Trenckner, Notes 61) a distortion of payacchati (pa+yam) by way of *payecchati›pavecchati (cp. sa-yathā›seyyathā). Not with Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 43 fr. pa+vṛṣ, nor with Müller P.Gr. 120 fr. pa+viṣ (who with this derivation follows the P. Commentators, e. g. J.III,12 pavesati, deti; SnA 407 (pavesati paṭipādeti); Geiger P.Gr. § 152, note 3 suggests (doubtfully) a Fut. stem (of viś?)] to give, bestow S.I,18; Sn.463 sq., 490 sq.; Th.2, 272; J.I,28; III,12 (v. l. pavacchati), 172; IV,363; VI,502, 587 (vuṭṭhi-dhāraṁ pavecchanto devo pāvassi tāvade; v.l. pavattento); Pv.II,9⁴³ (=deti PvA.130); II,9⁷⁰ (=pavatteti ibid. 139); II,10⁷ (=deti ibid. 144); Miln.375.

another derⁿ suggested by Dr. Barnett in J.R.A.S. 1924, 186 is=Sk. pra-vṛścati. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavedana: {'def': '【中】公告。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】公告。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+vid] making known, telling, proclamation, announcement only in stanza “nisīd’ambavane ramme yāva kālappavedanā,” until the announcement of the time (of death) Th.1, 563 (trslⁿ “until the hour should be revealed”)=J.I,118=Vism.389=DhA.I,248. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavedayati: {'def': '(=Pavedeti), 告知，宣布，传播。pavedayanti, 传播(复3现)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pavedeti: {'def': '[Caus. of pa+vid] to make known, to declare, communicate, relate S.I,24; IV,348; Dh.151; Sn.p. 103 (=bodheti ñāpeti SnA 444); PvA.33, 58, 68 (attānaṁ make oneself known), 120. -- pp. pavedita (q. v.). (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + vid + e), 宣布，告知。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~dita。【独】~detvā。【现分】 ~denta。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+vid知+e),告知，宣布。【过】pavedesi。【过分】pavedita。【独】pavedetvā。【现分】pavedenta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pavedhati: {'def': '(pa + vedh + a), 战栗，被激动。【过】 ~dhi。【过分】 ~dhita。【独】 ~dhitvā。【现分】 ~dhamāna。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+vyath, cp. pavyatheti] to be afflicted, to be frightened, to be agitated, quiver, tremble, fear Sn.928 (=tasati etc. Nd¹ 384); Vism.180 (reads pavedheti) ThA.203 (allavatthaṁ allakesaṁ pavedhanto, misreading for pavesento); DhA.II,249. -- Freq in ppr. med. pavedhamāna trembling M.I,88; Pv III,5⁵ (=pakampamāna PvA.199); J.I,58; III,395. -- pp. pavedhita & pavyadhita (q. v.). (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+vedh+a), 战栗，被激动。【过】pavedhi。【过分】pavedhita。【独】pavedhitvā。【现分】pavedhamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pavedita: {'def': '[pp. of pavedeti] made known, declared, taught M.I,67 (su° & du°); S.I,231; Dh.79, 281; Sn.171, 330, 838; Nd¹ 186. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavediyamāna: {'def': '【被、现分】被宣布。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【被、现分】被宣布。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pavekkhati: {'def': 'is fut. pavisati. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavellati: {'def': '[pa+vell] to shake, move to & fro, undulate S.IV,289 (paveliyamānena kāyena); J.III,395. -- pp. pavellita (q. v.). (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavellita: {'def': '[pp. of pavellati] shaken about, moving to & fro, swinging, trembling J.VI,456. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavesa: {'def': '(--°) [fr. pa+viś] entrance ThA.66 (Rājagaha°); DhA.IV,150. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】pavesana,【中】进入，入口。pavesaka,【形】使进入的人。pavesananikkhamana, 【中】进出，延长。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 Pavesana, 【中】进入，入口。 ~saka, 【形】使进入的人。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pavesana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paveseti] 1. going in, entering, entrance J.I,142; PvA.79 (v. l. for T. °vesa), 217, 221 (asipattavana°). -- 2. beginning VvA.71 (opp. nikkhamana). ‹-› 3. putting in, application J.II,102 (daṇḍe p.). -- 4. means of entry, as adj. able to enter J.VI,383. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavesetar: {'def': '[n. ag. of paveseti] one who lets in or allows to enter, an usher in S.IV,194; A.V,195. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paveseti: {'def': '(pa + vis + e), 使进入，介绍，预示。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~sita。【独】 ~setvā。【现分】 ~senta。【不】 ~setuŋ。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of pavisati] 1. to make enter, allow to enter, usher in M.I,79; J.I,150 (miga-gaṇaṁ uyyānaṁ), 291; VI,179; Vism.39; PvA.38, 44, 61 (gehaṁ), 141 (id.); DhA.I,397. -- 2. to furnish, provide, introduce, procure, apply to (Acc. or Loc.) J.III,52 (rajjukaṁ gīvāya); VI,383 (siriṁ); Miln.39 (gehe padīpaṁ), 360 (udakaṁ); DA.I,218. Perhaps at ThA.203 for pavedheti. ‹-› Caus. II. pavesāpeti J.I,294 (mātugāmaṁ aggiṁ). (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+vis进入+e), 使进入，介绍，预示。【过】pavesesi。【过分】pavesita。【独】pavesetvā。【现分】pavesenta。【不】pavesetuṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pavesetu: {'def': '【阳】引导员，允许进入的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】引导员，允许进入的人。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paveṇi: {'def': '(f.) [pa+veṇi; cp. late Sk. praveṇi in meanings 1 & 2] 1. a braid of hair, i. e. the hair twisted & unadorned A.III,56 -- 2. a mat, cover D.I,7 ≈ (see ajina°). -- 3. custom, usage, wont, tradition J.I,89; II,353; V,285; VI,380 (kula-tanti, kula-paveṇi); Dpvs XVIII,1; Miln.134 (°upaccheda break of tradition), 190, 226 (+vaṁsa), 227; DhA.I,284 (tanti+); PvA.131. -- 4. succession, lineage, breed, race Sn.26 (cp. SnA 39); DhA.I,174.

--pālaka guardian of tradition Vism.99 (tanti-dhara, vaṁsanurakkhaka+); DhA.III,386. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paveṇī: {'def': '【阴】传统，连续，世系，族类，发辫子。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】传统，连续，世系，族类，发辫子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pavibhajati: {'def': '[pa+vi+bhaj. Cp. Class Sk. pravibhāga division, distribution] to distribute, to apportion S.I,193 (°bhajjaṁ, ppr., with jj metri causa)=Th.1, 1242 (°bhajja ger.). (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavicarati: {'def': '[pa+vicarati] to investigate thoroughly M.III,85; S.V,68. (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavicaya: {'def': '[fr. pa+vicinati] investigation Sn.1021; Th.1, 593; Pug.25; Nett 3, 87. (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavicinati: {'def': '[pa+vicinati] to investigate, to examine M.III,85; S.V,68, 262; Nett 21; SnA 545. grd. paviceyya J.IV,164, & pavicetabba Nett 21. (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavidaṁseti: {'def': '[pa+vi+Caus. of dṛś; daṁseti=dasseti] to make clear, to reveal J.V,326 (aor. pavidaṁsayi). (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paviddha: {'def': '[pp. of pavijjhati] thrown down, fig. given up, abandoned Th.1, 350 (°gocara). (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavijjhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pavijjhati] hurling, throwing J.V,67 (Devadattassa silā°, cp. Vin.II,193); J.I,173; V,333. (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavijjhati: {'def': '(pa+vidh(梵vyadh / vidh)贯穿+ya), 往前丢，射击。【过】pavijjhi。【过分】paviddha。【独】pavijjhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+vyadh] to throw forth or down Vin.II,193 (silaṁ cp. J.I,173 & V,333); III,82, 178, 415; DA.I,138, 154. -- pp. paviddha (q. v.). (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + vidh + ya), 往前丢，射击。【过】 ~jhi。【过分】 paviddha。【独】 ~jhitvā。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pavikatthita: {'def': '[pp. of pa+vi+katthati] boasted J.I,359. (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paviloketi: {'def': '[pa+viloketi] to look forward or ahead J.VI,559. (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavilīyati: {'def': '[pa+vi+lī] to be dissolved, to melt or fade away S.IV,289 (pavilīyamānena kāyena with their body melting from heat; so read for paveliyamānena). (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavineti: {'def': '[pa+vineti] to lead or drive away, expel Sn.507=J.V,148. (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavisana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+viś] going in, entering, entrance J.I,294; II,416; VI,383; DhA.I,83. Cp. pavesana. (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavisati: {'def': '(pa + vis + a), 进，入。【过】 pavisi。【现分】 ~santa。【独】 ~sitvā。【不】 ~situŋ。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+vis进入+a), 进，入，闯入。【过】pavisi。【现分】pavisanta。【独】pavisitvā。【不】pavisituṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+viś] to go in, to enter (Acc.) Sn.668, 673; DhA.II,72 (opp. nikkhamati); PvA.4, 12, 47 (nagaraṁ). Pot. °vise Sn.387 imper. pavisa M.I,383; S.I,213; fut. pavisissati Vin.I,87; J.III,86; pavissati (cp. Geiger P.Gr. § 65²) J.II,68; Cp. I.9⁵⁶, and pavekkhati S.IV,199; J.VI,76 (nāgo bhūmiyaṁ p.); Dāvs III,26; aor. pāvisi Vin.II,79 (vihāraṁ); M.I,381; J.I,76 (3^rd pl. pāvisuṁ), 213; J.II,238; Vism.42 (gāmaṁ) PvA.22, 42, 161, 256; and pavisi J.II,238; PvA.12, 35; ger. pavisitvā S.I,107; J.I,9 (araññaṁ); Vism.22; PvA.4, 12, 46, 79 & pavissa S.I,200; Dh.127=PvA.104. -- pp. paviṭṭha (q. v.).‹-› Caus. paveseti (q. v.). (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavitakka: {'def': '[pa+vitakka] scepticism, speculation, controversy Sn.834; Nd¹ 176. (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paviveka: {'def': '【阳】孤独，隔离，隐退。SA.2.29./I,122.：Pavivittoti kāyaviveko ca vivekaṭṭhakāyānaṁ nekkhammābhiratānaṁ, cittaviveko ca parisuddhacittānaṁ paramavodānappattānaṁ, upadhiviveko ca nirupadhīnaṁ puggalānaṁ visaṅkhāragatānanti, imesaṁ tiṇṇaṁ vivekānaṁ lābhī.(隔离：1.身远离之义即喜欢放弃，2.心远离即得遍净心(parisuddhacittānaṁ) 及得到最上明净 (paramavodānappattānaṁ﹐即达到八定，得到许多明净与清净)，3.执取远离是达到众补特伽罗剥除所有东西而无执取，这些是得到已达到最终点的远离。)Sn.2-3(v.257.)︰Pavivekarasaṁ pitvā, rasaṁ upasamassa ca; Niddaro hoti nippāpo, dhammapītirasaṁ pivanti.(品尝了隐居的美味，品尝了寂静的美味，摆脱恐惧，涤除罪恶，(进而)品尝法喜的美味。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】孤独，隔离，隐退。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. pa+vi+vic] retirement, solitude, seclusion Vin.I,104; II,258 (appicchatā santuṭṭhi+; cp. pavivitta); D.I,60; M.I,14 sq.; S.II,202; V,398; A.I,240; Sn.257; Dh.205 (°rasa, cp. DhA.III,268); Th.1, 597; J.I,9; Ps.II,244; Vism.41, 73 (°sukha-rasa); Sdhp.476; DA.I,169. (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavivekatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. paviveka]=paviveka Vism.81 (appicchatā etc. in enumⁿ of the 5 dhuta-dhammas). (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavivekiya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paviveka] springing from solitude Th.1, 669. (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavivitta: {'def': '[pp. of pa+vi+vic] separated, detached, secluded, singled M.I,14, 77, 386; II,6; S.II,29; Vism.73; PvA.127 DhA.II,77. Often in phrase appiccha santuṭṭha pavivitta referring to an ascetic enjoying the satisfaction of seclusion Nd² 225=Nd¹ 342^1Q=Vism.25; J.I,107; Miln.244, 358, 371 (with appa-sadda appanigghosa). (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】分开的，分离的。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】分开的，隔离的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paviṭṭha: {'def': '(pavisati 的【过分】), 已进入。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of pavisati] entered, gone into (Acc.), visited S.I,197; II,19; Dh.373; DA.I,288; PvA.12, 13. (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pavisati 的【过分】), 已进入。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pavuccati: {'def': '(pa+vac说+ya), 被叫做，被说，被宣称。【过分】pavutta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + vac + ya), 被叫做，被说，被宣称。【过分】 pavutta。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Pass. of pavacati] to be called, said, or pronounced Sn.436, 513, 611 & passim; Dh.257; Pv IV.3⁴⁷; PvA.102. The form pavuccate also occurs, e. g. at Sn.519 sq. -- pp. pavutta¹ (q. v.). (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavutta: {'def': '¹ [pp. of pa+vac, but sometimes confounded with pavatta, pp. of pa+vṛt, cp. pavutti] said, declared, pronounced D.I,104 (mantapada p.; v.l. °vatta which is more likely; but DA.I,273 expl^s by vutta & vācita); S.I,52; Sn.383 (su°=sudesita SnA 373), 868 (=ācikkhita desita, etc. Nd¹ 271). (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [pp. of pa+vap] scattered forth, strewn, sown S.I,227. (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavuttha: {'def': '[pp. of pavasati] dwelling or living abroad, staying away from home D.II,261 (°jāti one who dwells away from his caste, i. e. who no longer belongs to any caste); J.V,434; DhA.III,293. Freq. in phrase pavutthapatikā itthi a woman whose husband dwells abroad Vin.II,268; III,83; Miln.205. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pavasati 的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pavasati 的【过分】)。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pavutti: {'def': '[fr. pa+vṛt, cp. Class. Sk. pravṛtti] happening, proceeding, fate, event PvA.31 (v. l. pavatti), 46, 53, 61, 78, 81 and passim (perhaps should be read pavatti at all passages). (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavuṭā: {'def': 'at M.I,518 is unexplained. The reading of this word is extremely doubtful at all passages. The vv. ll. at M.I,518 are pavudhā, pavujā, paṭuvā, *phutā, and the C. explⁿ is pavuṭā=gaṇṭhikā (knot or block?). The identical passage at D.I,54 reads paṭuvā (q. v.), with vv. ll. pamuṭā, pamuvucā, while DA.I,164 expl^s pacuṭā =gaṇṭhikā (vv. ll. pamuṭā, pamucā, papuṭā). Dial. I.72 reads pacuṭa, but leaves the word untranslated; Franke, Dīgha, p. 58 ditto. (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavuṭṭha: {'def': '(pavaṭṭha) [pp. of pavassati] see abhi°. (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavyadhita: {'def': '[pp. of pa+vyath; the dh through analogy with pavedhita] afflicted, frightened, afraid J.VI,61, 166. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavyatheti: {'def': '[Caus. of pa+vyath] to cause to tremble, to shake J.V,409. Cp. pavedhati. -- pp. pavyadhita (q. v.). (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavāda: {'def': '[pa+vad, cp. Epic Sk. pravāda talk, saying] talk, disputation, discussion D.I,26, 162; M.I,63; Sn.538. (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavādaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pavāda] 1. belonging to a discussion, intended for disputation D.I,178 (samaya° “debating hall”). -- 2. fond of discussing Miln.4 (bhassa° “fond of wordy disputation”). Cp. pavādiya. (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavādiya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pavāda, cp. pavādaka] belonging to a disputation, disputing, arguing, talking Sn.885 (n. pl. °āse, taken by Nd¹ 293 as pavadanti, by SnA 555 as vādino). (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavāha: {'def': '【阳】连续的流动，水流。 ~ka, 【形】冲走的。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】连续的流动，水流。pavāhaka,【形】冲走的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pavāhaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pa+vah] carrying or driving away Th.1, 758. (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavāhana: {'def': '(adj. & nt.) [fr. pa+vah] 1. carrying off, putting away, Th.1, 751. -- 2. wiping off J.III,290. (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavāhati: {'def': '[Caus. fr. pa+vah] 1. to cause to be carried away, to remove; freq. with ref. to water: to wash away, cleanse M.I,39; S.I,79, 183 (pāpakammaṁ nahānena); II,88; Th.1, 349; J.I,24; III,176, 225, 289; IV,367; V,134; VI,197; 588; Miln.247; Dāvs II.59; PvA.256. ‹-› 2. to pull out, draw out D.I,77 (better to be read as pabāhati). (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavāheti: {'def': '(pa + vah + e), 使流动，使被冲走，除去。【过】 ~esi。【过分】~hita。【独】 ~hetvā。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Pavahati (pa+vah(brh1)+e, Sk. prabrdha (pravrdha)), 使流动，使被冲走，除去。【过】pavāhesi。【过分】pavāhita。【独】pavāhetvā。cp. abbūlha & ubbahati (ud+brh1)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pavāhitatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. pavāhita, pp. of pavāheti] the fact of being removed or cleansed J.V,134. (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavāla: {'def': '& Pavāḷa (m. & nt.) [cp. Class Sk. prabāla, pravāḍa & pravāla] 1. coral J.I,394 (°ratta-kambala); II,88; IV,142; Miln.267 (with other jewels), 380 (id.); SnA 117; VvA.112 (°ratana). -- 2. a sprout, young branch, shoot J.III,389, 395 (kāḷa-valli°); V,207; Nett 14 (°aṅkura); SnA 91 (id.). (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavāraṇā: {'def': '(f.) [pa+vṛ, cp. BSk. pravāraṇā Divy 91, 93; whereas Epic Sk. pravāraṇa, nt., only in sense of “satisfaction”] 1. the Pavāraṇā, a ceremony at the termination of the Vassa Vin.I,155, 160 (where 2 kinds: cātuddasikā & pannarasikā), II.32. 167; D.II,220; S.I,190. pavāraṇaṁ ṭhapeti to fix or determine the (date of) P. Vin.II,32, 276. Later two kinds of this ceremony (festival) are distinguished, viz. mahā° the great P. and °saṅgaha, an abridged P. (see DA.I,241) J.I,29, 82, 193 (mahā°); Vism.391 (id.); SnA 57 (id.); VvA.67 (id.); PvA.140 (id.); -- 2. satisfaction Vism.71. (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵pravāraṇā‹pra+vri)),【阴】邀请，自恣(雨季安居最后一天的仪式)。S.8.7./I,191. ：“Handa dāni, bhikkhave, pavāremi vo. Na ca me kiñci garahatha kāyikaṁ vā vācasikaṁ vā”ti. (诸比丘！今日我自恣。你们对於我身语之上有什么之非难吗？)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】邀请，自咨（雨季安居最后一天的仪式）。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pavāreti: {'def': '(pa+var选择+e), 邀请，使满意，给掌管，行自恣。【过】pavāresi。【独】pavāretvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + var + e), 邀请，使满意，给掌管，行自咨。【过】 ~esi。【独】~retvā。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of pa+vṛ, cp. BSk. pravārayati Divy 116, 283, etc.] 1. to invite, offer, present, satisfy S.I,190; A.IV,79; J.III,352. -- 2. to celebrate the Pavāraṇā (i. e. to come to the end of the Vassa) Vin.I,160 sq.; II,255; DhA.I,87; J.I,29, 215; IV,243 (vuttha-vassa p.); Vism.90; SnA 57. -- pp. pavārita (q. v.) See also sam°. (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavārita: {'def': '(Pavāreti的【过分】), 已邀请，已进行过自恣的出家人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of pavāreti] 1. satisfied M.I,12 (+paripuṇṇa pariyosita); Miln.231; Vism.71. -- 2. having come to the end of the rainy season Vin.I,175. -- Freq. in formula bhuttāvin pavārita having eaten & being satisfied Vin.I,213 (cp. Vin. Texts I.39); II,300; IV,82; PvA.23. (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavāsa: {'def': '【阳】在国外逗留。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. pa+vas, cp. Vedic pravāsa in same meaning] sojourning abroad, being away from home J.II,123; V,434; VI,150; Miln.314. -- Cp. vi°. (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】在国外逗留。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pavāsin: {'def': '【阳】在国外居住者，离家的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pavāsa] living abroad or from home, in cira° long absent Dh.219 (=cirappavuttha DhA.III,293). (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavāsita: {'def': '1. (perhaps we should read pavārita?) given as present, honoured J.V,377 (=pesita C.). -- 2. (so perhaps to be read for pavūsita T.) scented, permeated with scent [pp. of pavāseti] VvA.237 (v. l. padhūpita preferable). (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavāsī: {'def': '【阳】在国外居住者，离家的人。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pavāta: {'def': '【中】多风的地方。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [pa+vāta, cp. Vedic pravāta] a draught of air, breeze Vin.II,79 (opp. nivāta). (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】多风的地方。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pavāti: {'def': '[pa+vā] to diffuse a scent Dh.54; Th.1, 528; J.V,63 (disā bhāti p. ca). See also pavāyati. (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+vā吹+a), 散播气味，吹。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + vā + a), 散播气味，吹。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pavāyati: {'def': '[pa+vā] to blow forth, to permeate (of a scent), to diffuse J.I,18 (dibba-gandho p.); Vism.58 (dasa disā sīla-gandho p.). Cp. pavāti. (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+vā吹+ya), 吹，散播。【过】pavāyi。【过分】pavāyita。【独】pavāyitvā。suppavāyita, 好好地分散。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + vā + ya), 吹，散播。【过】 pavāyi。【过分】 ~yita。【独】~yitvā。(p217)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pavāḷa: {'def': '【阳、中】珊瑚，芽。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Pavāla,【阳】【中】珊瑚(coral，古代视为宝石一种)，芽。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pavāḷha: {'def': '(pavāheti 的【过分】), 已逐放，已拒绝。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pavāheti 的【过分】), 已逐放，已拒绝。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[apparently pp. of pavahati (pavāheti), but in reality pp. of pa+bṛh¹, corresp. to Sk. prabṛdha (pravṛdha), cp. abbūlha & ubbahati (ud+bṛh¹), but cp. also ubbāḷha which is pp. of ud+bādh. At D.I,77 (where v. l. pabbāḷha=pabūḷha, unexpl^d by Bdhgh) it is synonymous with uddharati=ubbahati] 1. carried away (?), turned away, distracted, dismissed S.III,91 (bhikkhu-saṅgho p.). -- 2. drawn forth, pulled out, taken out D.I,77=Ps.II,211=Vism.406 (muñjamhā isīkā p.); J.VI,67 (muñjā v’isikā p.). (Page 443)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavīhi: {'def': '[pa+vīhi] in pl. diff. kinds of rice J.V,405 (=nānappakārā vīhayo). (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavīnati: {'def': '[pa+vī to seek, Sk. veti, but with diff. formation in P. cp. Trenckner, Notes 78 (who derives it fr. veṇ) & apaviṇāti. The form is doubtful; probably we should read pacināti] to look up to, respect, honour J.III,387 (T. reading sure, but v. l. C. pavīrati). (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pavīṇa: {'def': '【形】聪明的，有技术的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Class. Sk. pravīṇa] clever, skilful Dāvs.V,33; VvA.168 (v. l. kusala). (Page 444)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】聪明的，有技术的。(p218)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pavūsita: {'def': 'at VvA.237 is misreading either for pavāsita or (more likely) for padhūpita (as v. l. SS.), in meaning “blown” i. e. scented, filled with scent. (Page 445)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paya: {'def': '(nt.) [Ved. payas, nt, of pī] milk, juice J.I,204; VI,572. (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐【阳、中】(mano组)，牛奶，水。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Payacchati: {'def': '(pa+yacchati of yam), 提供，呈(to offer, present, give)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+yacchati of yam] to offer, present, give Dpvs XI.28; Pgdp 63, 72, 77 sq. -- pp. payata (q. v.). (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Payata: {'def': '(pp. of payacchati), 【无】抑制的，净化的(restrained, composed, purified, pure)。payatapāṇi, 张开掌(施)(with outstretched hand, open-handed, liberal )。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of payacchati] restrained, composed, purified, pure D.I,103 (=abhiharitvā dinna); A.III,313; Th.1, 348, 359 (°atta); It.101 (°pāṇin)=Miln.215; Sn.240 (=sakkāra-karaṇena p. alaṅkata SnA 284); Vism.224 (°pāṇin=parisuddha-hattha); Sdhp.100. (Page 417)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Payatana: {'def': '【中】努力。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. prayatna, of yat] striving after, effort, endeavour KhA 108. (Page 418)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Payatta: {'def': '[pp. of pa+yat] making effort, taking care, being on one’s guard, careful Miln.373. (Page 418)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Payirudāharati: {'def': '[pari+ud+āharati with metathesis payir° for pariy°] to speak out, to proclaim aor payirudāhāsi D.II,222 (vaṇṇe); J.I,454 (vyañjanaṁ). (Page 418)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Payirupāsana: {'def': '(nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. payirupāsati] attending to, worshipping: worship, homage M.II,176; S.V,67= It.107; DA.I,142; PvA.138. (Page 418)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Payirupāsanā: {'def': '【阴】侍候，结交。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Payirupāsati: {'def': '(pari+upa+ās+a),侍候(attends on)，交往(associates)，尊敬(honours)。【过】payirupāsi。【过分】payirupāsita。【独】payirupāsitvā。payirupāseyya﹐【未被】应被交往。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pari+upa+ās, with metathesis as in payirudāharati] 1. “to sit close round,” i. e. to attend on (Acc.), to honour, pay homage, worship D.I,47; II,257; M.II,117, S.I,146; A.I,124, 126, 142; IV,337; Dh.64, 65; Th.1, 1236; J.VI,222 (imper. °upāsaya); Pv.II,9⁶¹; Pug.26, 33; SnA 401; VbhA.457 (here def^d by Bdhgh as “punappunaṁ upasaṅkamati”). -- ppr. °upāsanto S.V,67=It.107; PvA.44; and upāsamāna DhA.II,32. -- aor. °upāsiṁ A.IV,213 (Bhagavantaṁ); PvA.50. ‹-› ger. °upāsiya D.II,287. -- 2. to visit Vin.I,214 (ger. °upāsitvā); IV,98. -- pp. payirupāsiṭa (q. v.). (Page 418)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Payirupāsika: {'def': '[fr. payirupāsati] a worshipper ThA.200. (Page 418)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Payirupāsita: {'def': '[pp. of payirupāsati] worshipped PvA.116 (=upaṭṭhita), 205 (=purakkhata). (Page 418)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Payodhara: {'def': '【阳】雨云(a rain cloud)，乳房(the breast of a woman)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Payoga: {'def': '﹐【阳】1.方法(means)、工具(instrument, =karaṇa)。2.准备，从事，事业，练习(preparation, undertaking, occupation, exercise)。payogakaraṇa,【中】努力，追求。payogavipatti,【阴】方法的失败，错误的应用。payogasampatti,【阴】方法的成功。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic prayoga, fr. pa+yuj, see payuñjati] 1. means, instrument J.VI,116 (=karaṇa); SnA 7; DhsA.215 (sa°). -- 2. preparation, undertaking, occupation, exercise, business, action, practice Vin.IV,278; Ps.II,213 (sammā°); Miln.328 (sammā°); KhA 23, 29 sq.; PvA.8 (vapana°), 96 (manta°), 103, 146 (viññatti°; cp. payutta 2), 285 (sakkhara-kkhipana°). payogaṁ karoti to exert oneself, to undertake, to try PvA.184 (=parakkamati).

--karaṇa exertion, pursuit, occupation DhA.III,238 --vipatti failure of means, wrong application PvA.117, 136. --sampatti success of means VvA.30, 32. --suddhi excellency of means, purity in application DhsA.165; VvA.60. --hīna deficient in exertion or application Miln.288. (Page 418)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '( pa+yuj, 见payuñjati) 1.方法，工具 (=karaṇa)。2.准备，工作，练习。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Payogatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. payoga] application (to) Vism.134 (majjhatta°). (Page 418)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹payoga)﹐【阴】专心(application to)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Payojaka: {'def': 'payojetu,【阳】指示者，处理者，经理。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Payojana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+yuj] 1. undertaking business PvA.201. -- 2. appointment J.I,143. -- 3. prescript, injunction DhsA.403. -- 4. purpose, application, use Sdhp.395. (Page 418)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹pa+yuj),【中】1.做事业(undertaking business)。2.约会(appointment)。3.应用(prescript, injunction)。4.使用(purpose, application, use)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Payojeti: {'def': '(pa+yuj+e) 参加，从事，应用，准备，雇用，使用，向…挑战。【过】payojesi。【过分】payojita。【现分】payojenta。【独】payojetvā, payojiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of payuñjati] 1. to undertake, engage in, begin D.I,71 (kammante “set a business on foot”); A.II,82 (kammantaṁ); Sn.404 (vaṇijjaṁ); J.I,61; PvA.130 (kammaṁ). -- 2. to prepare, apply, use, put to, employ PvA.46 (bhesajjaṁ cuṇṇena saddhiṁ). ‹-› 3. to engage, take into service, set to, hire J.I,173; II,417. -- 4. to engage with, come to close quarters J. II.10. -- 5. to put out at interest (vaḍḍhiyā) DA.I,270. -- pp. payojita (q. v.). (Page 418)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Payojita: {'def': '[pp. of payojeti] 1 connected with, directed to, applied SnA 565. -- 2. instigated, directed Miln.3. (Page 418)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Payuta: {'def': '[pp. of pa+yu, cp. Sk. pra+yuta united, fastened to, increased] (wrongly) applied, at random, careless: “misdirected” A.I,199; Sn.711 (°ṁ vācaṁ=obhāsaparikathā -- nimitta-viññatti-payuttaṁ ghāsesana-vācaṁ SnA 497), 930 (=cīvarādīhi sampayutta tadatthaṁ vā payojita SnA 565; Nd¹ 389 however reads payutta and expl^s as “cīvarapayutta” etc.). (Page 418)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Payutta: {'def': '[pp. of payuñjati] 1. yoked Sn.p. 13 (=yottehi yojita SnA 137). -- 2. applied, intent on, devoted to, busy in (Acc., Loc., or --°) J.V,121 (ajjhattaṁ); Pv III,7¹⁰ (sāsane); SnA 497 (viññatti°). -- 3. applicable (either rightly or wrongly); as su° well-behaved, acting well Miln.328; by itself (in bad sense), wrongly applied, wasted (cp. payuta) A.II,81 sq.; Sn.930 (see Nd¹ 389). -- 4. planned, schemed, undertaken Vin.II,194 (Deva dattena Bhagavato vadho p.). (Page 418)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Payuttaka: {'def': '【形】受任命一件工作的人，间谍。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj. n.) [payutta+ka] one who is applied of put to a (bad) task, as spy, hireling; bribed J.I,262 (°cora), 291 (°dhutta). (Page 418)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Payuñjati: {'def': '(pa+yuj +ṁ-a)，束以马具(harnesses)，雇用，应用。【过】payuñji。【过分】payutta。【现分】payuñjamāna。【独】payuñjitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+yuj] to harness, yoke, employ, apply; Pass. payujjati to be applied to Sdhp.400 (ppr. °māna). -- pp. payutta (q. v.). -- Caus. payojeti (q. v.). (Page 418)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Payyaka: {'def': '[pa+ayyaka] (paternal) great-grandfather J.I,2 (ayyaka°); PvA.107 (id.). (Page 418)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】内曾祖父(paternal great-grandfather)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Payāta: {'def': '[pp. of payāti] gone forth, set out, proceeded Pv IV.5⁶ (=gantuṁ āraddha PvA.260); J.III,188, 190. Strange is “evaṁ nānappayātamhi” at Th.1, 945 (Mrs. Rh. D. “thus when so much is fallen away”; Neumann “in solcher Drangsal, solcher Not”). -- duppayāta going or gone wrong, strayed Vv 84⁹ (=duṭṭhu payātha apathe gata VvA.337). (Page 418)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Payāti: {'def': '[pa+yā] to go forward, set out, proceed, step out, advance, only aor pāyāsi J.I,146, 223, 255; 3^rd pl. pāyiṁsu J.I,253 and pāyesuṁ J.IV,220. -- pp. payāta, (q. v.). See also pāyāti. (Page 418)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+yā +a)，向前去，出发，著手进行，泼(水)。【过】payāsi。【过分】payāta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pa°: {'def': '(indecl.) [Ved. pra, Idg. *pro, cp. Gr. prό, Lat. pro, Goth. fra, Lith. pra, prō, Oir. ro-] directional prefix of forward motion, in applied sense often emphasising the action as carried on in a marked degree or even beyond its mark (cp. Ger. ver- in its function of Goth. fra & Ger. vor). Thus the sphere of pa- may be characterised in foll. applications: 1. forth, forward, out: papatati fall forward, i. e. down; °neti bring forth (to); °gaṇhāti hold out; °tharati spread forth; °dhāvati run out; °bajati go forth; °sāreti stretch out; etc. -- 2. (intensive) in a marked degree, more than ordinarily (cp. E. up in cut up, heap up, fill up; thus often to be trsl^d by “up,” or “out,” or “about”): pakopeti up-set; °chindati cut up; °bhañjati break up; °cinati heap up; °kiṇṇaka scattered about; °nāda shouting out; °bhāti shine forth; °bhavati grow up, prevail; °dūseti spoil entirely; °jahati give up entirely; °tapeti make shine exceedingly (C. ativiya dīpeti); °jalati blaze up; °jānāti know well. -- In this meaning often with adjectives like patanu very thin; °thaddha quite stiff; °dakkhiṇa right in pre-eminence; °bala very strong. -- 3. “onward”: paṭṭhāya from . . . onward; pavattati move on; fig. “further, later”: paputta a later (secondary) son, i. e. grandson. -- 4. “in front of,” “before”: padvāra, before the door. -- 5. Sometimes in trs. (reflexive) use, like pakūjin singing out to (each other, cp Ger. besingen, an-rufen).-The most frequent combination with other (modifying) prefixes is sam-ppa; its closest relatives (in meaning 2 especially) are ā and pari. The double (assimilation) p is restored after short vowels, like appadhaṁsiya (a+pa°). (Page 378)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pañca: {'def': '【形】五的。 ~kalyāṇa, 【中】五个美人标志（即：头发，肉，牙齿，皮肤和年龄）。 ~kāmaguṇa, 【阳】五欲。 ~kkhandha, 【阳】五蕴（即：色、受、想、行、识）。 ~gorasa, 【阳】五牛味（母牛的五种产品，即：牛奶，凝乳，酥油，鲜奶油和酸奶）。 ~ṅga, ~ṅgika, 【形】五支，无个部份所组成。 ~ṅgulika, 五指印（手指浸过香水后，才打的五个指印）。~cakkhu, ~netta, 【形】五眼（有五种视觉）。 ~cattāḷīsati, 【阴】四十五。 ~cūḷaka, 【形】五髻（有五个发结）。 ~tiŋsati, 【阴】三十五。 ~dasa,【形】十五。 ~navuti, 【阴】九十五。 ~nīvarana, 五盖（五种禅修障碍，即：贪欲、瞋恚、惛沉睡眠、掉举恶作、疑）。 ~paññāsati, 【阴】五十五。 ~patiṭṭhita, 【中】五体投地（即：以额，腰部，手肘，膝和脚来顶礼）。 ~bandhana, 【中】五缚。 ~bala, 【中】五力（信、精进、念、定、慧）。 ~mahāpariccāga, 【阳】五大施舍（即：最尊贵的财富，儿子，老婆，王国和四肢）。 ~mahāvilokana, 【中】五大观（菩萨转世前所作的五种调查，即：时间，大陆，地方，氏族和母亲）。 ~vaggiya, 【形】五位一伙的（当乔达摩出家修苦行时，陪伴怹一起修行的五位比丘）。~vaṇṇa, 【形】五色的（即：蓝，黄，红，白，褐）。 ~vīsati, 【阴】二十五。 ~saṭṭhi，【阴】六十五。 ~sata, 【中】五百。 ~sattati, 【阴】七十五。 ~sahassa, 【中】五千。 ~sīla, 【中】五戒。 ~hattha, 【形】五腕尺的。(p189)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.-num.) [Ved. pañca, Idg. *penqǔe; cp. Gr. pέnte, Lat. quīnque, Goth. fimf, Lith. penki, Oir. coic] number 5. -- Cases: Gen. Dat. pañcannaṁ, Instr. Abl. pañcahi, Loc. pañcasu; often used in compositional form pañca° (cp. Ved. pañcāra with 5 spokes I.164¹³; Gr. pempw/bolos, Lat. quinqu-ennis etc.). -- 1. Characteristics of No. 5 in its use, with ref, to lit. & fig. application. “Five” is the number of “comprehensive and yet simple” unity or a set; it is applied in all cases of a natural and handy comprehension of several items into a group, after the 5 fingers of the hand, which latter lies at the bottom of all primitive expressions of No. 5 (see also below pañc’ aṅgulika. The word for 5 itself in its original form is identical with the word for hand *pr∂q, cp. Lat. com°, decem, centum etc.) -

A. No. 5, appl^d (a) with ref. to time: catupañcāhaṁ 4 or 5 days J.II,114 (cp. quinque diebus Horace Sat I.3¹⁶); maraṇaṁ tuyhaṁ oraṁ māsehi pañcahi after 5 months Vv 63¹⁰, p. māse vasitvā DA.I,319 (cp. qu. menses Hor. Sat. II.3²⁸⁹). -- (b) of space: °yojanaṭṭhāna J.III,504; °yojan-ubbedho gajavaro VvA.33; °bhūmako pāsādo J.I,58 (cp. the house of Death as 5 stories high in Grimm, Mārchen No. 42 ed. Reclam). -- (c) of a group, set, company, etc. (cp. 5 peoples RV III,37⁹; VI,11⁴; VIII,9² etc.; gods X.55³; priests II.34¹⁴; III,7⁷; leaders of the Greek ships Hom. Iliad 16, 171; ambassadors Genesis 47²; quinque viri Hor. Sat. II.5⁵⁵; Epist. II.1²⁴): p. janā J.V,230; p. amaccā J.V,231; p. hatthino DhA.I,164; pañca nāriyo agamiṁsu Vv 32²; p. puttāni khādāmi Pv.I,6³. -- Note. No. 5 in this applⁿ is not so frequent in Pāli as in older literature (Vedas e. g.); instead of the simple 5 we find more freq. the higher decimals 50 and 500. See also below §§ 3, 4.

B. No. 15 in two forms: pañcadasa (f. °ī the 15th day of the month Vv 15⁶=A.I,144; Sn.402) VvA.67 (°kahāpaṇa-sahassāni dāpesi), and paṇṇarasa (also as f. ī of the 15th or full-moon day Pv III,3¹; DhA.I,198; III,92; IV,202; VvA.314; SnA 78) Sn.153 (pannaraso uposatho); Vv 64² (paṇṇarase va cando; expl^d as paṇṇarasiyaṁ VvA.276); DhA.I,388 (of age, 15 or 16 years); DA.I,17 (°bhedo Khuddaka-nikāyo); SnA 357 (pannarasahi bhikkhu-satehi=1500, instead of the usual 500); PvA.154 (°yojana). The applⁿ is much the same as 5 and 50 (see below), although more rare, e. g. as measure of space: °yojana DhA.I,17 (next in sequence to paṇṇāsa-yojana); J.I,315; PvA.154 (cp. 15 furlongs from Jerusalem to Bethany John 11, 18; 15 cubits above the mountains rose the flood Gen. 7. 20).

C. No. 25 in two forms: pañcavīsati (the usual) e. g. DhsA.185 sq.; Miln.289 (citta-dubbalī-karaṇā dhammā); paṇṇa-vīsati, e. g. J.IV,352 (nāriyo); Th.2, 67, and paṇṇuvīsaṁ (only at J.III,138). Similarly to 15 and 25 the number 45 (pañca-cattāḷīsa) is favoured in giving distances with °yojana, e. g. at J.I,147, 348; DhA.I,367.-Application: of 25: (1) time: years J.III,138; DhA.I,4; (2) space: miles high and wide DhA.II,64 (ahipeto); VvA.236 (yojanāni pharitvā pabhā).

2. Remarks on the use of 50 and 500 (5000). Both 50 and 500 are found in stereotyped and always recurring combinations (not in Buddhist literature alone, but all over the Ancient World), and applied to any situation indiscriminately. They have thus lost their original numerical significance and their value equals an expression like our “thousands,” cp. the use of Lat. mille and 600, also similarly many other high numerals in Pāli literature, as mentioned under respective units (4, 6, 8 e. g. in 14, 16, 18, etc.). Psychologically 500 is to be expl^d as “a great hand,” i. e. the 5 fingers magnified to the 2^nd decade, and is equivalent to an expression like “a lot” (originally “only one,” cp. casting the lot, then the one as a mass or collection), or like heaps, tons, a great many, etc. -- Thus 50 (and 500) as the numbers of “comm-union” are especially freq. in recording a company of men, a host of servants, animals in a herd, etc., wherever the single constituents form a larger (mostly impressive, important) whole, as an army, the king’s retinue, etc. -- A. No. 50 (paññāsa; the by-form paṇṇāsa only at DhA.III,207), in foll. appl^ns: (a) of time: does not occur, but see below under 55. -- (b) of space (cp. 50 cubits the breadth of Noah’s ark Gen. 6. 15; the height of the gallows (Esther 5. 14; 7. 9) J.I,359 (yojanāni); DhA.III,207 (°hattho ubbedhena rukkho); Vism.417 (paripuṇṇa °yojana suriyamaṇḍala); DhA.I,17 (°yojana). -- (c) of a company or group (cp. 50 horses RV II.18⁵; V,18⁵; wives VIII,19³⁶; men at the oars Hom. Il. 2. 719; 16. 170, servants Hom. Od. 7, 103, 22, 421) J.III,220 (corā); V,161 (pallaṅkā), 421 (dijakaññāyo); Sn.p. 87; SnA 57 (bhikkhū). -- Note. 55 (pañcapaññāsa) is used instead of 50 in time expressions (years), e. g. at DhA.I,125; II,57; PvA.99, 142; also in groups: DhA.I,99 (janā). -- B. No. 500 (pañcasata°, pañcasatā, pañcasatāni). -- (a) of time: years (as Peta or Petī) Vv 84³⁴; Pv.II,1⁵; PvA.152 (with additional 50). (b) of space: miles high Pv IV.3²⁸; J.I,204 (°yojana-satikā); Vism.72 (°dhanu-satika, 500 bows in distance). -- (C) of groups of men, servants, or a herd, etc. (cp. 500 horses RV X.93¹⁴; witnesses of the rising of Christ 1 Cor. 15--6; men armed Vergil Aen. 10. 204; men as representatives Hom. Od. 3. 7; 500 knights or warriors very frequently in Nibelungenlied, where it is only meant to denote a “goodly company, 500 or more”) Arahants KhA 98; Bhikkhus very frequent, e. g. D.I,1; Vin.II,199; J.I,116, 227; DhA.II,109, 153; III,262, 295; IV,184, 186; Sāvakas J.I,95; Upāsakas J.II,95; PvA.151; Paccekabuddhas DhA.IV,201; PvA.76; Vighāsâdā J.II,95; DhA.II,154; Sons PvA.75; Thieves DhA.II,204; PvA.54; Relatives PvA.179; Women-servants (parivārikā itthiyo) Pv.II,12⁶; VvA.69, 78, 187; PvA.152; Oxen A.IV,41; Monkeys J.III,355; Horses Vin.III,6. -- Money etc. as present, reward or fine representing a “round-sum” (cp. Nibelungen 314: horses with gold, 317: mark; dollars as reward Grimm No. 7; drachms as pay Hor. Sat. II.7⁴³) kahāpaṇas Sn.980, 982; PvA.273; blows with stick as fine Vin.I,247. -- Various: a caravan usually consists of 500 loaded wagons, e. g. J.I,101; DhA.II,79; PvA.100, 112; chariots VvA.78; ploughs Sn.p. 13. Cp. S.I,148 (vyagghī-nisā); Vin.II,285 (ūna-pañcasatāni); J.II,93 (accharā); V,75 (vāṇijā); DhA.I,89 (suvaṇṇasivikā), 352 (rāja-satāni); IV,182 (jāti°) KhA 176 (paritta-dīpā). Also BSk. pañ’opasthāyikā-śatāni Divy 529; pañca-mātrāṇi strī-śatāni Divy 533. -- Note. When Gotama said that his “religion” would last 500 years he meant that it would last a very long time, practically for ever. The later change of 500 to 5,000 is immaterial to the meaning of the expression, it only indicates a later period (cp. 5,000 in Nibelungeniled for 500, also 5,000 men in ambush Joshua 8. 12; converted by Peter Acts 4. 4; fed by Christ with 5 loaves Matthew 14. 21). Still more impressive than 500 is the expression 5 Koṭis (5 times 100,000 or 10 million), which belongs to a comparatively later period, e. g. at DhA.I,62 (ariya-sāvaka-koṭiyo), 256 (°mattā-ariyasāvakā); IV,190 (p. koti-mattā ariya-sāvakā).

3. Typical sets of 5 in the Pali Canon. °aggaṁ first fruits of 5 (kinds), viz. khett°, rās°, koṭṭh°, kumbhi°, bhojan° i. e. of the standing crop, the threshing floor, the granary, the pottery, the larder SnA 270. °aṅgā 5 gentlemanly qualities (of king or brahmin): sujāta, ajjhāyaka, abhirūpa, sīlavā, paṇḍita (see aṅga; on another combⁿ with aṅga see below). The phrase pañc’ aṅgasamannāgata & °vippahīna (S.I,99; A.V,16) refers to the 5 nīvaraṇāni: see expl^d at Vism.146. °aṅgikaturiya 5 kinds of music: ātata, vitata, ātata-vitata, ghana, susira. °abhiññā 5 psychic powers (see Cpd. 209). °ānantarika-kammāni 5 acts that have immediate retribution (Miln.25), either 5 of the 6 abhiṭhānas (q. v.) or (usually) murder, theft, impurity, lying, intemperance (the 5 sīlas) cp. Dhs.trsl. 267. °indriyāni 5 faculties, viz. saddhā, viriya, sati, samādhi, paññā (see indriya B. 15--19). °vidhaṁ (rāja-) kakudhabhaṇḍaṁ, insignia regis viz. vāḷavījanī, uṇhīsa, khagga, chatta, pādukā. °kalyāṇāni, beauty-marks: kesa°, maṁsa°, aṭṭhi°, chavi°, vaya°. °kāmaguṇā pleasures of the 5 senses (=taggocarāni pañc’āyatanāni gahitāni honti SnA 211). °gorasā 5 products of the cow: khīra, dadhi, takka, navanīta, sappi. °cakkhūni, sorts of vision (of a Buddha): maṁsa° dibba° paññā° buddha° samanta°. °taṇhā cravings, specified in 4 sets of 5 each: see Nd² 271^v. °nikāyā 5 collections (of Suttantas) in the Buddh. Canon, viz. Dīgha° Majjhima° Saṁyutta°, Aṅguttara° Khuddaka°, e. g. Vin.II,287. °nīvaraṇāni or obstacles: kāmacchanda, abhijjhā-vyāpāda, thīnamiddha, uddhacca-kukkucca, vicikicchā. °patiṭṭhitaṁ 5 fold prostration or veneration, viz. with forehead, waist, elbows, knees, feet (Childers) in phrase °ena vandati (sometimes °ṁ vandati, e. g. SnA 78, 267) J.V,502; SnA 267, 271, 293, 328, 436; VvA.6; DhA.I,197; IV,178, etc. °bandhana either 5 ways of binding or pinioning or 5 fold bondage J.IV,3 (as “ure pañcaṅgika-bandhanaṁ” cp. kaṇṭhe pañcamehi bandhanehi bandhitvā S.IV,201); Nd^a 304^III,B2 (rājā bandhāpeti andhu-bandhanena vā rajju°, saṅkhalika°, latā°, parikkhepa°), with which cp. Śikṣāsamucc. 165: rājñā pañcapāśakena bandhanena baddhaḥ. -- There is a diff. kind of bandhana which has nothing to do with binding, but which is the 5 fold ordeal (obligation: pañcavidhabandhana-kāraṇaṁ) in Niraya, and consists of the piercing of a red hot iron stake through both hands, both feet and the chest; it is a sort of crucifixion. We may conjecture that this “bandhana” is a corruption of “vaddhana” (of vyadh, or viddhana?), and that the expression originally was pañcaviddhana-kāraṇa (instead of pañca-vidha-bandhana-k°). See passages under bandhana & cp. M.III,182; A.I,141; Kvu 597; SnA 479. °balāni 5 forces: saddhā° viriya° sati° samādhi° paññā° D.II,120; M.II,12; S.III,96; A.III,12 (see also bala). °bhojanāni 5 kinds of food: odāna, kummāsa, sattu, maccha, maṁsa Vin.IV,176. °macchariyāni 5 kinds of selfishness: āvāsa° kula° lābha° vaṇṇa° dhamma°. °rajāni defilements: rūpa°, sadda° etc. (of the 5 senses) Nd¹ 505; SnA 574. °vaṇṇā 5 colours (see ref. for colours under pīta and others), viz. nīla, pītaka, lohitaka, kaṇha, odāta (of B’s eye) Nd² 235^Q; others with ref. to paduma-puṇḍarīka VvA.41; to paduma DhA.III,443; to kusumāni DA.I,140; DhA.IV,203. °vaṇṇa in another meaning (fivefold) in connection with pīti (q. v.). °saṁyojanāni fetters (q. v.). °saṅgā impurities, viz. rāga, dosa, moha, māna, diṭṭhi (cp. taṇhā) DhA.IV,109. °sīla the 5 moral precepts, as sub-division of the 10 (see dasasīla and Nd² under sīla on p. 277).

4. Other (not detailed) passages with 5: Sn.660 (abbudāni), 677 (nahutāni koṭiyo pañca); Th.2, 503 (°kaṭuka=pañcakāmaguṇa-rasa ThA.291); DhA.II,25 (°mahānidhi); SnA 39 (°pakāra-gomaṇḍala-puṇṇabhāva). Cp. further: guṇā Miln.249; paṇṇāni Vin.I,201 (nimba°, kuṭaja°, paṭola°, sulasi°, kappāsika°); Paṇḍu-rāja-puttā J.V,426; pabbagaṇṭhiyo Miln.103; pucchā DhsA.55; mahā-pariccāgā DhA.III,441; mahā-vilokanāni DhA.I,84; vatthūni Vin.II,196 sq.; vāhanāni (of King Pajjota) DhA.I,196; suddhāvāsā Dhs.A 14. In general see Vin.V,128--133 (var. sets of 5).

--aṅga five (bad) qualities (see aṅga 3 and above 3), in phrase vippahīna free from the 5 sins D.III,269; Nd² 284 C; cp. BSk. pañcāṅga-viprahīna. Ep. of the Buddha Divy 95, 264 & °samannāgata endowed with the 5 good qualities A.V,15 (of senāsana, expl^d at Vism.122): see also above. --aṅgika consisting of 5 parts, fivefold, in foll. comb^ns: °jhāna (viz. vitakka, vicāra, pīti, sukha, cittass’ekaggatā) Dhs.83; °turiya orchestra S.I,131; Th.1, 398; 2, 139; Vv 36⁴; DhA.I,274, 394; °bandhana bond J.IV,3. --aṅgula=°aṅgulika J.IV,153 (gandha°); SnA 39 (usabhaṁ nahāpetvā bhojetvā °ṁ datvā mālaṁ bandhitvā). --aṅgulika (also °aka) the 5 finger-mark, palm-mark, the magic mark of the spread hand with the fingers extended (made after the hand & 5 fingers have been immersed in some liquid, preferably a solution of sandal wood, gandha; but also blood). See Vogel, the 5 finger-token in Pāli Literature, Amsterdam Akademie 1919 (with plates showing ornaments on Bharhut Tope), cp. also J.P.T,S. 1884, 84 sq. It is supposed to provide magical protection (esp. against the Evil Eye). Vin.II,123 (cp. Vin. Texts II.116); J.I,166, 192; II,104 (gandha °ṁ deti), 256 (gandhaā, appl^d to a cetiya); III,23, 160 (lohita°); Vv 33¹⁸ (gandha°ṁ adāsiṁ Kassapassa thūpasmiṁ); Mhvs 32, 4 (see trsl. p. 220); DhA.III,374 (goṇānaṁ gandha-°āni datvā); SnA 137 (setamālāhi sabba-gandha-sugandhehi p°akehi ca alaṅkatā paripuṇṇa-aṅgapaccaṅgā, of oxen). Cp. MVastu I.269 (stūpeṣu pañcaṅgulāni; see note on p. 579). Quotations of similar use in brahmanical literature see at Vogel p. 6 sq. --āvudha (āyudha) set of 5 weapons (sword, spear, bow, battle-axe, shield, after Childers) Miln.339 (see Miln.trsl. II.227), cp. p° sannaddha J.III,436, 467; IV,283, 437; V,431; VI,75; sannaddha-p° J.IV,160 (of sailors). They seem to be different ones at diff. passages. --âhaṁ 5 days Vin.IV,281; J.II,114. --cūḷaka with 5 topknots J.V,250 (of a boy). --nakha with 5 claws, N. of a five-toed animal J.V,489 (so read for pañca na khā, misunderstood by C.). --paṭṭhika at Vin.II,117, 121, 152; is not clear (v. l. paṭika). Vin. Texts III,97 trsl. “cupboards” and connect it with Sk. paṭṭikā, as celapattikaṁ Vin.II,128 undoubtedly is (“strip of cloth laid down for ceremonial purposes,” trsl. III,128). It also occurs at Vin.IV,47. --patikā (f.) having had 5 husbands J.V,424, 427. --mālin of a wild animal J.VI,497 (=pancaṅgika-turiya-saddo viya C., not clear). --māsakamattaṁ a sum of 5 māsakas DhA.II,29. --vaggiya (or °ika SnA 198) belonging to a group of five. The 5 brahmins who accompanied Gotama when he became an ascetic are called p. bhikkhū. Their names are Aññākondañña, Bhaddiya, Vappa, Assaji, Mahānāma. M.I,170; II,94; S.III,66; PvA.21 (°e ādiṁ katvā); SnA 351; cp. chabbaggiya. --vidha fivefold J.I,204 (°ā abhirakkhā); VI,341 (°paduma), °bandhana: see this. --sādhāraṇa-bhāva fivefold connection J.IV,7. --seṭṭha (Bhagavā) “the most excellent in the five” Sn.355 (=pañcannaṁ paṭhamasissānaṁ pañcavaggiyānaṁ seṭṭho, pañcahi vā saddhādīhi indriyehi sīlādīhi vā dhamma-khandhehi ativisiṭṭhehi cakkhūhi ca seṭṭho SnA 351). --hattha having 5 hands J.V,431. (Page 387)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】五的。pañcakalyāṇa,【中】五个美人标志(即：头发，肉，牙齿，皮肤和年龄)。pañcakāmaguṇa,【阳】五欲。pañcakkhandha,【阳】五蕴(即：rūpaṁ色、vedanā受、saññā想、saṅkhārā行、viññāṇaṁ识)。pañcagorasa,【阳】五牛味(母牛的五种产品，即：牛奶，凝乳，酥油，鲜奶油和酸奶)。pañcaṅga, pañcaṅgika,【形】五支，无个部份所组成。pañcaṅgulika, 五指印(手指浸过香水后，才打的五个指印)。pañcacakkhu, pañcanetta,【形】五眼(有五种视觉)。pañcacattāḷīsati,【阴】四十五。pañcacūḷaka,【形】五髻(有五个发结)。pañcatiṁsati,【阴】三十五。pañcadasa,【形】十五。pañcanavuti,【阴】九十五。pañcanīvaraṇa, 五盖(五种禅修障碍，即：贪欲、瞋恚、惛沉.睡眠、掉举.恶作、疑)。pañcapaññāsati,【阴】五十五。pañcapatiṭṭhita,【中】五体投地(=paramanipaccākāro作最上的五体投地礼。即：以额，腰部，手肘，膝和脚来顶礼)。pañcabandhana,【中】五缚。pañcabala,【中】五力(信、精进、念、定、慧)。pañcamahāpariccāga,【阳】五大施舍(即：最尊贵的财富，儿子，老婆，王国和四肢)。pañca-maṇḍala-namakkāra (梵namaskāra那谟悉羯罗)，五体投地。pañcamahāvilokana,【中】五大观(菩萨转世前所作的五种调查，即：时间，大陆，地方，氏族和母亲)。pañcavaggiya,【形】五位一夥的(当乔达摩出家修苦行时，陪伴一起修行的五位比丘)。pañcavaṇṇa,【形】五色的(即：蓝，黄，红，白，褐)。pañcavīsati(梵pañca-viṃwati),【阴】二十五。pañca-viṃwati-bhava(梵), 二十五有：「四恶趣(为四)四天下天(并前为八)六欲天(并前为十四)梵天(并前为十五)无想天(并前十六)五净居天(并前十七)初禅二禅三禅四禅等(并前合二十一)无色界四天。是名二十五有。」(《法门名义集》T54.204.1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pañcadhā: {'def': '(adv.) in five ways, fivefold DhsA.351. (Page 389)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【副】以五方式。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【副】以五方式。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pañcadvārāvajjanacitta: {'def': '﹐【中】五门转向心，若所缘呈现於五根门(dvāra)其中之一，把心转向所缘的是五门转向心，其作用是转向(āvajjana)呈现於五根门之一的目标；它使五识之一(看、听、嗅、尝、触)能够随后生起。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pañcaka: {'def': '【中】五个一组，五品。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】五个一组，五品。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pañca] fivefold, consisting of five J.I,116 (°kammaṭṭhāna); Dhs. chapters 167--175 (°naya fivefold system of jhāna, cp. Dhs. trslⁿ 52); SnA 318 (°nipāta of Aṅguttara). -- nt. pañcakaṁ a pentad, five Vin.I,255 (the 5 parts of the kaṭhina robe, see Vin. Texts II.155), cp. p. 287; pl. pañcakā sets of five Vism.242. The 32 ākāras or constituents of the human body are divided into 4 pañcaka’s (i. e. sets of 5 more closely related parts), viz. taca° “skin-pentad,” the 5 dermatoid constituents: kesā, lomā, nakhā, dantā, taco; vakka° the next five, ending with the kidneys; papphāsa° id. ending with the lungs & comprising the inner organs proper; matthaluṅga° id. ending with the brain, and 2 chakka’s (sets of 6), viz. meda° & mutta°. See e. g. VbhA.249, 258. (Page 389)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pañcakkhattuŋ: {'def': '【副】五次。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pañcakkhattuṁ: {'def': '(adv.) five times. (Page 389)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【副】五次。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pañcakāmaguṇa: {'def': '【阳】五欲，五种欲。A.9.65./IV,458.：“Pañcime, bhikkhave, kāmaguṇā. Katame pañca? Cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā, sotaviññeyyā saddā …pe… ghānaviññeyyā gandhā… jivhāviññeyyā rasā… kāyaviññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṁhitā rajanīyā. Ime kho, bhikkhave, pañca kāmaguṇā.(眼所识知(见)之色为可意、可爱、可乐、可爱色、伴随欲、可染。耳所闻之声…。鼻所嗅之香…。舌所尝之味…。身所触之触为可爱、可乐、可意、爱色、引欲、可染。诸比丘！此为五种欲。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pañcama: {'def': '(adj.) [compar.-superl. formation fr. pañca, with °ma as in Lat. supremus, for the usual °to as in Gr. pέmptos, Lat. quintus, also Sk. pañcathaḥ] num. ord. the fifth D.I,88; Sn.84, 99, 101; VvA.102; PvA.52 (°e māse in the 5^th month the Petī has to die); DhA.III,195 (°e sattāhe in the 5^th week). -- f. pañcamā PvA.78 (ito °āya jātiyā) and pañcamī Sn.437 (senā); PvA.79 (jāti). (Page 389)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pañcamaka: {'def': '(adj.)=pañcama J.I,55. (Page 389)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pañcappakaraṇaṭṭhakathā: {'def': 'f. 五論[界説論, 人施設論, 論事, 雙論, 発趣論]の註釈. DhkA. , PpA. , KvA. , YA. , Paṭṭh A.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'f. 五論 [界說論, 人施設論, 論事, 雙論, 發趣論]的註釋. DhkA., PpA., KvA., YA., Paṭṭh A.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Pañcasaṅgā: {'def': '(‹pañca五+saṅga执著)，【阳】五执著(复数)(五执著是染(rāga)、瞋(dosa)、痴(moha)、傲慢(māna)、见解(diṭṭhi)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pañcasikha: {'def': 'm. [Sk. Pañcaśikha] 般遮翼, 五髻, 五頂[楽神, ガンダルバの子].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'm. [Sk. Pañcaśikha] 般遮翼, 五髻, 五頂 [樂神, ガンダルバ(gandharva(Sk.) = gandhabba, 乾達婆)之子].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Pañcaso: {'def': '【无】五个五个地，以五方式。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】五个五个地，以五方式。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adv.) by fives. (Page 389)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pañcasīla: {'def': '【中】五戒(离杀生、离偷盗、离邪淫、离妄语、离饮酒)。KhA.31.︰ Aṅgatoti ettha ca pāṇātipātassa pañca aṅgāni bhavanti -- (1)pāṇo ca hoti, (2)pāṇasaññī ca, (3)vadhakacittañca paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti, (4)vāyamati, (5)tena ca maratīti. Adinnādānassāpi pañceva-- (1)parapariggahitañca hoti, (2)parapariggahitasaññī ca, (3)theyyacittañca paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti, (4)vāyamati, (5)tena ca ādātabbaṁ ādānaṁ gacchatīti. Abrahmacariyassa pana cattāri aṅgāni bhavanti-- (1)ajjhācariyavatthu ca hoti, (2)tattha ca sevanacittaṁ paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti, (3)sevanapaccayā payogañca samāpajjati, (4)sādiyati cāti, tathā paresaṁ dvinnampi. Tattha musāvādassa (1)tāva musā ca hoti taṁ vatthu, (2)visaṁvādanacittañca paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti, (3)tajjo ca vāyāmo, (4)paravisaṁvādanañca viññāpayamānā viññatti pavattatīti cattāri aṅgāni veditabbāni. Surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānassa pana (1)surādīnañca aññataraṁ hoti, (2)madanīyapātukamyatācittañca paccupaṭṭhitaṁ hoti, (3)tajjañca vāyāmaṁ āpajjati, (4)pīte ca pavisatīti imāni cattāri aṅgānīti. Evamettha aṅgatopi viññātabbo vinicchayo.(「从构成要素」：在这些当中，「杀生」有五种条件：(1)是生物，(2)生物想，(3)现起杀心，(4)付之行动，(5)及因此而死。「不与取」也有五（种条件）：(1)是他人所有物，(2)他人所有物想，(3)现起盗心，(4)努力，(5)以及因此而取可取之物。「非梵行」有四种条件：(1)交媾，(2)现起从事的心，(3)达到从事之缘的方式，(4)以及受(乐)。后面两者同样(四条件)。这里，当知「虚诳语」有四种条件：(1)是虚诳，(2)对那对象现起欺骗的心，(3)适当的努力，(4)以及转起欺骗他人所知的表示。「放逸原因的谷物酒、花果酒和酒精」有这四条件：(1)谷物酒等其中之一，(2)现起想要喝酒的心，(3)从事适当的努力，(4)以及已喝入。如此乃从构成有素对所应知的抉择。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pañcavidha: {'def': '【形】五倍。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】五倍。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pañcābhiññā: {'def': '【阴】五神通(即：神变智iddhividhaṁ，天耳界智dibbasotadhātuñāṇaṁ，他心智cetopariyañāṇaṁ，宿住随念智pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṁ，有情死生智sattānaṁ cutūpapāte ñāṇaṁ)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】五神通（即：神变智，天耳界智，他心智，宿住随念智，生死智）。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pañcāha: {'def': '【中】五天。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】五天。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pañcāla: {'def': 'm. [〃] パンチャーラ, 般遮羅[十六大国の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'm. [〃] パンチャーラ(Pañcāla), 般遮羅 [十六大國之一].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Pañcānantariya: {'def': '【中】五无间业(五种重大的罪孽，犯了死后堕无间地狱，即：弑母，弑父，弑圣者〔阿罗汉〕，使佛身上充血，破和合僧)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】五无间业（五种重大的罪孽，犯了死后堕无间地狱，即：弑母，弑父，弑圣者〔阿罗汉〕，使佛身上充血，破和合僧）。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pañcāsīti: {'def': '【阴】八十五。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】八十五。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pañcāvudha: {'def': '【中】五武器(即：刀剑，矛，战斧，弓，钉头槌)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】五武器（即：刀剑，矛，战斧，弓，钉头槌）。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pañha: {'def': '【三】问题，质询。pañhavissajjana, pañhavyākaraṇa,【中】回答。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【三】问题，质询。 ~vissajjana, ~vyākaraṇa, 【中】回答。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Ved. praśna, for details of etym. see pucchati] mode of asking, inquiry, investigation, question D.I,11 (deva°) M.I,83; III,30; A.I,103, 288; III,81, 191 sq., 419 sq.; V,50 sq.; Sn.512, 957, 1005, 1024, 1148 etc., Nd¹ 464; Miln.28, 340; DA.I,97. pañhaṁ pucchati to ask a question Nd² under pucchā (q. v.).

--paṭibhāna an answer to a question M.I,83; Miln.28. --vīmaṁsaka one who tests a question Sn.827; Nd¹ 166; SnA 538. --vyākaraṇa mode of answering questions, of which there are 4, viz. ekaṁsa “direct,” vibhajja “qualified,” paṭipucchā “after further questioning,” ṭhapanīya “not to be answered or left undecided,” thus enum^d at D.III,229; A.I,197 sq.; II,46; Miln.339. (Page 391)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pañja: {'def': '[is it to be puñja?] heap, pile A.II,75 (meaning different?); Cp. I.10¹⁶. (Page 389)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pañjali: {'def': '(adj.) [pa+añjali. Cp. Ep. Sk. prāñjali] with outstretched hands, as token of reverence Sn.1031; in cpd. pañjalī-kata (cp. añjalīkata; añjali+pp. of kṛ) raising one’s folded hands Sn.566, 573; Th.1, 460; J.VI,501. Cp. BSk. prāñjalīkṛta MV astu II.257, 287, 301. (Page 389)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pañjalika: {'def': 'pañjalī,【形】合掌，合十。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'pañjalī, 【形】合十。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pañjali] holding up the clasped hands as token of respectful salutation S.I,226; Sn.485, 598. (Page 389)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pañjara: {'def': '(m. & nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. pañjara, which probably belongs to Lat. pango, q. v. Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.] a cage, J.I,436; II,141; III,305 (sīha°); IV,213; V,232 (sīha), 365; VI,385 (sīha°), 391; Miln.23 (°antaragata gone into the c.); 27; DhA.I,164 (nakha°), where meaning is “frame”; VbhA.238; +sīha° meaning window. (Page 389)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】笼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】笼。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pañjarāgeha: {'def': 'n.［Pañjara-geha］笼堂，かごの家', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Pañjasa: {'def': '(adj.) [pa+añjasa] in the right order, straight A.II,15. (Page 389)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pañña: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [the adj. form of paññā] of wisdom, endowed with knowledge or insight, possessed of the highest cognition, in foll. cpds.: anissaraṇa° D.I,245; S.II,194; IV,332; anoma° Sn.343; appa° S.I,198; J.II,166; III,223, 263; avakujja° A.I,130; gambhīra° S.I,190; javana° S.I,63; Nd² 235; tikkha°; dup° D.III,252, 282; S.I,78, 191; II,159 sq.; M.III,25; A.II,187 sq.; Dh.111, 140; Pug.13; DhA.II,255; nibbedhika° S.I,63; A.II,178; Nd² 235; puṭhu° ibid.; bhāvita° S.IV,111; A.V,42 sq.; bhūri° S.III,143; IV,205; manda° VbhA.239; mahā° S.I,63, 121; II,155; A.I,23, 25; II,178 sq.; Nd² 235; SnA 347; sap° S.I,13, 22, 212; IV,210; A.IV,245; Pv I 8⁸; 11⁵; PvA.60 (=paṇḍita), 131 (+buddhimant); suvimutta° A.V,29 sq.; hāsa° S.I,63, 191; V,376; Nd² 235. By itself (i. e. not in cpd.) only at Dh.208 (=lokiyalokuttara-paññāya sampanna DhA.III,172) and 375 (=paṇḍita DhA.IV,111). (Page 389)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】明智的，具有智慧的。(在【合】中)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】明智的，具有智慧的。 (在【合】中)。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paññatta: {'def': '¹ [pp. of paññāpeti, cp. BSk. prajñapta] pointed out, made known, ordered, designed, appointed, or‹-› dained S.II,218; A.I,98, 151; IV,16, 19; V,74 sq.; Pv IV.1³⁵; DhA.I,274; VvA.9 (su° mañca-pītha), 92 (niccabhatta); PvA.78. Esp. freq. in ster. formula paññatte āsane nisīdi he sat down on the appointed (i. e. special) chair (seat) D.I,109, 125, 148; S.I,212; Dh.148; SnA 267; PvA.16, 23, 61. (Page 389)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paññāpeti 的【过分】)。已使知道，已宣布，已准备(座位等)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (nt.) [abstr. fr. paññā] wisdom, sense etc. S.V,412 (v. l. paññatā). See also paññatā. (Page 390)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paññāpeti 的【过分】)。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paññatti: {'def': '(=Paṇṇatti)(‹paññāpeti),【阴】指示，名字，概念，主意，规则(making known, manifestation, description, designation, name, idea, notion, concept)。两种概念：「事务概念」（attha-paññatti通过概念表达某事务）与「名字概念」（nāmapaññatti表达该事务的名字或名称）。概念(施设)有十二种︰1.tajjā-paññatti,适当的概念(胜义谛，取究竟法作为禅观的对象)。2.upādā-paññatti, 所造的概念(由胜义谛衍生出来的概念)。3.samūha-paññatti, 集合的概念。4.jāti-paññatti, 生的概念(一般的概念)。5.saṇṭhāna-paññatti,形状的概念。6.disā-paññatti, 方位的概念。7.kāla-paññatti, 时间的概念。8.ākāsa-paññatti, 空间的概念。9.nimitta-paññatti, 相的概念(似相paṭbhāga-nimitta、取相uggaha-nimitta、遍作相parikamma-nimitta预备相)。10.natthi-paññatti, 无有的概念。11.santati-paññatti, 连续的概念。12.saṅketa-paññatti, 世俗的概念。在《中部经》中，paññatti与samaññā(名称、称呼)之语并用，在《相应部经》则与saṅkhā(称、名称)、samaññā(名称、称呼)之语一起使用，并以paññatti-patha(施设路)而与nirutti-patha(词路)、adhivacana-patha(增语路)同时使用。在《长部经》则与samaññā, nirutti, vohāra(通称)等语共用。《义释》：saṅkhā samaññā paññatti vohāra nāma nāmakamma nāmadheyya nirutti vyañjana abhilāpa(称、名称、施设、通称、名、名业、命名、词、文(标记)、称呼)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】指示，名字，观念，主意，规则。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. paññāpeti, cp. paññatta¹] making known, manifestation, description, designation, name, idea, notion, concept. On term see Cpd. 3 sq., 198, 199; Kvu trslⁿ 1; Dhs.trslⁿ 340. -- M.III,68; S.III,71; IV,38 (māra°), 39 (satta°, dukkha°, loka°); A.II,17; V,190; Ps.II,171, 176; Pug.1; Dhs.I,309; Nett 1 sq., 38, 188; KhA 102, 107; DA.I,139; SnA 445, 470; PvA.200. The spelling also occurs as paṇṇatti, e. g. at J.II,65 (°vahāra); Miln.173 (loka°); KhA 28; adj. paṇṇattika (q. v.). (Page 390)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paññatti-vāda: {'def': 'Paṇṇatti-vāda m. 說假部 [部派名].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'Paṇṇatti-vāda m. 説仮部[部派名].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Paññatā: {'def': '【阴】(在【合】中) 有智慧的事实。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】 (在【合】中) 有智慧的事实。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [secondary abstract formation fr. paññā, in meaning equal to paññāṇa] having sense, wisdom A.III,421 (dup°=foolishness) V,159 (id.); mahā°, puthu°, vipula° A.I,45. See also paññatta². (Page 389)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paññavant: {'def': '(adj.) [paññā+vant, with reduction of ā to a see Geiger, P.Gr. § 23] possessed of insight, wise, intelligent, sensible Vin.I,60; D.III,237, 252, 265, 282, 287; M.I,292; III,23; S.I,53, 79; II,159 sq., 207, 279 (daharo ce pi p.); IV,243; V,100, 199, 392, 401; A.II,76, 187, 230; III,2 sq., 127, 183; IV,85, 217, 271, 357; V,25, 124 sq.; Sn.174; Nd² 259; Dh.84; J.I,116; Pug.13; DhA.II,255; KhA 54; VbhA.239, 278; PvA.40. Cp. paññāṇavant. (Page 390)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paññavantu: {'def': '【形】明智的，聪明的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】明智的，聪明的。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paññā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic prajñā, pa+jñā] intelligence, comprising all the higher faculties of cognition, “intellect as conversant with general truths” (Dial. II.68), reason, wisdom, insight, knowledge, recognition. See on term Mrs. Rh. D. “Buddhism” (1914) pp. 94, 130, 201; also Cpd. 40, 41, 102 and discussion of term at Dhs. trsl. 17, 339, cp. scholastic definition with all the synonyms of intellectual attainment at Nd² 380=Dhs.16 (paññā pajānanā vicayo etc.). As tt. in Buddhist Psych. Ethics it comprises the highest and last stage as 3rd division in the standard “Code of religious practice” which leads to Arahantship or Final Emancipation. These 3 stages are: (1) sīla-kkhandha (or °sampadā), code of moral duties; (2) samādhi-kkhandha (or cittasampadā) code of emotional duties or practice of con centration & meditation; (3) paññā-kkhandha (or °sampadā) code of intellectual duties or practice of the attainment of highest knowledge. (See also jhāna¹.) They are referred to in almost every Suttanta of Dīgha 1. (given in extenso at D.I,62--85) and frequently mentioned elsewhere, cp. D.II,81, 84, 91 (see khandha, citta & sīla). -- D.I,26=162 (°gatena caranti diṭṭhigatāni), 174 (°vāda), 195 (°pāripūrin); II,122 (ariyā); III,101, 158, 164, 183, 230, 237, 242, 284 sq.; S.I,13=165 (sīla, citta, paññā), 17, 34, 55; II,185 (sammā°), 277; V,222 (ariyā); M.I,144 (id.); III,99 (id.), 245 (paramā), 272 (sammā°); A.I,61, 216; II,1 (ariyā); IV,105 (id.); III,106 (sīla, citta, p.), 352 (kusalesu dhammesu); IV,11 (id.); V,123 sq.; It.35, 40 (°uttara), 51 (sīla~samādhi p. ca), 112 (ariyā°); Sn.77, 329, 432, 881, 1036 and passim; Dh.38, 152, 372; Nd¹ 77; Nd² 380; Ps.I,53, 64 sq., 71 sq., 102 sq., 119; II,150 sq., 162, 185 sq.; Pug.25, 35, 54 (°sampadā); Dhs.16, 20, 555; Nett 8, 15, 17, 28, 54, 191; VbhA.140, 396; PvA.40 (paññāya abhāvato for lack of reason); Sdhp.343. On paññāya see sep. article. See also adhipanna (adhisīla, adhicitta+).

--âdhipateyya the supremacy of wisdom A.II,137. --indriya the faculty of reason (with sati° & samādhi°) D.III,239, 278; Dhs.16, 20 etc.; Nett. 7, 15 sq; 191. --obhāsa the lustre of wisdom Ps.I,119; Dhs.16, 20 etc. --kkhandha the code of cognition (see above) Vin.I,62; D.III,229, 279; It.51; Nd¹ 21; Nett 70, 90, 128. It is always comb^d with sīla° & samādhi-kkhandha. --cakkhu the eye of wisdom (one of the 5 kinds of extraordinary sight of a Buddha: see under cakkhumant) D.III,219; S.V,467; It.52; Nd¹ 354; Nd² 235. --dada giving or bestowing wisdom S.I,33; Sn.177. --dhana the treasure of perfect knowledge (one of the 7 treasures, see dhana) D.III,163, 251; A.III,53; VvA.113. --nirodhika tending to the destruction of reason S.V,97; It.82. --paṭilābha acquisition of wisdom S.V,411; A.I,45; Ps.II,189. --pāsāda the stronghold of supreme knowledge Dh.28 (=dibba-cakkhuṁ saṅkhātaṁ °ṁ). --bala the power of reason or insight, one of the 5 powers D.III,229, 253; M.III,72; A.IV,363; Sn.212; Dhs.16, 20 etc.; Nett 54, 191; VvA.7. --bāhulla wealth or plenty of wisdom S.V,411; A.I,45. --bhūmi ground or stage of wisdom; a name given to the Paṭicca-samuppāda by Bdhgh at Vism.XVII, pp. 517 sq. (°niddesa). --ratana the gem of reason or knowledge Dhs.16, 20 etc. --vimutta freed by reason D.II,70; III,105, 254; M.I,35, 477; A.I,61; II,6; IV,452; Sn.847; Nd¹ 207; Kvu 58; Nett 199. --vimutti emancipation through insight or knowledge (always paired with ceto-vimutti) D.I,156, 167; III,78, 102, 108, 132, 281; It.75, 91; Sn.725, 727; Nett 7, 40, 81, 127; DA.I,313; VbhA.464. --visuddhi purity of insight D.III,288. --vuddhi increase of knowledge S.V,97, 411; A.I,15, 45; II,245. --sampadā the blessing of higher knowledge (see above) A.I,62; II,66; III,12 sq., 182 sq.; IV,284, 322. --sīla conduct and (higher) intelligence Dh.229 (°samāhita=lokuttarapaññāya c’eva pārisuddhisīlena ca samannāgata DhA.III,329); Vv 34²³ id.=ariyāya diṭṭhiyā ariyena sīlena ca sāmannāgata VvA.155). Often used with yathābhūtaṁ q. v. Cp. paññāya. (Page 390)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵 Prajñā, pa+ñā(梵jñā)知),【阴】智慧，智慧，知识，洞察力( intelligence, comprising all the higher faculties of cognition)。paññākkhandha,【阳】慧蕴(智力准则，修道证悟的最高知识)。paññācakkhu,【中】慧眼。SA.35.1./II,354.︰Paññācakkhu nāma catusaccaparicchedakañāṇaṁ, yaṁ-- “cakkhuṁ udapādī”ti(S.56.11./V,422.；Mv.I,11.) āgataṁ.(称为‘慧眼’是(得)四谛的分别智，那是来自--“生起慧眼”。)paññādhana,【中】慧财。paññābala,【中】慧力。paññāvimutti,【阴】慧解脱。paññāvuddhi,【阴】慧增上。paññāsampadā,【阴】慧具足。三慧，「闻所成慧」、「思所成慧」、「修所成慧」。(Vism 439) 《瑜伽师地论》(T30.780-1)说，闻慧(suta-mayā paññā闻所成慧)，耳根由善知识听闻法或文字来闻法所得的智慧；思慧(cintā-mayā paññā思所成慧)，以从根源作意的方式，来通达法义；修慧(bhāvanā-mayā-paññā修所成慧)，体证无常、苦、无我等法。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】智慧，智能，知识，洞察力。 ~kkhandha, 【阳】慧蕴（智力准则，修道证悟的最高知识）。 ~cakkhu, 【中】慧眼。 ~dhana, 【中】慧财。 ~bala, 【中】慧力。 ~vimutti, 【阴】慧解脱。 ~vuddhi, 【阴】慧增上。 ~sampadā,【阴】慧具足。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '慧。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '般若(智)慧', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Paññāpaka: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. paññāpeti] one who advises, assigns or appoints Vin.II,305 (āsana°). (Page 390)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】建议者，分配者，任命者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】建议者，分配者，任命者。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paññāpana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paññāpeti] disclosure, discovering M.III,17; S.III,59; declaration DhsA.11. (Page 390)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】公告，安排(位子等)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】公告，安排（位子等）。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paññāpetar: {'def': '[n. ag. of paññāpeti] one who imparts knowledge, discloser of truths, discoverer D.II,223. (Page 390)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paññāpeti: {'def': '[Caus. of pajānāti] 1. to make known, declare, point out, appoint, assign, recognise, define D.I,119 (brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇaṁ), 180, 185, 237; It.98 (tevijjaṁ brāhmaṇaṁ), Pug.37, 38; PvA.61 (āsanaṁ). -- 2. to lay down, fold out, spread PvA.43 (saṅghāṭiṁ). -- pp. paññatta (q. v.). -- Caus. II. paññāpāpeti J.III,371. (Page 390)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa+ñā+āpe), 管理规则，设下规则，使知道，宣布，准备(座位等)。【过】paññāpesi。【过分】paññāpita, paññatta。【现分】paññāpenta。【独】paññāpetvā。catugguṇaṁ saṁghāṭiṁ paññāpesi,你施设四摺僧伽梨。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + ñā + āpe), 管理规则，设下规则，使知道，宣布，准备（座位等）。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita, paññatta。【现分】 ~penta。【独】~petvā。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paññāpetu: {'def': '【阳】调整者，宣布者。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】整者，宣布者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paññāta: {'def': '[pp. of pajānāti] known, renowned DA.I,143; ap° unknown, defamed Vin.IV,231; S.IV,46; A.III,134 (where also der. appaññātika). (Page 390)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paññāyati 的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paññāyati 的【过分】)。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paññāya: {'def': '(indecl.) [ger. of pajānāti, in relation °ñāya: ñatvā as uṭṭhāya: ṭhatvā; so expl^d by P. Commentators, whereas modern interpreters have taken it as Instr. of paññā] understanding fully, knowing well, realising, in full recognition, in thorough realisation or understanding. Used most frequently with yathābhūtaṁ (q. v.) S.I,13 (bhāveti), 44 (lokasmiṁ pajjoto), 214 (parisujjhati); II,7 sq. (uppajjati), 68 (suppaṭividdho); III,6 (id.); V,324 (ajjhupekkhati); A.I,125 (anuggahissati); III,44 (vaḍḍhati); IV,13 sq. (pariyogāhamāna); V,39 (disvā) Sn.1035 (see Nd² 380^II); It.93 (moh’aggiṁ, v. l. saññāya); PvA.60 (upaparikkhitvā, as explⁿ of ñatvā), 140=viceyya. (Page 390)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paññāyati: {'def': '(pa+ñā+ya), 出现，明显化。【过】paññāyi。【过分】paññāta。【现分】paññāyamāna。【独】paññāyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Pass. of pajānāti] to be (well) known, to be clear or evident, to be perceived, seen or taken for, to appear It.89; DhA.I,14, 95 (fut. paññāyissatha you will be well known); II,75; PvA.83 (pālito eva), 166 (dissati+); ppr. paññāyamāna DhA.I,29; PvA.96 (=perceivable). -- aor. paññāyi PvA.172 (paccakkhato). (Page 390)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + ñā + ya), 出现，明显化。【过】 ~āyi。【过分】 ~paññāta。【现分】 ~yamāna。【独】 ~yitvā。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paññāṇa: {'def': '【中】标志，告示，表徵。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [pa+ñāṇa, cp. Vedic prajñāno in both meanings & paññā] 1. wisdom, knowledge, intelligence D.I,124 (sīla+); S.I,41; A.IV,342; Sn.96, 1136; DA.I,171, 290. -- 2. mark, sign, token J.V,195. (Page 390)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】标志，告示，表征。(p190)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paññāṇavant: {'def': '(adj.) [paññāṇa+vant] reasonable, sensible, wise Sn.202, 1090; J.V,222; VI,361; Nd² 382. (Page 390)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paŋsu: {'def': '【阳】土壤，灰尘。 ~kūla, 【中】灰尘堆。 ~kūlacīvara, 【中】粪扫衣（从垃圾堆得来的碎布所制成的袈裟）。 ~kūlika, 【形】粪扫衣支苦行僧。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paḍayhati: {'def': 'v. l. at PvA.60 for T. pariḍayhati. (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paḷibodha: {'def': '【阳】障碍，妨碍，故障。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】障碍，妨碍，故障。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paḷibujjhana: {'def': '【中】变成肮脏。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】变成肮脏。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paḷibujjhati: {'def': '(pari遍+budh醒+ya), 被延迟，被破坏，被阻隔。【过】paḷibujjhi。【过分】paḷibuddha。【独】paḷibujjhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pari + budh + ya), 被延迟，被破坏，被阻隔。【过】 ~jjhi。【过分】 paḷibuddha。【独】 ~jhitvā。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paḷigha: {'def': '【阳】横木，障碍。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】横木，障碍。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paḷiguṇṭheti: {'def': '(pari + guṇṭh + e), 纠缠，包封。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~ṭhita。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pari遍+guṇṭh+e), 纠缠，包封。【过】paḷiguṇṭhesi。【过分】paḷiguṇṭhita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paḷiveṭhana: {'def': '【中】包装材料，包围。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】包装材料，包围。(p220)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paḷiveṭheti: {'def': '(pari遍+veth盘绕+e), 包起来，缠住，包围。【过】paḷiveṭhesi。【过分】paḷiveṭhita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pari + veth + e), 包起来，缠住，包围。【过】 ~esi。【过分】~ṭhita。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṁsu: {'def': '【阳】土壤，灰尘。paṁsukūla,【中】垃圾、废弃物。paṁsukūlacīvara,【中】粪扫衣(从垃圾堆得来的碎布所制成的袈裟)。paṁsukūlika,【形】粪扫衣支苦行僧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Ved. pāṁsu] dust, dirt, soil S.V,459; A.I,253; Pv.II,3⁷. -- paṁsvāgārakā playmates S.III,190; saha‹-› paṁsukīḷitā id. (lit. playing together with mud, making mud pies) A.II,186; J.I,364; PvA.30. Cp. BSk. sahapāṁśukrīḍita MVastu III,450.

--kūla rags from a dust heap (cp. Vin. Texts II.156) Vin.I,58; M.I,78; S.II,202; A.I,240, 295; II,206; IV,230; It.102=A.II,26; Dh.395; Pug.69; PvA.141, 144. A quâsi definition of p.-k. is to be found at Vism.60. --kūlika one who wears clothes made of rags taken from a dust heap M.I,30; S.II,187; A.III,187, 219, 371 sq.; Vin.III,15; IV,360; Ud.42; Pug.55; DhA.IV,157; °attan (nt. abstr.) the habit of wearing rags M.I,214; III,41; A.I,38; III,108. --guṇṭhita (vv. ll. °kuṇḍita, °kuṇṭhita) covered with dust or dirt S.I,197; J.VI,559; Pv.II,3⁵. -- pisācaka a mud sprite (some sort of demon) J.III,147; IV,380; DhA.II,26. --muṭṭhi a handful of soil J.VI,405. --vappa sowing on light soil (opp. kalalavappa sowing on heavy soil or mud) SnA 137. (Page 378)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṁsuka: {'def': '(adj.) [Epic Sk. pāṁśuka; Ved. pāṁsura] dusty; (m.) a dusty robe KhA 171 (v. l. paṁsukūla). (Page 379)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṅga: {'def': '[?] only in cpd. paṅgacīra (nt.) at D.I,6 “blowing through toy pipes made of leaves” (Dial. I.10, where is cpd. Sinhalese pat-kulal and Marathī pungī after Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 205). Bdhgh expl^ns as “p. vuccati paṇṇa-nāḷikā; taṁ dhamantā kīḷanti” DA.I,86. (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṅgu: {'def': 'paṅgula, 【形、名】跛足的，跛子。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'paṅgula,【形】【名】跛足的，跛子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. paṅgu; etym.?] lame, crippled, see pakkha³ and next. (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṅgula: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paṅgu] lame J.VI,12; Vism.280. (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṅka: {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. paṅka, with k suffix to root *pene for *pele, as in Lat. palus; cp. Goth. fani mire, excrements, Ohg, fenna “fen,” bog; also Ital. fango mud, Ohg. fūht wet. See Walde Lat. Wtb. under palus. BSk. paṅka, e. g. Jtm 215 paṅka-nimagna] mud, mire; defilement, impurity S.I,35, 60; III,118; A.III,311; IV,289; Sn.970 (°danta rajassira with dirt between their teeth and dust on their heads, from travelling); III,236 (id.); IV,362 (id.); Sn.535, 845, 945, 1145 (Nd² 374: kāma-paṅko kāma-kaddamo etc.); Dh.141, 327; Nd¹ 203; Pv III,3³; IV,3²; Miln.346; Dhs.1059, 1136. (Page 382)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】泥，泥沼，杂质，污秽。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】泥，泥沼，杂质，污秽。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṅkaja: {'def': 'paṅkeruha, 【中】睡莲，从泥中升起的。(p186)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'paṅkeruha,【中】睡莲，从泥中升起的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṇa: {'def': '[in this meaning unknown in Sk; only in one faulty var. lect. as “house”; see BR s. v. paṇa. Usual meaning “wager”] a shop J.IV,488 [v. l. pana]. (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇaka: {'def': 'see paṇṇaka. --paṇaka (comb) see phaṇaka. (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇamati: {'def': '[pa+nam] to bend, to be bent or inclined Ps.I,165, 167; -- pp. paṇata ibid. -- Caus. panāmeti (q. v.). (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + nam + a), 鞠躬，崇拜，礼拜。【过】 paṇami。【过分】paṇamita, paṇata。【独】 ~mitvā。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+nam+a), 鞠躬，崇拜，礼拜。【过】paṇami。【过分】paṇamita, paṇata。【独】paṇamitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṇati: {'def': '[cp. Sk. paṇati] to sell, barter, bargain, risk, bet J.V,24 (=voharati attānaṁ vikkiṇati C.). -- See also paṇitaka & paṇiya. (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇava: {'def': '[cp. Ep. Sk. paṇava, dial; accord. to BR a corruption of praṇava] a small drum or cymbal D.I,79; S.II,128; IV,344; A.II,117, 241; J.III,59 (of an executioner; PvA.4 in id. p. has paṭaha); Th.1, 467; Bu I.32; Vv 81¹⁰; Dhs.621 (°sadda); DhA.I,18. (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Ep. Sk. paṇava, dial; accord. to BR a corruption of praṇava)，锣(a small drum or cymbal)。paṇavasadda﹐锣声。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṇaya: {'def': '[classical Sk. praṇaya, fr pra+nī] affection J.VI,102. (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇeti: {'def': '[pa+nī] to lead on to, bring out, adduce, apply, fig. decree (a fine or punishment), only used in phrase daṇḍaṁ paṇeti to give a punishment D.II,339=Miln.110; M.II,88; Dh.310; J.II,207; III,441; IV,192; Miln.29; DhA.III,482. -- pp. paṇīta (q. v.). (Page 404)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + ni + e), 判定（罚款或处罚）。【过】 ~esi。【独】 paṇetvā。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+ni +e), 判定(罚款或处罚)。【过】paṇesi。【独】paṇetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṇhi: {'def': '【阳】脚后跟。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m. & f.) [Ved. pārṣṇi, Av. paṣṇā, Lat. perna, Gr. ptέrna, Goth. fairzna, Ohg. fersana=Ger. ferse] the heel Vin.II,280 (°samphassa); J.II,240; V,145; Sdhp.147, 153. See next. (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】脚后跟。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṇhikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. paṇhi] the heel J.I,491; KhA 49 (°aṭṭhi); Vism.253 (id.); PvA.185. (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇhin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paṇhi] having heels D.II,17 (āyata° having projecting heels, the 3^rd of the 32 characteristics of a Mahāpurisa). (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇidahati: {'def': '(pa+ni+dah放置+a), 追求，渴望，放出，指示，设定(to put forth, put down to, apply, direct, intend; aspire to, long for, pray for)。【过】paṇidahi。【过分】paṇihita, paṇidahita。【独】paṇidahitvā, paṇidhāya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + ni + dah + a), 追求，渴望，放出，指示。【过】 ~dahi。【过分】 paṇihita, ~dahita。【独】 ~dahitvā。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+ni+dhā] to put forth, put down to, apply, direct, intend; aspire to, long for, pray for S.V,156 (atthāya cittaṁ paṇidahiṁ). ger. paṇidhāya S.I,42=Sn.660 (vācaṁ manañ ca pāpakaṁ); S.I,170 (ujuṁ kāyaṁ); A.III,249 (deva-nikāyaṁ p.); IV,461 sq. (id.); Vbh.244 (ujuṁ kāyaṁ p.)=DA.I,210. Also lit. (as prep with Acc.) “in the direction of, towards” M.I,74 (aṅgārā-kāsuṁ). -- pp. paṇihita (q. v.). (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇidhi: {'def': '(‹paṇidahati，cp.BSk. praṇidhi)﹐誓愿(aspiration, request, prayer, resolve)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. paṇidahati; cp. BSk. praṇidhi Divy 102, 134, in same meaning. The usual Sk. meaning is “spy”] aspiration, request, prayer, resolve D.III,29, 276; S.II,99, 154; III,256 (ceto°); IV,303; A.II,32; IV,239 sq. (ceto°); V,212 sq.; Sn.801; Vv 47¹²; Nd¹ 109; Dhs.1059, 1126; SnA 132 (=paṇidhāna); DhA.II,172; DhsA.222 (rāga-dosa-moha°).

--kamma (in deva cult) payment of a vow D.I,12, cp. DA.I,97 (which Kern, however, Toev. s. v., interprets as “application of an enema,” comparing Sk. pranidheya to be injected as a clyster). (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇidhāna: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṇidahati; cp. philosophical literature & BSk. praṇidhāna] aspiration, longing, prayer VvA.270; Sdhp.344. (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 Paṭidhi, 【阳】热望，决心。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】paṭidhi,【阳】热望，决心。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṇidhāya: {'def': '(paṭidahati 的【独】) 热望了，有了意图。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭidahati 的【独】) 热望了，有了意图。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṇihita: {'def': '(paṭidahati 的【过分】), 已指示，已下决心…的，已意图。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭidahati 的【过分】, pa+ni+ dah放置), 已指示，已下决心…的，已意图。【形】被放置，定向。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of paṇidahati] applied, directed, intent, bent on, well directed, controlled S.IV,309 (dup°); A.I,8; V,87; Dh.43; (sammā °ṁ cittaṁ); Sn.154 (su° mano= suṭṭhu ṭhapito acalo SnA 200); Ps.II,41 (vimokkha); Miln.204, 333; 413. --appaṇihita in connection with samādhi & vimokkha seems to mean “free from all longings,” see Vin.III,93=IV.25; S.IV,295, 309, 360; Ps.II,43 sq., 100; Miln.337. (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇipatati: {'def': '[pa+ni+pat] to fall down before Th.1, 375. (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇipāta: {'def': '【阳】崇拜，拜倒，俯身致敬。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. pa+ni+pat] prostration, adoration Dāvs.V,53. (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】崇拜，拜倒，顶礼，俯身致敬。DA.2./I,231.︰Paṇipāto nāma-- “Ajjādiṁ katvā ahaṁ abhivādana-paccuṭṭhāna-añjalikamma- sāmīcikammaṁ Buddhādīnaṁyeva tiṇṇaṁ vatthūnaṁ karomī’ti maṁ dhārethā”ti evaṁ Buddhādīsu paramanipaccākāro. Imesañhi catunnaṁ ākārānaṁ aññatarampi karontena gahitaṁyeva hoti saraṇaṁ.(顶礼：『请您忆持我：从今天开始，我只对佛等三种对象行顶礼、起迎、合掌、恭敬业。』如此对佛等作最上的五体投地礼。取这四种方式其中之一而归依。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṇipātika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paṇipāta] consisting of a footfall, humbling or humble, devotional SnA 157. (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇitaka: {'def': '(adj. nt.) [fr. paṇita -- pp. of paṇati] staked, wagered, bet, wager, stake at play J.VI,192 (so read for paṇīta°). (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇiya: {'def': '【中】贸易的对象。【阳】商人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [ger. formation fr. paṇ, see paṇati & cp. BSk. paṇya in tara-paṇya fare AvŚ I.148] to be sold or bought, vendible, nt. article of trade, ware A.II,199; Vv 84⁷ (=bhaṇḍa VvA.337); J.IV,363 (=bhaṇḍa C. 366). (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】贸易的物件。【阳】商人。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṇya: {'def': '【中】贸易的对象。【阳】商人。参考 Paṇiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '参考 Paṇiya。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṇāma: {'def': '【阳】顶礼，行礼，崇拜，鞠躬。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. pa+nam, see paṇamati] bowing, bow, obeisance Th.2, 407 (°ṁ karoti). (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '[fr. pa+nam, see paṇamati] bending, salutation, obeisance (cp. paṇāmeti 1) VvA.321 (°ṁ karoti=añjaliṁ karoti). -- As paṇāmana nt. at J.IV,307. (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹pa+nam, see paṇamati)鞠躬，礼拜。(bending, salutation, obeisance)。(cp. paṇāmeti 1)。paṇāmaṁ karoti=añjaliṁ karoti)。【中】paṇāmana。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】顶礼，行礼，崇拜，鞠躬。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṇāmeti: {'def': '(pa+nam +e), 解散，逐放，关上，伸手。【过】paṇāmesi。【过分】paṇāmita。【现分】paṇāmenta。【独】paṇāmetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of paṇamati] 1. to bend forth or over, stretch out, raise, in phrase añjaliṁ p. to raise the hands in respectful salutation Vin.II,188; D.I,118; Sn.p. 79. ‹-› 2. to bend to or over, to shut, in kavāṭaṁ p. to shut the door Vin.I,87; II,114, 207; pattaṁ Vin.II,216. ‹-› 3. to make go away, to turn someone away, give leave, dismiss Vin.I,54; II,303; S.I,7; Th.1, 511, 557; J.V,314; Miln.187 (parisaṁ); Pass. paṇāmīyati (ibid.) -- pp. paṇāmita (q. v.). (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pa + nam + e), 解散，逐放，关上，伸手。【过】 ~esi。【过分】~mita。【现分】 ~menta。【独】 ~metvā。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṇāmita: {'def': '[pp. of paṇāmeti] 1. (=paṇāmeti 1) raised, bent or stretched out Sn.352 (añjalī sup°). -- 2. (=paṇāmeti 3) dismissed, given leave Vin.I,54; M.I,457 (bhikkhusaṅgho); Miln.209 (id.), 187. (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇīta: {'def': '【形】优良的，可口的。 ~tara, 【形】更尊贵的，多可口的。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of pa+neti in same application BSk.; cp. Divy 385] 1. (lit.) brought out or to, applied, executed; used with ref. to punishment (see paṇeti daṇḍaṁ) Pv IV.1⁶⁶ (°daṇḍa receiving punishment= ṭhapita-sarīra-daṇḍa PvA.242). -- 2. (appl^d) brought out or forth, (made) high, raised, exalted, lofty, excellent; with ref. to food (very often used in this sense) “heaped up, plentiful, abundant.” Synonymous with uttama (DA.I,109, 171), uḷāra (PvA.25, 228), atuḷa (PvA.110); opp. hīna (D.III,215; A.III,349; V,140; Vism.11), lūkha (S.II,153; VvA.64). -- D.I,12 (dhammā gambhīrā . . . paṇītā . . .), 109 (khādaniya); II,127 (id.) III,215 (with hīna & majjhima-dhātu); S.I,136 (dhammo gambhīro etc.); II,153 (dhātu), 154 (paṇidhi); III,47; IV,360; V,66 (dhammā), 226 (etaṁ padaṁ), 266 (sattā); A.I,284; II,171, 190; IV,10, 332, 423; V,8, 36 and passim; Sn.240, 389; It.44; Pv.I,5³; IV,1²⁷; Pug.28 (°âdhimutta having high aspirations), 30, 60; Dhs.269, 1027, 1411; PvA.12, 35 (āhāra), 42 (id.); DhA.II,154 (bhojana). Compar. paṇītatara, often comb^d with abhikkantatara, e. g. D.I,62, 74, 216; S.I,80; A.I,119, 171; V,37, 140, 203 sq. (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pp. of pa+neti﹐梵praṇīta),【形】优良的，可口的，美妙的。paṇītatara,【形】更尊贵的，多可口的。KhA.170.︰Paṇītanti uttamaṁ seṭṭhaṁ atappakaṁ.(最上的、优良的、无烦的)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṇītaka: {'def': '[perhaps=Sk. paṇita, or paṇ (see paṇa), as P. formation it may be taken as pa+nīta+ka, viz. that which has been produced] a gambler’s stake J.VI,192. See paṇitaka. Paṇudati, Paṇunna see panudati etc. (Page 404)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇḍa: {'def': 'see bhaṇḍati. (Page 404)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇḍaka: {'def': '【阳】太监。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp late (dial.) Sk. paṇḍa & paṇḍaka; for etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under pello] a eunuch, weakling Vin.I,86, 135, 168, 320; IV,20, 269; A.III,128; V,71; Sdhp.79. -- With ref. to the female sex as paṇḍikā at Vin.II,271 (itthi°). (Page 404)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(梵paṇḍa & paṇḍaka),【阳】太监，阉人、不男；音译：半择迦、般吒、般荼迦、半择、半挓迦(a eunuch, weakling)。意译为男根损坏之人，没有男性生殖器。本性损坏称为「扇搋」(梵saṇḍha)，意译作黄门，指男子无生殖器者，有先天(本性扇搋)与后天(损坏扇搋)二种。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṇḍara: {'def': '(Ved. pāṇḍara),【形】白色，微黄色(white, pale, yellowish )。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】白色。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj) [Ved. pāṇḍara; cp. paṇḍu, q. v. for etym.] white, pale, yellowish J.II,365; V, 340; Nd¹ 3; Dhs.6= Vbh.88 (Dhs.trsl. “that which is clear”? in def. of citta & mano) Dhs.17, 293, 597; Miln.226; DhA.IV,8; VvA.40; PvA.56 (=seta); Sdhp.430. (Page 404)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇḍicca: {'def': '【中】智能，博学。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹paṇḍita),【中】聪叡，博学(erudition, cleverness, skill, wisdom )。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṇḍita] erudition, cleverness, skill, wisdom J.I,383; Ps.II,185; Pug.25; Dhs.16 (=paṇḍitassa bhāvo DhsA.147), 292, 555. As pandicciya J.VI,4. (Page 404)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇḍita: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Ved. paṇḍita] wise, clever, skilled, circumspect, intelligent Vin.II,190 (+buddhimanto); D.I,12 (°vedaniya comprehensible only by the wise), 120 (opp. duppañña); III,192; M.I,342; III,61, 163, 178; S.IV,375 (+viyatta medhāvin); V,151 (+vyatta kusala); A.I,59, 68, 84, 101 sq., 162 (paṇḍitā nibbānaṁ adhigacchanti); II,3 sq., 118, 178, 228; III,48=It.16; Sn.115, 254, 335, 523, 721, 820, 1007, 1125 (Ep. of Jatukaṇṇī); It.86; Dh.22, 28, 63 (°mānin), 79, 88, 157, 186, 238, 289; J.III,52 (sasa°); Nd¹ 124; Pv IV.3³² (opp. bāla; =sappañña PvA.254); Dhs.1302; Miln.3, 22; DA.I,117; DhA.IV,111; VvA.257; PvA.39, 41, 60 (=pañña), 93, 99. (Page 404)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Ved. paṇḍita),【形】明智的(wise, clever, skilled, circumspect, intelligent )。【阳】明智的人；《中阿含经》译：沙门蛮头。paṇḍitaka,【阳】炫学者(a pedant)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṇḍitaka: {'def': '(adj.) [paṇḍita+ka] a pedant D.I,107. (Page 404)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇḍu: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Ved. pāṇḍu, palita, pāṭala (pale-red); Gr. pelitnόs, pellόs, poλios (grey); Lat. palleo (to be pale), pullus (grey); Lith. patvas (pale-yellow), pilkas (grey); Ohg. falo (pale, yellowish, withered); E. pale] pale-red or yellow, reddish, light yellow, grey; only at Th.2, 79 (kisā paṇḍu vivaṇṇā), where paṇḍu represents the usual up-paṇḍ’--uppaṇḍuka-jātā: “thin, pale and colourless” see ThA.80). Otherwise only in cpds., e. g.

--kambala a light red blanket, orange-coloured cloth S.I,64 (=ratta-kambala C.); A.I,181; Sn.689 (=ratta SnA 487); also a kind of ornamental stone, Sakka’s throne (p.-k.-silā) is made of it J.I,330; II,93; II,53, (°silāsana); V,92 (id.); Pv.II,9⁶⁰ (°silā=p.-k-nāmaka sīlāsana PvA.138); VvA.110 (id.); KhA 122 (°varāsana); DhA.I,17 (°silāsana). --palāsa a withered leaf Vin.I,96=III,47; IV,217; Dh.233, VbhA.244; KhA 62; on °palāsika (DA.I,270) see J.P.T.S. 1893, 37. --mattikā yellow loam, clay soil KhA. 59. --roga jaundice Vin.I,206 (°ābādha) 276 (id.); J.I,431; II,102; DhA.I,25. --rogin suffering from jaundice J.II,285; III,401. --vīṇā yellow flute (of Pañcasikha): see beluva. --sīha yellow lion, one of the 4 kinds SnA 125 (cp. Manor.-pūr. on A.II,33). --sutta orange-coloured string D.I,76. (Page 404)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Ved. pāṇḍu, palita, pāṭala),【形】淡黄色的，微黄色的。paṇḍukambala,【中】橙色的毛毯，帝释的王座名字。paṇḍupalāsa,【阳】凋谢的叶子，准备出家的人。paṇḍuroga,【阳】黄疸(台语︰ng5 than2)。paṇḍurogī,【阳】患黄疸的人。kāyaṁ paṇḍumattikāya tikkhaṭṭuṁ subbattitaṁ ubbaṭṭeti(以黄土涂摩身体三次)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】淡黄色的，微黄色的。 ~kambala, 【中】橙色的毛毯，帝释的王座名字。 ~palāsa,【阳】凋谢的叶子，准备出家的人。 ~roga, 【阳】黄疸。 ~rogī, 【阳】患黄疸的人。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṇḍuka: {'def': '(-roga) perhaps to be read with v. l. at M.II,121 for bandhuka°. (Page 404)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇṇa: {'def': 'paṇṇaka, 【中】叶子，供书写的叶子，信。 ~kuṭi,【阴】茅舍。 ~cchatta,【中】以树叶制成的遮阳伞。 ~santhara, 【阳】树叶垫子。 ~sālā, 【阴】茅庐。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Ved. parṇa, cp. Ags. fearn, E. fern] 1. a leaf (esp. betel leaf) Vin.I,201 (5 kinds of leaves recommended for medicinal purposes, viz. nimba° Azadirachta Indica, kuṭaja° Wrightia antidysenterica, paṭola° Tricho‹-› Qanthes dioeca, sulasi° or tulasi° basil, kappāsika° cotton, see Vin. Texts II.46) A.I,183 (tiṇa+) Sn.811 (p. vuccati paduma-pattaṁ Nd¹ 135); J.I,167; II,105 (nimba)°; KhA 46 (khitta-p.-kosa-saṇṭhāna); PvA.115 (=patta) tālapaṇṇa a fan of palm leaves Vv 33⁴³ (=tālapattehi kata-maṇḍala-vījanī VvA.147); haritapaṇṇa greens, vegetable SnA 283; sūpeyyapaṇṇa curry leaf J.I,98. -- 2. a leaf for writing upon, written leaf, letter; donation, bequest (see below paṇṇākāra) J.I,409 (cp. paṭipaṇṇa); II,104; IV,151 (ucchaṅgato p. °ṁ nīharati); DhA.I,180; PvA.20 (likhā° written message). paṇṇaṁ āropeti to send a letter J.I,227; pahiṇati id. J.IV,145; V,458; peseti id. J.I,178; IV,169. paṇṇaṁ likhati to write a letter J.II,174; VI,369 (paṇṇe wrote on a leaf), 385 iṇa° a promissory note J.I,230; IV,256. -- p. as ticket or label at DhsA.110. -- 3. a feather, wing see su°.

--ākāra “state or condition of writing” (see ākāra 1), i. e. object of writing; that which is connected or sent with a letter, a special message, donation, present, gift J.I,377; II,166; III,10; IV,316, 368; VI, 68, 390; SnA 78; DhA .184 326, 392, 339: II.80; III,292 (dasavidha dibba°, viz. āyu etc.: see ṭhāna); IV,11. --kuṭi a hut of leaves D.III,94; S.I,226; J.II,44; Pv III,2²⁰; DA.I,318. --chatta a fan of leaves J.II,277. --chattaka a leaf-awning S.I,90, 92. --dhāra a holder made of leaves J.V,205. --pacchi leaf-basket, a b. for greens J.VI,369. --puṭa a palm-leaf basket PvA.168. --saññā a mark of leaves (tied up to mark the boundary of a field) J.I,153. --santhāra a spreading leaf, leaf cover, adj. spread with leaves A.I,136; J.VI,24. --sālā a hut of leaves, a hermitage J.I,6, 7, 138; II,101 sq.; VI,30, 318 (nala-bhittikaṁ °ṁ katvā); VI,24. --susa (& sosa) drying the leaves (said of the wind) KhA 15. (Page 404)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'paṇṇaka (梵 Parṇa),【中】叶子，供书写的叶子，信。paṇṇakuṭi,【阴】茅舍。paṇṇacchatta,【中】以树叶制成的伞。paṇṇasanthara,【阳】树叶垫子。paṇṇasālā,【阴】茅庐(沙罗树叶)。paṇṇa-chadana,叶屋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṇṇaka: {'def': '[paṇṇa+ka] 1. green leaves (collectively), vegetable, greens J.VI,24 (kāra° vegetable as homage or oblation); Pv III,3³ (paṅko paṇṇako ca, expl^d as “kaddamo vā udakacchikkhalo vā” PvA.189, but evidently misunderstood for “withered leaves”); PvA.256 (tiṇakaṭṭha-paṇṇaka-sala, is reading correct?). -- 2. N. of a water plant, most likely a kind of fern (see Kern, Toev. II.16 q. v.). Often comb^d with sevāla (Blyxa Octandra), e. g. at J.II,324; V,37. -- The spelling is also paṇaka, even more frequent than paṇṇaka and also comb^d with sevāla, e. g. Vin.III,177 (in combⁿ saṅkha --sevāla°, where Bdhgh explains “saṅkho ti dīghamūlako paṇṇasevālo vuccati, sevālo ti nīlasevālo, avaseso udaka-pappaṭaka-nīla-bījak’ādi sabbo ‘ti paṇako ti saṅkhaṁ gacchati”); S.V,122; A.III,187, 232, 235; J.IV,71 (sevāla°); Miln.35 (saṅkha-sevāla-p. which the Manor-pūṛ expl^ns by udaka-pappaṭaka, and also as “nīlamaṇḍūkapiṭṭhivaṇṇena udakapiṭṭhiṁ chādetvā nibattapaṇakaṁ” see Trenckner, Miln.421 and cp. Miln. trslⁿ I.302), 210 (suvaṇṇa°), 401 (cakkavāko sevāla paṇaka-bhakkho); KhA 61 (sevāla°; cp. Schubring’s kalpasūtra p. 46 sq.). -- 3. (see paṇṇa 2) a written leaf, a ticket DhsA.110. (Page 404)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇṇarasa: {'def': '(=Pañcadasa),【形】十五。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】十五。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Paṇṇavīsati see pañca 1. B, & C. (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇṇatti: {'def': 'see paññatti. (Page 404)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '参考 Paññatti。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(=Paññatti),【阴】名字，概念。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṇṇatti-vāda: {'def': 'Paññatti-vāda m. 説仮部[部派名]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Paṇṇattika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paṇṇatti] having a manifestation or name, in a°-bhāva state without designation, state of non-manifestation, indefinite or unknown state (with ref. to the passing nature of the phenomenal world) DhA.I,89; II,163. (Page 404)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇṇi: {'def': '(f.) [=paṇṇa] a leaf Vin.I,202 (taka°). (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇṇika: {'def': '[paṇṇa+ika] one who deals with greens, a florist or greengrocer J.I,411; II,180; III,21 (°dhītā); Miln.331. (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】蔬菜水果商，菜贩。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】蔬菜水果商，菜贩。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṇṇikā: {'def': '(f.) [to paṇṇaka; cp. Sk. parṇikā; meaning uncertain, cp. Kern, Toev. p. 17 s. v.] greens, green leaves, vegetable Vin.II,267 (na harītaka °ṁ pakinitabbaṁ, trsl. at Vin. Texts III,343 by “carry on the business of florist and seedsman,” thus taken as paṇṇika, cp. also Vin. Texts III,112); J.I,445 (paṇṇikāya saññaṁ adāsi is faulty; reading should be saṇṇikāya “with the goad,” of saṇ(ṇ)ikā=Sk. sṛṇi elephant-driver’s hook). (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】蔬菜，野菜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṇṇākāra: {'def': '【阳】礼物。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】礼物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṇṇāsa: {'def': 'see pañca 2. A. (Page 405)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṇṇāsā: {'def': '【阴】五十。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】五十。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭa: {'def': '【阳】【中】布料，衣服。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. paṭa, etym. unknown, prob. dialectical] cloth; cloak, garment S.II,219 (°pilotika); Th.1, 1092 (bhinna-paṭan-dhara “wearing the patchwork cloak” trsl.); J.IV,494; KhA 45, 58 (°tantu); DA.I,198; DhA.II,45 (puppha°); III,295 °kañcuka, v. l. kaṭak°); Vism.16 (bhinna-paṭa-dhara in defⁿ of bhikkhu); VbhA.327 (id.); DhsA.81 (paṭa-paṭa sadda); VvA.73, 201; PvA.185. Cp. paṭikā & paṭalikā; also kappaṭa. (Page 391)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳、中】布料，衣服。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭaccarin: {'def': '(adj.) [paṭa+carin but cp. Sk. pāṭaccara a shoplifter Halāyudha 2, 185] poor (lit. dressed in old clothes): so read perhaps at J.VI,227 (vv. ll paḷaccari & paṭiccari). (Page 391)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭaggi: {'def': '【阳】还火(归还的火)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】还火（归还的火）。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+aggi] counter-fire Vin.II,138; J.I,212; kAcc. 31. (Page 391)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭaha: {'def': '【阳】半球形铜鼓，战鼓。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. paṭaha, dial.] a kettle-drum, war drum, one of the 2 kinds of drums (bheri) mentioned at DhsA.319, viz. mahā-bheri & p.-bheri; J.I,355; Dpvs 16, 14; PvA.4. (Page 391)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】半球形铜鼓，战鼓。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭala: {'def': '【中】盖子，膜，信封，衬里，薄膜。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】1.盖子，薄膜，衬里，封套，皮，膜(a covering, membrane, lining, envelope, skin, film)。(maṁsapaṭala, of the liver, where KhA 54 reads maṁsa-piṇḍa), (phaṇapaṭala); (akkhipaṭala眼翳);(samuppaṭana), 55 (udarapaṭala, mucous membrane of the stomach); (kappāsapaṭala, film of cotton seed)。2.屋顶(roof, ceiling；ayopaṭala铁皮屋顶)。3.一堆，一片(a heap, mass；meghapaṭala一片云；abbhapaṭala大量的云). (madhupaṭala, honey comb)。4.白内障(cataract of the eye)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [connected with paṭa, cp. Sk. paṭala in meaning “section” Vedic, in all other meanings later Sk.] 1. a covering, membrane, lining, envelope, skin, film Vism.257 (maṁsa° of the liver, where KhA 54 reads maṁsa-piṇḍa), 359 (phaṇa°); DhsA.307 (7 akkhi° membranes of the eye); KhA 21 (samuppaṭana), 55 (udara° mucous membrane of the stomach), 61 (id.); DhsA.330 (id.); SnA 248 (id.); PvA.186 (eka° upāhanā, singlelined, cp. paṭalika & palāsika & see Morris J.P.T.S. 1887, 165); Vism.446 (kappāsa° film of cotton seed); Bdhd 66 (id.). -- 2. roof, ceiling PvA.52 (ayo° of iron). ‹-› 3. a heap, mass (esp. of clouds) J.I,73 (megha°); DhsA.239 (abbha°). -- madhu° honey comb J.I,262; DhA.I,59; III,323. -- 4. cataract of the eye Dāvs.V,27. (Page 391)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭalika: {'def': '(‹paṭala),【形】绣花的毛织被单(belonging to a cover or lining, having or forming a cover or lining, as adj. said of sandals (ekapaṭalika with single lining) J II.277 (v. l. for ekatalika).)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paṭala] belonging to a cover or lining, having or forming a cover or lining, as adj. said of sandals (eka° with single lining) J.II,277 (v. l. for ekatalika); III,80, 81 (id.). -- as n. f. paṭalikā a woven cloth, a woollen coverlet (embroidered with flowers), usually comb^d with paṭikā Vin.I,192; II,162; D.I,7 (=ghana-puppho uṇṇāmayo attharako. So āmilākapaṭṭo ti pi vuccati DA.I,87); A.I,137, 181; III,50, IV.94, 231, 394. (Page 391)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭalikā: {'def': '【阴】绣花的毛织被单。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】绣花的毛织被单(a woven cloth, a woollen coverlet (embroidered with flowers), usually combd with paṭikā)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭaṅga: {'def': '【阳】蚱蜢、蝗虫(grasshopper)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】蚱蜢，蝗虫。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. *Sk. phaḍingā, but influenced by Sk. pataga a winged animal, bird] a grasshopper Sn.602; J.VI,234, 506; Miln.272, 407; DhA.IV,58; PvA.67; Pgdp 59. (Page 391)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭhama: {'def': '(adj.) [Ved. prathama, cp. Av. frat∂ma; also Ved. prataraṁ further, Gr. prόteros superl. formation fr. prep. *pro, Sk. pra etc. see pa°] num. ord. “the first,” in foll. meanings: (1) the first, foremost, former Sn.93, 436, 1031; J.II,110; KhA.I,192; DhA.III,5, 196 (°vaya, contrasted with majjhima & pacchima); PvA.5, 13, 56. nt. Acc. paṭhamaṁ at first, for the first time Vin.I,16; D.II,14; Dh.158; J.I,222; II,103, 153; often as first part of cpd. °-, meaning either “first” or “recently, newly, just” Vin.I,1 (°âbhisambuddha having just attained Buddhaship); D.III,253 (°âbhinibbatta), Sn.420 (°uppattika “in his first youth”); J.III,394 (°uggata newly sprung up). -- A second compar. formation is paṭhamatara, only as adv. °ṁ at the (very) first, as early as possible, first of all Vin.I,30; J.VI,510; DhA.I,138; VvA.230; PvA.93. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】第一，最初的，先前的。 ~maŋ,【副】起先，第一次。 ~taraŋ,【副】首先，尽快地。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】第一，最初的，先前的。paṭhamaṁ,【副】起先，第一次。paṭhamataraṁ,【副】首先，尽快地。prathama-citta-utpada,【梵】初发心(初发觉悟的心)。paṭhama-vacana,【中】主格。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṭhati] reading (textual) Miln.344. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】读。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】读。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭhati: {'def': '(paṭh读+a), 读，背诵。【过】paṭhi。【过分】paṭhita。【独】paṭhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭh + a), 读，背诵。【过】 paṭhi。【过分】 paṭhita。【独】 paṭhitvā。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭhavant: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. paṭhavī] a wayfarer S.I,37. (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭhavatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. paṭhavī] earthliness M.I,329. (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭhavī: {'def': '【阴】地。 ~kampana, 【中】地震。 ~kasiṇa, 【中】（修禅取相的）地器材。 ~calana, 【中】 ~cāla, 【阳】地震。 ~dhātu, 【阴】地界，地元素。 ~sama, 【形】似地的。 ~vojā, 【阴】地的元气，地的精髓。(p198)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】地。paṭhavīkampana,【中】地震。paṭhavīkasiṇa,【中】(修禅取相的)地遍。paṭhavīcalana,【中】paṭhavīcāla,【阳】地震。paṭhavīdhātu,【阴】地界，地元素。paṭhavīsama,【形】似地的。paṭhavojā,【阴】地的元气，地的精髓。Dhs.(PTS:962；CS:967.)︰Katamaṁ taṁ rūpaṁ pathavīdhātu? Yaṁ 1kakkhaḷaṁ 2kharagataṁ 3kakkhaḷattaṁ 4kakkhaḷabhāvo ajjhattaṁ vā bahiddhā vā upādiṇṇaṁ vā anupādiṇṇaṁ vā-- idaṁ taṁ rūpaṁ pathavīdhātu.(什么是「色的地界」(What is the Corporeality which is the Element of solidity)？凡是1坚(hardness)、2硬(roughness)、3坚性(hard)、4坚实(hardness)，生起於内、外，或已执取、未执取，这是「色的地界」。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Ved. pṛthivī, doublets in Pāli pathavī, puthavī, puthuvī, puṭhuvī, see Geiger, P.Gr. §§ 12⁴, 17ⁿ. To ad., pṛthu: see puthu, prath to expand, thus lit. the broad one, breadth, expansion. Not (as Bdhgh at Vism.364: patthaṭattā pathavī, cp. Cpd. 155 even modern linguists!) to be derived fr. pattharati] the earth. Acc. to Nd² 389 syn. with jagati. It figures as the first element in enumⁿ of the 4 elements (see dhātu 1), viz. p., āpo, tejo, vāyo (earth, water, fire, wind or the elements of the extension, cohesion, heat and motion: Cpd. 155). At D.III,87 sq.≈ Vism.418 rasa° is opposed to bhūmi-pappaṭaka. Otherwise it is very frequent in representing the earth as solid, firm, spacious ground. See D.II,14, 16; M.I,327 sq.; S.I,113 (p. udrīyati), 119 (id.), 186; II,133, 169 sq.; V,45, 78, 246, 456 sq.; A.II,50; IV,89, 374, V,263 sq.; Sn.307, 1097; It.21; Dh.41, 44, 178 (pathavyā); Pv.II,6⁶; Miln.418; PvA.57, 75, 174. --mahā° M.I,127; S.II,179, 263; III,150; J.I,25, 74; III,42; Miln.187; aya° iron soil (of Avīci) DhA.I,148. In compⁿ both paṭhavī° & pathavi°.

--ojā (paṭhavojā) sap or essence of the earth DhA.II,154. --kampa shaking the earth, an earthquake DA.I,130. --kampana=kampa J.I,47. --kasiṇa the earth artifice (see Dhs.trsl 43) D.III,286. --dhātu the earth element (see above) D.I,215; II,294; III,228, 247; M.I,185; 421; S.II,170; Dhs.588, 648, 962 (cp. Dhs. trslⁿ 241); Nett 73, 74; VbhA.55; --maṇḍala the circle of the E. D.I,134; S.I,101; A.IV,90. --rasa taste of earth S.I,134; SnA 5. --lekha writing on (or in) carth A.I,283; Pug.32. --saññā earth consciousness M. II.105; A.IV,312; V,7 sq., 318 sq. 353 sq. --sama like the earth M.I,127, 423; Dh.95. (Page 403)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭi: {'def': '(indecl.) [Ved, prati, to Idg. *preti as in Lat. pretium (fr. *pretios)” price” (cp. precious), i. e. equivalent; Gr. prέs (aeol.), proti/, prόs against] directional prefix in well-defined meaning of “back (to), against, towards, in opposition to, opposite.” As preposition (with Acc. and usually postponed) towards, near by, at; usually spelt pati (cp. sampati & sampaṭika) Sn.291 (?), 425 (Nerañjaram (pati); Th.1, 628 (suriyass’uggamanam p.); 2, 258 (abhiyobbanam p.), 306 (Nerañjaram p.); J.I,457 (paṭi suriyaṁ thatvā standing facing the sun); IV,93; VI,491; Pv.II,9⁴¹ (suriy’uggamanam p.); Miln.116 (dānam p.); PvA.154 (paṭi Gaṅgaṁ against the G.). -- Most freq. comb^ns are: paṭi+ā (patiyā°), patisaṁ°; vi+paṭi°, sampaṭi°. The composition (assimilation-) form before vowels is pacc° (b. v.).-Meanings. I. (lit.) “back,” in the sense of: (1) against, in opposition (opp. anu, see below III,), contrary: viz. (a) often with the implication of a hostile attack (anti-. against): °kaṇṭaka, °kosati (re-ject), °kūla, °khipati (re-fuse, op-pose), °gha, °codeti (re-prove), thambhati, °disā, °deseti, °pakkha, °patha, °piṁsati, °pīḷita, °magga, °manteti, °yodha (at-tack), °vacana (re-ply), °vadati, °vedeti, °sattu (enemy), °suṇāti, °hata; -- (b) warding off, protecting against (counter-, anti-): °kara (antidote), °sedhati (ward-off). -- (c) putting against, setting off in a comparison (counter-, rival): °puggala (one’s equal), °purisa (rival), °bala (adequate), °bimba (counterpart), °bhāga (id.); °malla (rival wrestler), °sama, °sāsana, °sūra, °seṭṭha; -- (d) close contact (against, be-): °kujjita (covered), °gādha, °channa (“be-deckt”) °vijjhana. -- (2) in return, in exchange (in revenge) °akkosati, °āneti, °katheti, °karoti, °kūṭa¹, °kkamati, °khamāpeti, °gāti (sing in response), °gīta, °daṇḍa (retribution), °dadāti, °dāna, °nivāsana, °paṇṇa (in reply), °pasaṁsati, °piṇḍa, °pucchati (ask in return), °māreti (kill in revenge), °bhaṇḍa (goods in exchange), °bhaṇḍati (abuse in return) °rodana, °roseti, °vera (revenge), °sammodeti, °sātheyya. -- (3) (temporal) again, a second time (re-): °dasseti (re-appear), °nijjhatta, °nivattati, °pavesati, °pākatika (re-stored), °bujjhati, °vinicchinati, °sañjīvita (re-suscitated), °sandhi (re-incarnation), °sammajjati. -- (4) away from, back to (esp. in compⁿ paṭivi°): °kuṭati (shrink back), °ghāta (repulsion), °dhāvati, °neti, °paṇāmeti (send away), °bandhati (hold back), °bāhati (id.), °vijacchati, °vineti, °vinodeti (drive out), °virata, °saṁharati, °sallīna, °sutta, °sumbhita. -- II. (applied, in reflexive sense): (1) to, on to, up to, towards, at-: °oloketi (look at), °gijjha (hankering after) °ggaha, °jānāti °pūjeti, °peseti (send out to), °baddha (bound to), °bhaya, °yatta, °rūpa, °laddha, °labhati (at-tain), °lābha °lobheti, °sāmeti, °sevati (go after), °ssata. (2) together (con-, com-), esp. comb^d with °saṁ°; °saṁyujati; °passaddha, °maṇḍita, °saṅkharoti, °santhāra. -- (3) asunder, apart (“up”): °kopeti (shake up), °viṁsa (part), °vibhatta (divided up). (4) secondary, complementary, by-, sham (developed out of meaning I. 1 c.): °nāsikā (a false nose), °sīsaka (sham top knot); esp. freq. in redupl. (iterative) cpds., like aṅga-paccaṅga (limb & by-limb, i. e. all kinds of limbs), vata-paṭivatta (duties & secondary duties, all duties). In the latter application paṭi resembles the use of ā, which is more frequent (see ā⁵). -- III, The opposite of pati in directional meaning is anu, with which it is freq. comb^d either (a) in neg. contrast or (b) in positive emphasis, e. g. (a) anuvātaṁ paṭivātaṁ with and against the wind; anuloma+paṭiloma with and against the grain; °sotaṁ w. & against the stream; (b) anumasati paṭimasati to touch cloesly (lit. up & down). -- Note. The spelling pati for paṭi occurs frequently without discrimination; it is established in the combⁿ with sthā (as patiṭṭhāti, patiṭṭhita etc.). All cases are enum^d under the respective form of paṭi°, with the exception of patiṭṭh° (Page 391)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'pati, 【前缀】逆，相反，回，反对。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭi-orohati: {'def': '[paṭi+ava+ruh] to descend from DA.I,251 (°itvā). (Page 391)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭi-y-ālokaṁ: {'def': 'gacchati “to go to the South” Vin.IV,131, 161. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭi-āneti: {'def': '[paṭi+ā+nī] to lead or bring back, in duppaṭi-ānaya difficult to bring back J.IV,43. (Page 391)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭibaddha: {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+baddha, pp. of bandh] bound to, in fetters or bonds, attracted to or by, dependent on D.I,76; Vin.IV,302 (kāya°); A.V,87 (para°); Dh.284; Miln.102 (āvajjana°); PvA.134 (°jīvika dependent on him for a living). -- Freq. in cpd. °citta affected, enamoured, one’s heart bound in love Vin.III,128; IV,18; Sn.37 (see Nd² 385), 65; PvA.46, 145 (°tā f. abstr.), 151, 159 (rañño with the king). (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭibandhati 的【过分】), 已被…所绑，已依靠，已被…所吸引。~citta, 【形】迷住的，被爱所绑的。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭibandhati 的【过分】), 已被…所绑，已依靠，已被…所吸引。paṭibaddhacitta,【形】迷住的，被爱所绑的。eka-jāti-pratibaddha(梵),一生补处(一生所系菩萨，即下一生就要成佛。弥勒菩萨还不一定是一生补处)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭibala: {'def': '【形】能干的，适当的，胜任的。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】能干的，适当的，胜任的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+bala] able, adequate, competent Vin.I,56, 342; II,103, 300; III,158; A.V,71; Miln.6. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭibandha: {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+bandha] bound to, connected with, referring to Ps.I,172, 184. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭibandhati: {'def': '[paṭi+bandhati] to hold back, refuse J.IV,134 (vetanaṁ na p.=aparihāpetvā dadāti). (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭibandhu: {'def': '[paṭi+bandhu] a connection, a relation, relative Dhs.1059, 1136, 1230; DhsA.365. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi遍+bandhu亲戚) 亲戚(a relation, relative)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭibhajati: {'def': '[paṭi+bhaj] to divide M.III,91. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭibhaya: {'def': '[paṭi+bhaya] fear, terror, fright S.IV,195; PvA.90; Dāvs.IV,35. Freq. in cpd. ap° & sap°, e. g. Vin.IV,63; M.I,134; III,61. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】害怕，恐怖，惊骇。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】害怕，恐怖，惊骇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭibhaṇḍa: {'def': '[paṭi+bhaṇḍa, cp. BSk. pratipanya Divy 173, 271, 564] merchandise in exchange, barter J.I,377; PvA.277. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭibhaṇḍati: {'def': '[paṭi+bhaṇḍati] to abuse in return S.I,162 (bhaṇḍantaṁ p.); A.II,215 (id.); Nd¹ 397 (id.). (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭibhāga: {'def': '【形】等于，相似的。【阳】相似物，相似处。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+bhāga] 1. counterpart, likeness, resemblance Nd² s. v.; Vism.125 (°nimitta, imitative mental reflex, memory-image); SnA 65, 76, 83, 114, 265; PvA.46, 178, 279. -- 2. rejoinder J.VI,341 (pañha°). -- 3. counterpart, opposite, contrary M.I,304. -- appaṭibhāga (adj.) unequalled, incomparable, matchless Miln.357 (+appaṭiseṭṭha); DhA.I,423 (=anuttara). (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】等於，相似的，相对称。【阳】相似物，相似处。paṭibhāganimitta﹐似相、相似相(counterpart sign。灿烂而透明的相，呈现：棉花、气流、明亮的红宝石、明亮的珍珠、晨星、烟、云、莲花、车轮、月亮、太阳时，这就是似相。)；修习十遍禅(kasiṇa)、十不净、入出息随念及身至念的二十二种禅法可得到似相(稳定的禅相)，得近行定(upacārasamādhi)。appaṭibhāga﹐不相似的。《广释》(Vibhv.CS:p.258)：Tappaṭibhāgaṁ vaṇṇādikasiṇadosarahitaṁ nimittaṁ upacārappanānaṁ ārammaṇattāti paṭibhāganimittaṁ.(似相：这相似的(颜)色遍等毫无瑕疵的相，为近行(定)、安止(定)的所缘。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭibhāna: {'def': '(nt.) [paṭi+bhāna. Cp. late Sk. pratibhāna, fr. Pali] understanding, illumination, intelligence; readiness or confidence of speech, promptitude, wit (see on term Vin. Texts III,13, 172; Pts. of Controversy, 378 f.) D.I,16, 21, 23; S.I,187; A.II,135, 177, 230; III,42; IV,163; V,96; Ps.II,150, 157; J.VI,150; Pug.42; Vbh.293 sq.; VbhA.338, 394, 467; Miln.21; DA.I,106. -- appaṭibhāna (adj.) bewildered, not confident, cowed down Vin.II,78=III,162; M.I,258; A.III,57; J.V,238, 369; VI,362. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭibhānavant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paṭibhāna] possessed of intelligence or ready wit A.I,24; Sn.58, 853, 1147; Nd¹ 234= Nd² 386; SnA 111 (pariyatti° & paṭivedha°). (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭibhāneyyaka: {'def': '(adj.) [ger. formation+ka fr. paṭibhāna] =paṭibhānavant Vin.I,249 (cp. Vin. Texts II.140); A.I,25. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭibhāsati: {'def': '(paṭi+bhās+a), 回…致辞，答覆。【过】paṭibhāsi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+bhās] to address in return or in reply S.I,134; Sn.1024. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi + bhās + a), 回…致辞，答复。【过】 ~bhāsi。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭibhāti: {'def': '[paṭi+bhā] to appear, to be evident, to come into one’s mind, to occur to one, to be clear (cp. Vin. Texts II.30) S.I,155 (°tu taṁ dhammikathā); V,153 (T. reads patibbāti); Sn.450 (p. maṁ=mama bhāgo pakāsati Sna 399); Nd¹ 234=Nd² 386 (also fut. °bhāyissati); J.V,410; VvA.78=159 (maṁ p. ekaṁ pañhaṁ pucchituṁ “I should like to ask a question”). (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+bhā+a), 显露(to appear)，想到(to come into one’s mind)，被证实(to be evident)。【过】paṭibhāsi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + bhā + a), 想到，被证实。【过】 ~bhāsi。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭibhāṇa: {'def': '【中】机智，敏捷，准备就绪演讲，智力。 ~vantu, 【形】有机智的。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】机智，敏捷，准备就绪演讲，智力。paṭibhāṇavantu,【形】有机智的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭibimba: {'def': '(nt.) [paṭi+bimba] counterpart, image, reflection Vism.190; VvA.50; VbhA.164. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】副本，图像，反映。paṭibimbita,【形】反映的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】副本，图像，反映。 ~bumbita, 【形】反映的。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭibodha: {'def': '[fr. paṭi+budh, cp. paṭibujjhati] awaking, waking up Vv 50²⁴. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭibuddha: {'def': '[pp. of paṭibujjhati] awakened, awake Sn.807. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Patibujjhati的【过分】), 已醒来。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭibujjhati: {'def': '[paṭi+bujjhati] to wake up, to understand, know, A.III,105 sq.; ThA.74; PvA.43, 128. -- pp. paṭibuddha (q. v.). (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pati+budh醒+ya), 理解，醒来。【过】paṭibujjhi。【独】paṭibujhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭibāhaka: {'def': '[of paṭi+bādh] antidote Miln.335; repelling, preventing J.VI,571. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】逐退的，防止的，预防者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】逐退的，防止的，预防者。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭibāhana: {'def': 'exclusion, warding off, prevention Miln.81; Vism.244. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭibāhati: {'def': '(paṭi+vah带+a), 挡住，规避，让开，拒绝，责备(=paṭikkosati , DA.I,160)。【过】paṭibāhi。【过分】paṭibāhita。【现分】paṭibāhanta。【独】paṭibāhitvā, paṭibāhiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + vah + a), 挡住，规避，让开，拒绝。【过】 ~bāhi。【过分】 ~bāhita。【现分】 ~bāhanta。【独】 ~bāhitvā, ~bāhiya。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+*bāh of bahis adv. outside] to ward off, keep off, shut out, hold back, refuse, withhold, keep out, evade Vin.I,356; II,162, 166 sq., 274; IV,288; J.I,64, 217; DhA.II,2 (rañño āṇaṁ), 89 (sītaṁ); VvA.68; PvA.96 (maraṇaṁ), 252, 286 (grd. appaṭibāhanīya). Caus. °bāheti in same meaning J.IV,194; DhA.II,71; PvA.54. -- pp. paṭibāḷha (q. v.). (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭibāhira: {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+bāhira] outside, excluded Vin.II,168. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭibāhiya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of paṭibāhati] to be kept off or averted, neg. ap° J.IV,152. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭibāḷha: {'def': '[pp. of paṭibāhati, though more likely to paṭi+ vah²] (op)pressed, forced, urged Vbh.338=Miln.301. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭicaleti: {'def': '[Caus. of paṭicalati] to nudge J.V,434. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭicamma: {'def': 'in °gataṁ sallaṁ at J.VI,78 to be expl^d not with C. as from paṭi+camati (cam to wash, cp. ācamati), which does not agree with the actual meaning, but according to Kern, Toev. II.29, s. v. as elliptical for paṭibhinna-camma, i. e. piercing the skin so as to go right through (to the opp. side) which falls in with the C. explⁿ “vāmapassena pavisitvā dakkhiṇapassena viniggatan ti.” (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭicarati: {'def': '(paṭi + car + a), 转向，避开话题，使讨论的内容模糊。【过】~cari。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi相反+car移动+a), 转向(to wander about)，避开话题(to go about or evade (a question))。aññena aññaṁ paṭicarati(顾左右而言他﹐to be saved by another in another way; to receive a difference, answer to what is asked)。【过】paṭicari。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+carati) 1. to wander about, to deal with Miln.94. -- 2. to go about or evade (a question), to obscure a matter of discussion, in phrase aññena aññaṁ p. “to be saved by another in another way,” or to from one (thing) to another, i. e. to receive a diff, answer to what is asked D.I,94; Vin.IV,35; M.I,96, 250, 442; A.IV,168 (v. l. paṭivadati); expl^d at DA.I,264 by ajjhottharati paṭicchādeti “to cover over,” i. e. to conceal (a question). See on expression Dialogues I.116. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭicaya: {'def': 'Paṭicaya, & Paṭiccaya (paṭi+caya) 增加，堆积，累积(adding to, heaping up, accumulation, increase)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& paṭiccaya [paṭi+caya] adding to, heaping up, accumulation, increase Vin.II,74; III,158 (pati°); S.III,169; A.III,376 sq. (v. l. pati°); IV,355; V,336 sq.; Th.1, 642; Ud.35 (pati°); Miln.138. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭicca: {'def': '[ger. of pacceti, paṭi+i; cp. BSk. pratītya] grounded on, on account of, concerning, because (with Acc.) M.I,265 (etaṁ on these grounds); S.III,93=It.89 (atthavasaṁ); J.II,386 (=abhisandhāya); Sn.680, 784, 872, 1046; SnA 357; DhA.I,4; PvA.64 (maraṇaṁ), 164, 181 (kammaṁ), 207 (anuddayaṁ). See also foll.

--vinīta trained to look for causality M.III,19. (Page 394)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【不、独】因为，由于，关于。 ~samuppanna, 【形】因缘关系的。~samuppāda, 【阳】因缘。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ger. of pacceti依靠, paṭi+i; cp. BSk. pratītya),【不、独】因为，由於，关於(grounded on, on account of, concerning, because)。paṭiccasamuppanna,【形】因缘关系的。paṭiccasamuppāda,【阳】缘起。paṭiccasamuppannā dhammā﹐缘生法、因缘所生法。dvādasa paṭiccasamuppādaṅgāni﹐十二支缘起。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭicca-samuppanna: {'def': '[p.+samuppana] evolved by reason of the law of causation D.III,275; M.I,500; S.II,26; A.V,187; Ps.I,51 sq., 76 sq.; Vbh.340, 362. Cp. BSk. pratitya samutpanna MVastu III,61. (Page 394)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭicca-samuppāda: {'def': '[p.+samuppāda, BSk. prātītyasamutpāda, e. g. Divy 300, 547] “arising on the grounds of (a preceding cause)” happening by way of cause, working of cause & effect, causal chain of causation; causal genesis, dependent origination, theory of the twelve causes. -- See on this Mrs. Rh. D. in Buddhism 90 f., Ency. Rel. & Ethics, s. v. & KS.II,, preface. Cpd. p. 260 sq. with diagram of the “Wheel of Life”; Pts. of Controversy, 390 f. -- The general formula runs thus: Imasmiṁ sati, idaṁ hoti, imass’uppādā, idaṁ uppajjati; imasmiṁ asati, idaṁ na hoti; imassa nirodhā, idaṁ nirujjhati. This being, that becomes; from the arising of this, that arises; this not becoming, that does not become: from the ceasing of this, that ceases M.II,32; S.II,28 etc. The term usually occurs applied to dukkha in a famous formula which expresses the Buddhist doctrine of evolution, the respective stages of which are conditioned by a preceding cause & constitute themselves the cause of resulting effect, as working out the next state of the evolving (shall we say) “individual” or “being,” in short the bearer of evolution. The respective links in this chain which to study & learn is the first condition for a “Buddhist” to an understanding of life, and the cause of life, and which to know forward and backward (anuloma-paṭilomaṁ manas’âkāsi Vin.I,1) is indispensable for the student, are as follows. The root of all, primary cause of all existence, is avijjā ignorance; this produces saṅkhārā: karma, dimly conscious elements, capacity of impression or predisposition (will, action, Cpd.; synergies Mrs. Rh. D.), which in their turn give rise to viññāṇa thinking substance (consciousness, Cpd.; cognition Mrs. Rh. D.), then follow in succession the foll. stages: nāmarūpa individuality (mind & body, animated organism Cpd.; name & form Mrs. Rh. D.), saḷāyatana the senses (6 organs of sense Cpd.; the sixfold sphere Mrs. Rh. D.), phassa contact, vedanā feeling, taṇhā thirst for life (craving), upādāna clinging to existence or attachment (dominant idea Cpd.; grasping Mrs. Rh. D.), bhava (action or character Cpd.; renewed existence Mrs. Rh. D.), jāti birth (rebirth conception Cpd.), jarāmaraṇa (+soka-parideva-dukkhadomanass’ûpayāsā) old age & death (+tribulation, grief, sorrow, distress & despair). The BSk. form is pratītya-samutpāda, e. g. at Divy 300, 547.

The Paṭicca-samuppāda is also called the Nidāna (“basis,” or “ground,” i. e. cause) doctrine, or the Paccay’ākāra (“related-condition”), and is referred to in the Suttas as Ariya-ñāya (“the noble method or system”). The term paccay’ākāra is late and occurs only in Abhidhamma-literature. -- The oldest account is found in the Mahāpadāna Suttanta of the Dīgha Nikāya (D.II,30 sq.; cp. Dial. II.24 sq.), where 10 items form the constituents of the chain, and are given in backward order, reasoning from the appearance of dukkha in this world of old age and death towards the original cause of it in viññāṇa. The same chain occurs again at S.II,104 sq. -- A later development shows 12 links, viz. avijjā and saṅkhārā added to precede viññāṇa (as above). Thus at S.II,5 sq. -- A detailed exposition of the P.-s. in Abhidhamma literature is the exegesis given by Bdhgh at Vism.XVII. (pp. 517--586, under the title of Paññā-bhūmi-niddesa), and at VbhA.130--213 under the title of Paccayākāra-vibhaṅga. ‹-› Some passages selected for ref.: Vin.I,1 sq.; M.I,190, 257; S.I,136; II,1 sq., 26 sq., 42 sq., 70, 92 sq., 113 sq.; AI.177; V,184; Sn. 653; Ud.1 sq.; Ps.I,50 sq.; 144; Nett 22, 24, 32, 64 sq.; DA.I,125, 126.

--kusala skilled in the (knowledge of the) chain of causation M.III,63; Nd¹ 171; f. abstr. °kusalatā D.III,212. (Page 394)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiccasamuppāda: {'def': '【阳】缘起(即因缘法)。Vism.520-1.：So hi yasmā patīyamāno hitāya sukhāya ca saṁvattati, tasmā paccetumarahanti naṁ paṇḍitāti paṭicco. Uppajjamāno ca saha sammā ca uppajjati, na ekekato, nāpi ahetutoti samuppādo. Evaṁ paṭicco ca so samuppādo cāti paṭiccasamuppādo. Apica saha uppajjatīti samuppādo, paccayasāmaggiṁ pana paṭicca apaccakkhāyāti evampi paṭiccasamuppādo.(此缘起，因为了解它有助於利益和幸福，故智者值得去领解(paccetum)，是名为「缘」(paṭicca﹐pacceti=paṭi+ī；pacceti it=paṭicca)，生起之时，是俱(saha)(生起uppajjati)而非单独，是正(sammā)生起(uppajjati)而非无因，是名为「起」(samuppādo)。)《俱舍论》：「此中缘起(pratityasamutpāda)是何句义？鉢刺底(prat)是至义。医底(itya)界是行义，由先助力界义转变，故行由至转变成缘。参(sam)是和合义。嗢(ut)是上升义。鉢地(pāda)界是有义，有藉合升转变成起，由此有法至於缘已和合升起，是缘起义。」(T29.50.1) S.12.20./II,25~27.(cf.《杂阿含296经》)说「缘起」：ṭhitāva sā dhātu dhammaṭṭhitatā dhammaniyāmatā idappaccayatā(此(法)住於界，法住、法决定性，即是此缘性)SA.12.20.：ṭhitāva sā dhātūti ṭhitova so paccayasabhāvo, na kadāci jāti jarāmaraṇassa paccayo na hoti. (此(法)住於界：它住立於因缘的自性，不会某时没有生缘老死(等)。)Dhammaṭṭhitatā dhammaniyāmatāti imehipi dvīhi paccayameva katheti. Paccayena hi paccayuppannā dhammā tiṭṭhanti, tasmā paccayova “dhammaṭṭhitatā”ti vuccati. Paccayo dhamme niyameti, tasmā “dhammaniyāmatā”ti vuccati.(法住、法决定性：具有这两种因缘论，的确，以因缘、已再生缘，从此因缘，法住性。在法上缘的确定，称为决定性。) Idappaccayatāti imesaṁ jarāmaraṇādīnaṁ paccayā idappaccayā, idappaccayāva idappaccayatā.( 此缘性：这些老死等诸缘的此缘，以此缘称为此缘性。)。《瑜伽师地论》：「无始时来展转安立，名为法性。由现在世(因果次第)，名为法住。由过去世(因果次第)，名为法定。由未来世(因果次第)，名法如性。」(T30.833.1) 缘起偈(见S.12.37.、S.12.61.~62、S.55.28.)：‘Iti imasmiṁ sati idaṁ hoti, imassuppādā idaṁ uppajjati; imasmiṁ asati idaṁ na hoti, imassa nirodhā idaṁ nirujjhati.’ (「此有故彼有」(在此存在时，彼变成)，「此生故彼生」(由於此的被生，彼被生)；「此无故彼无」(在此无存在时，彼无有)，「此灭故彼灭」(由於此的灭，彼被灭)。) Abs.：tabbhāvabhāvībhāvākāramattopalakkhito paṭiccasamuppādanaya,( ‹ taṁ+ bhāva+ bhāvī+ bhāva+ ākāra+ matta + upalakkhito)﹐缘起(的方)法是：「依靠其它法，而有为法纯粹只是发生」，而被赋予特性。(tabbhāva，其他的法，bhāvī(将成为的法)有为法，bhāvākāramatta纯粹只是发生，upalakkhito，被赋予特性、辨别；paṭiccasamuppāda，缘起，nayo，方法)。S.12.2./II,2.︰“Katamo ca, bhikkhave, paṭiccasamuppādo? Avijjāpaccayā, bhikkhave, saṅkhārā; saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṁ; viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpaṁ; nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatanaṁ; saḷāyatanapaccayā phasso; phassapaccayā vedanā; vedanāpaccayā taṇhā; taṇhāpaccayā upādānaṁ; upādānapaccayā bhavo; bhavapaccayā jāti jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṁ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā sambhavanti. Evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hoti.(无明缘行(以‘无明’为缘生起‘诸行’)，行缘识(以‘诸行’为缘生起‘识’)，识缘名色(以‘识’为缘生起‘名色’)，名色缘六入(以‘名色’为缘生起‘六入’)，六入缘触(以‘六入’为缘生起‘触’)，触缘受(以‘触’为缘生起‘受’)，受缘爱(以‘受’为缘生起‘爱’)，爱缘取(以‘爱’为缘生起‘取’)，取缘有(以‘取’为缘生起‘有’)，有缘生(以‘有’为缘生起‘生’)，以‘生’为缘而生起‘老与死、愁、悲、苦、忧、恼’，这样这是全部苦蕴的集。就是因为无明灭无余而行灭，因为诸行灭而识灭，因为识灭而名色灭，因为名色灭而六入灭，因为六入灭而触灭，因为触灭而受灭，因为受灭而爱灭，因为爱灭而取灭，因为取灭而有灭，因为有灭而生灭，因为生灭而老死、愁、悲、苦、忧、恼灭，这样这是一切苦蕴的灭。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭicchaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paṭicchati) receiving J.VI,287. (Page 394)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭicchanna: {'def': '[pp. of paṭicchādeti] covered, concealed, hidden Vin.II,40; A.I,282; Sn.126, 194; Pv.I,10² (kesehi=paṭicchādita PvA.48); II,10² (kesehi); DA.I,276, 228; SnA 155; KhA 53; VbhA.94 (°dukkha); PvA.43, 103. --appaṭicchanna unconcealed, open, unrestrained Vin.II,38; J.I,207.

--kammanta of secret doing, one who acts underhand or conceals his actions A.II,239; Sn.127. (Page 394)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭicchādeti 的【过分】)。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭicchādeti 的【过分】)已遮没，已隐藏。A.2.3./I,60.说：“Paṭicchannakammantassa bhikkhave, dvinnaṁ gatīnaṁ aṅṅatarā gati pāṭikaṅkhā--nirayo vā tiracchānayoni vāti.(造覆藏(恶)业之人，应预期二趣之随一趣：地狱或傍生。) Pāci.IV,269︰Paṭicchanno nāma okāso kuṭṭena vā kavāṭena vā kilañjena vā sāṇipākārena vā rukkhena vā thambhena vā kotthaḷiyā vā yena kenaci paṭicchanno hoti.(隐密处︰或围墙，或窗户，或草席，或(麻布制的)屏壁，或树，或柱子，或粗布袋(?)，任何这些空间是隐密处。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭicchati: {'def': '(paṭi + isu + a), 接受，接收。【过】 ~cchi。【过分】 ~chita。【独】~chitvā, ~chiya。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi+isu+a), 接受，接收。【过】paṭicchi。【过分】paṭicchita。【独】paṭicchitvā, paṭicchiya。【使】paṭicchāpeti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+icchati of iṣ²; cp. BSk. pratīcchati Divy 238 and sampaṭicchati] to accept, receive, take A.III,243 (udakaṁ); Vin.IV,18; Th.2, 421; J.I,233; II,432; III,171; IV,137; V,197; DhA.III,271. -- pp. paṭicchita (q. v.). Caus. II. paṭicchāpeti to entrust, dedicate, give J.I,64, 143, 159, 383, 506; II,133; PvA.81. (Page 394)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭicchavi: {'def': 'in appaṭicchavi at Pv.II,1¹³ read with v. l. as sampatitacchavi. (Page 394)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭicchita: {'def': '[pp. of paṭicchati] accepted, taken up Sn.803 (pl. °tāse, cp. Nd¹ 113 & SnA 531). (Page 394)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭicchāda: {'def': '[fr. paṭi+chad] 1. covering, clothes, clothing Pv.II,1¹⁶ (=vattha PvA.76). -- 2. deceiving, hiding; concealment, deception Sn.232. (Page 394)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭicchādaka: {'def': 'paṭicchādī, 【形】隐藏的，作掩护的，模糊的。 ~dana, 【中】隐蔽，遮盖物。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '=prec. DhsA.51. (Page 394)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】隐藏的，作掩护的，模糊的。paṭicchādana,【中】隐蔽，遮盖物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭicchādana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṭicchādeti] covering, hiding, concealment M.I,10; A.III,352; Vbh.357=SnA 180. (Page 394)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭicchādaniya: {'def': '【中】肉汤，肉汁。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṭicchādeti] the flavour of meat, flavouring, meat broth or gravy Vin.I,206, 217; Miln.291. (Page 394)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】肉汤，肉汁。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭicchādeti: {'def': '(paṭi+chad盖+e), 遮没，隐藏。【过】paṭicchādesi。【过分】paṭicchādita, paṭicchanna。【现分】paṭicchādenta。【独】paṭicchādetvā, paṭicchādiya。【不】paṭicchādetuṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + chad + e), 遮没，隐藏。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~dita,~channa。【现分】 ~denta。【独】 ~detvā, ~chādiya。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+chādeti, Caus. of chad] 1. to cover over, conceal, hide S.I,70, 161; DA.I,264; VvA.65 (dhanaṁ); KhA 191; PvA.76, 88, 142 (kesehi), 194 (=parigūhati). -- 2. to clothe oneself Vin.I,46. -- 3. to dress (surgically), to treat (a wound) M.I,220. -- 4. to conceal or evade (a question) DA.I,264. -- pp. paṭicchādita & paṭicchanna (q. v.). (Page 394)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭicchādika: {'def': '【形】隐藏的。vajjappaṭicchādikā, 隐藏罪的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭicchādita: {'def': '[pp. of paṭicchādeti, cp. paṭicchanna] covered, concealed, hidden J.VI,23 (=paṭisanthata) PvA.48. (Page 394)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭicchādī: {'def': '(f.) [fr. paṭicchādeti] 1. covering, protection Vin.II,122. -- 2. antidote, remedy, medicine (or a cloth to protect the itch) Vin.I,296; IV,171. (Page 394)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. paṭicchādeti),【阴】1.庇护，掩护，隐藏(covering, protection)。2.矫正方法(antidote, remedy, medicine (or a cloth to protect the itch))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭicodana: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. paṭicodeti] rebuking, scolding (back) DhsA.393. (Page 394)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭicodeti: {'def': '(paṭi相反+cud+e), 责备，倒回责备。【过】paṭicodesi。【过分】paṭicodita。【独】paṭicodetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+codeti] to blame, reprove M.I,72; Vin.IV,217; Ud.45. (Page 394)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi + cud + e), 倒责备回，责备。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~dita。【独】 ~detvā。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭicāra: {'def': '[fr. paṭi+car] intercourse, visit, dealing with Miln.94. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭidadāti: {'def': '(paṭi + dā + a), 归还，回复。【过】 ~dadi。【过分】 ~dinna。【独】~datvā。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+dadāti] to give back, to restore J.I,177; IV,411 (°diyyare); PvA.276 (ger. °datvā). (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+dā+a), 归还，回复。【过】paṭidadi。【过分】paṭidadinna。【独】paṭidadatvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭidasseti: {'def': '(paṭi + dis + e), 现身，再出现。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~dassita。【独】 ~setvā。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi+dis指出+e), 现身，再出现。【过】paṭidassesi。【过分】paṭidassita。【独】paṭidassetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+dasseti] to show oneself or to appear again, to reappear Pv III,2²⁷. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭidaṇḍa: {'def': '【阳】报应，报偿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+daṇḍa] retribution Dh.133, cp. DhA.III,57, 58. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】报应，报偿。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭideseti: {'def': '(paṭi+dis指出+e), 承认，悔过，认过。【过】paṭidesi。【过分】paṭidesita。【独】paṭidesetvā。grd. paṭidesetabba。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + dis + e), 承认。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~desita。【独】~setvā。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+deseti] to confess Vin.II,102. See also pāṭidesaniya. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭidhāvati: {'def': '(paṭi + dhāv + a), 跑回去，跑近。【过】 ~dhāvi。【独】 ~vitvā。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi+dhāv追+a), 跑回去，跑近。【过】paṭidhāvi。【独】paṭidhāvitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+dhāvati] to run back to (Acc.) M.I,265 ≈ S.II,26 (pubbanṭaṁ; opp. aparantaṁ ādhāvati M, upadhāvati S); Sdhp.167. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭidissati: {'def': '(paṭi + dis + ya), 被看到，出现。【过】 ~dissi。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+dissati; usually spelt pati°] to be seen, to appear J.III,47=PvA.281; Sn.123; J.IV,139; SnA 172. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+dis指出+ya), 被看到，出现。【过】paṭidissi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭidisā: {'def': '(f.) [paṭi+disā] an opposite (counter-) point of the compass, opposite quarter D.III,176 (disā ca p. ca vidisā ca). (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭidukkhāpanatā: {'def': '(f.) [paṭi+abstr. of dukkhāpeti, Caus. --denom. fr. dukkha] the fact of being afflicted again with súffering Miln.180. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭidāna: {'def': '【中】奖赏，归还。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [paṭi+dāna] reward, restitution, gift PvA.80. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】奖赏，归还。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭigacca: {'def': '【独】预先。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】预先。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see paṭikacca. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭigacchati: {'def': 'to give up, leave behind J.IV,482 (gehaṁ); cp. paccagū. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭigandhiya: {'def': 'only as neg. appaṭi° (q. v.). (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiggaha: {'def': '[fr. paṭiggaṇhāti] 1. receiving, acceptance; one who receives, recipient J.I,146; II,9; VI,474; Pv III,1¹¹. -- 2. friendly reception J.VI,526. -- 3. receptacle (for water etc.) Vin.II,115, 213 (udaka°). -- 4. a thimble Vin.II,116. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】痰盂。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】痰盂。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭiggahaṇa: {'def': '【中】接受，接待，拿。参考 Paṭiggaṇhana。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '参考 Paṭiggaṇhana。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṭigganhāti] acceptance, receiving, taking M.III,34; S.V,472; SnA 341. -- accaya° acceptance of a sin, i. e. pardon, absolution J.V,380. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiggahetu: {'def': '【阳】 Paṭiggāhaka, 【阳】接受者，接收者，拿者。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】paṭiggāhaka,【阳】接受者，接收者，拿者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭiggahita: {'def': '[pp. of paṭigganhāti] received, got, accepted, appropriated, taken Vin.I,206, 214; J.VI,231. -- As appaṭiggahitaka (nt.) “that which is not received” at Vin.IV,90. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiggahītar: {'def': '[n. ag. of paṭiggaṇhāti] one who receives, recipient D.I,89. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiggaṇhana: {'def': '【中】接受，接待，拿。paṭiggaṇhanaka,【形】收受的，接收者，能保持的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】接受，接待，拿。 ~ka, 【形】收受的，接收者，能保持的。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭiggaṇhanaka: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [paṭiggaṇhana (=paṭiggahaṇa) +ka] receiving, receiver PvA.175. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiggaṇhāti: {'def': '(paṭigaṇhāti) [paṭi+gaṇhāti] to receive, accept, take (up) D.I,110 (vatthaṁ), 142; Vin.I,200; II,109, 116 (a sewing-needle); S.IV,326 (jātarūpa-rajataṁ); Sn.479, 689, 690; Dh.220; J.I,56, 65; DA.I,236; PvA.47. In special phrase accayaṁ paṭiggaṇhāti to accept (the confession of) a sin, to pardon a sin Vin.II,192; D.I,85; M.I,438; J.V,379. -- pp. paṭiggahita (q. v.). -- Caus. °ggaheti Vin.II,213; M.I,32. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭigaṇhāti) (paṭi+gah拿+ṇhā), 拿，接收，接受，领受(to receive, accept, take (up))。【过】paṭiggaṇhi。【过分】paṭiggahita。【现分】paṭiggaṇhanta。【独】paṭiggahetvā, paṭiggaṇhiya, paṭiggayha。【使】paṭiggaheti。accayaṁ paṭiggaṇhāti﹐接受忏悔过失(to accept (the confession of) a sin, to pardon a sin)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + gah + ṇhā), 拿，接收，接受。【过】 ~gaṇhi。【过分】~gahita。【现分】 ~gaṇhanta。【独】 ~gahetvā, ~gaṇhiya, paṭiggayha。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭiggāha: {'def': 'see patiṭṭhāha. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiggāhaka: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. paṭiggaṇhāti] receiving, accepting; one who receives, recipient Vin.II,213; D.I,138; A.I,161; II,80 sq.; III,42, 336; J.I,56; PvA.7, 128, 175 (opp. dāyaka); VvA.195; Sdhp.268. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiggāhaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṭiggaṇhāti] reception, taking in J.VI,527. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭigha: {'def': '【阳】激怒，厌恶，碰撞。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi反 + gha (ghan的接尾词=han杀﹑击?接触)),【阳】【中】反击、抵抗(resistive)，厌恶(repulsion)，反感(repugnance)。cf. sappaṭigha,有对(有质碍)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(m. & nt.) [paṭi+gha, adj. suffix of ghan=han, lit. striking against] 1. (ethically) repulsion, repugnance, anger D.I,25, 34; III,254, 282; S.I,13; IV,71, 195, 205, 208 sq.; V,315; A.I,3, 87, 200; Sn.371, 536; Dhs.1060; Miln.44; DA.I,22. -- 2. (psychologically) sensory reaction D.III,224, 253, 262; S.I,165, 186; A.I,41, 267; II,184; Dhs.265, 501, 513, 579; VbhA.19. See on term Dhs.trslⁿ 72, 204, 276 and passim. -- appaṭigha see separately s. v. Note. How shall we read paṭighaṭṭha nānighaṁso at DhsA.308? (paṭigha-ṭṭhāna-nighaṁso, or paṭighaṭṭana-nighaṁso?) (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭighavant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paṭigha] full of repugnance, showing anger S.IV,208, 209. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭighosa: {'def': '【阳】回声。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】回声。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+ghosa] echo Vism.554. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭighāta: {'def': '[paṭi+ghāta, of same root as paṭigha] 1. (lit.) warding off, staying, repulsion, beating off D.III,130; M.I,10; A.I,98; IV,106 sq.; J.I,344; Vism.31 (=paṭihanana); Miln.121; DhA.II,8; PvA.33. -- 2. (psych.) resentment Dhs.1060, cp. Dhs.trsl. 282. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi相反+ghāta),【阳】敲击(warding off)，厌恶(repulsion)，反击(beating off)，忿怒(resentment)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】碰撞，敲击，厌恶。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭigijjha: {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+gijjha, a doublet of giddha, see gijjha²] greedy; hankering after Sn.675 (SnA 482 reads °giddha and expl^ns by mahāgijjha). (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭigijjhati: {'def': '(paṭi+gidh+ya), 渴望，需要，贪婪化。【过】paṭigijjhi。【过分】paṭigiddha。参考 Gijjhati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + gidh + ya), 渴望，需要，贪婪化。【过】 ~jhi。【过分】~giddha。参考 Gijjhati。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭiguhati: {'def': '(°gūhati) [paṭi+gūhati] to concert, keep back Cp. I.9¹⁸. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭigādha: {'def': '[paṭi+gādha²] a firm stand or foothold A.6.16./III,297 sq.; Pug.72=Kvu 389. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+gādha2) 稳固的立足点(a firm stand or foothold A.III,297 sq.; Pug.72=Kvu 389.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭigāthā: {'def': '(f.) [paṭi+gāthā] counter-stanza, response SnA 340. Cp. paccanīka-gāthā. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭigāyati: {'def': '(°gāti) [paṭi+gāyati] to sing in response, to reply by a song J.IV,395 (imper. °gāhi). (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭigīta: {'def': '(nt.) [paṭi+gīta] a song in response, counter song J.IV,393. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭigūhati: {'def': '(paṭi+gūh+a), 隐藏，隐瞒。【过】paṭigūhi。【过分】paṭigūhita。【独】paṭigūhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + gūh + a), 隐藏，隐瞒。【过】 ~gūhi。【过分】 ~gūhita。【独】 ~gūhitvā。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭihanana: {'def': '【中】打击，反击，冲撞。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṭi+han] repulsion, warding off Vism.31. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】打击，反击，冲撞。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭihananaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paṭi+han] one who offers resistance DhA.I,217. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭihanati: {'def': '[paṭi+han] to strike against, ward off, keep away, destroy M.I,273; Miln.367; ppr. paṭihanamāna meeting, impinging on, striking against Vism.343. ‹-› ger. paṭihacca S.V,69, 237, 285; fut. paṭihaṅkhati; pp. paṭihata (q. v.). -- Pass. paṭihaññati It.103; J.I,7; DhsA.72. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pati + han + a), 反击，防止，碰撞。【过】~hani。【过分】 paṭihata。【独】 ~hantvā。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pati+han打+a), 反击，防止，碰撞。【过】paṭihani。【过分】paṭihata。【独】paṭihantvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭiharati: {'def': '[paṭi+hṛ] to strike in return Vin.II,265; D.I,142; S.IV,299. -- Caus. paṭihāreti to repel, avoid J.VI,266, 295. -- Cp. pāṭihāriya etc. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭihata: {'def': '[pp. of paṭihanti] stricken, smitten, corrupted Pv III,7⁹; PvA.20 (°citta), 207 (id.).- app° unobstructed DhA.II,8; VvA.14. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Paṭihaññati的【过分】), 已重击，已受打击。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭihaññati: {'def': '(paṭi+han打+ya), 被撞，被折磨。【过】paṭihaññi。【独】paṭihaññitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + han + ya), 被撞，被折磨。【过】~haññi。【独】 ~haññitvā。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭihaṁsati: {'def': '[for ghaṁsati?] to beat, knock against PvA.271 (for ghaṭṭeti Pv IV.10⁸; v. l. paṭipisati). (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭihaṅkhati: {'def': '[fut. of paṭihanti] only in one stock phrase viz. purāṇañ ca vedanaṁ paṭihaṅkhāmi navañ ca vedanaṁ na uppādessāmi “I shall destroy any old feeling and not produce any new” S.IV,104=A.II,40= III,388=IV.167=Nd¹ 496=Nd² 540²; Vism.32, 33. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭihāra: {'def': 'pāṭihīra, pāṭihera, pāṭihāriya, 【中】奇迹，非常的事件。~riyapakkha, 【阳】额外的假日。(p221)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭijaggaka: {'def': '【阳】养育者，教育者，看护者。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】养育者，教育者，看护者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paṭijaggati] fostering, nursing, taking care of J.V,111. (Page 394)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭijaggana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṭijaggati] rearing, fostering, tending; attention, care J.I,148; Miln.366; DhA.I,27; II,96. (Page 394)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】养育，收养，管理，照料，修理。 ~naka, 【形】看护的，照料的。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】养育，收养，管理，照料，修理。paṭijagganaka,【形】看护的，照料的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭijagganaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paṭijaggana] to be reared or brought up J.VI,73 (putta). (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭijaggati: {'def': '[paṭi+jaggati, cp. BSk. pratijāgarti Divy 124, 306] lit. to watch over, i. e. to nourish, tend, feed, look after, take care of, nurse Dh.157; J.I,235, 375; II,132, 200, 436; Vism.119; DhA.I,8, 45, 99, 392; IV,154; PvA.10, 43. -- pp. paṭijaggita (q. v.). -- Caus. °jaggāpeti. (Page 394)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+jag +a), 看守，照顾，护理，滋养，修理，清理。【过】paṭijaggi。【过分】paṭijaggita。【独】paṭijaggitvā, paṭijaggiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + jag + a), 看守，照顾，护理，滋养，修理。【过】 ~ggi。【过分】 ~gita。【独】 ~gitvā, ~ggiya。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭijaggita: {'def': '[pp. of paṭijaggati] reared, cared for, looked after, brought up J.V,274, 331. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭijaggiya: {'def': '【形】可以被看护的，可以被修理的。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of paṭijaggati] to be nursed DhA.I,319. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】可以被看护的，可以被修理的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭijaggāpeti: {'def': '[Caus. II. of paṭijaggati] to make look after or tend Vism.74. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭijānāti: {'def': '(paṭi + ñā + ā), 承认，答应，同意。【过】 ~jāni。【过分】 paṭiññāta。【现分】 ~jānanta。【独】 ~jānitvā。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+jānāti] to acknowledge, agree to, approve, promise, consent D.I,3, 192; S.I,68, 172; II,170; III,28; V 204, 423; Sn.76, 135, 555, 601, 1148; J.I,169; DhA.I,21; PvA.223 (pot. paṭiññeyya), 226 (id.), 241; ger. paṭiññāya Vin.II,83 (a°). -- pp. paṭiññāta (q. v.). (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+ñā+ā), 承认，答应，同意。【过】paṭijāni。【过分】paṭiññāta。【现分】paṭijānanta。【独】paṭijānitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭikacca: {'def': '(indecl.) [so read for °gacca as given at all passages mentioned, see Trenckner Miln.p. 421, & Geiger Pr. § 38¹. -- ger. fr. paṭikaroti (q.v.), cp. Sk. pratikāra in same meaning “caution, remedy”] 1. previously (lit. as cautioned) Vin.IV,44; Miln.48 (v. l. °kacca) usually as paṭigacc’eva, e.g. Vin.I,342; D.II,118. -- (2) providing for (the future), preparing for, with caution, cautiously Vin.II,256; S.I,57; V,162; A.II,25; D.II,144; Th.1, 547; J.III,208; IV,166 (in explⁿ of paṭikata & paṭikaroti); V,235. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikamma: {'def': '(nt.) [paṭi+kamma, cp. paṭikaroti] redress, atonement A.I,21 (sa° & a° āpatti) Miln.29; DA.I,96. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】矫正，赎罪。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】矫正，赎罪。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭikampati: {'def': '[paṭi+kampati] to shake; pret. paccakampittha J.V,340. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikara: {'def': '【形】抵销的，矫正的，赎罪的。apaṭikara,【反】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. paṭi+kṛ] counteracting; requital, compensation Vin.IV,218 (a°); D.I,137 (ovāda° giving advice or providing for? v. l. pari°); III,154. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】抵销的，矫正的，赎罪的。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭikaroti: {'def': '[paṭi+karoti) 1. to redress, repair, make amends for a sin, expiate (āpattiṁ) Vin.I,98, 164; II,259; IV,19; S.II,128=205; A.V,324; DhA.I,54. -- 2. to act against, provide for, beware, be cautious J.IV,166. ‹-› 3. to imitate J.II,406. -- ger. paṭikacca (q. v.). -- pp. paṭikata (q. v.). (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi + kar + o), 纠正，赎罪，违反。【过】 ~kari。【现分】~karonta。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi相反+kar行+o), 发露(忏悔)，纠正，赎罪，违反。【过】paṭikari。【现分】paṭikaronta。accayaṁ accayato disvā yathādhammaṁ paṭikaroti, 於过见过而如法忏悔。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭikassana: {'def': '(nt.) [paṭi+kṛṣ] drawing back, in phrase mūlāya p. “throwing back to the beginning, causing to begin over & over again” Vin.II,7, 162; A.I,99. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikassati: {'def': '(paṭi相反+ka +a), 倒退，丢回。【过】paṭikassi。【过分】paṭikassita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + ka + a), 倒退，丢回。【过】 ~kassi。【过分】 ~kassita。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+kassati] to draw back, remove, throw back Vin.I,320 (mūlāya); II,7 (id.). (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikata: {'def': '(paṭikaroti 的【过分】), 已纠正。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭikaroti 的【过分】), 已纠正。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of paṭikaroti] “done against,” i. e. provided or guarded against J.IV,166. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikatheti: {'def': '[paṭi+katheti] to answer, reply J.VI,224; DA.I,263. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikaṅkha: {'def': '(paṭi相反+ kakh (梵kāṅks)欲望), 【义】可被期待的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭikaṅkhati: {'def': '(paṭi相反+ kakh(梵kāṅks)欲望+ṁ-a), 愿，渴望。【过】paṭikaṅkhi。【过分】paṭikaṅkhita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + kakh + ŋ-a), 愿，渴望。【过】 ~khi。【过分】 ~khita。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+kāṅkṣ] to wish for, long for S.I,227. adj. °kaṅkhin M.I,21. See also pāṭikaṅkhin. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikaṇṭaka: {'def': '[paṭi+kantaka⁴] an enemy, adversary, robber, highwayman J.I,186; II,239; DhA.III,456 (v. l. °kaṇḍaka). (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】不利的，相对的，怀敌意的，有敌意的。【阳】敌人。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】不利的，相对的，怀敌意的，有敌意的。【阳】敌人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭikeḷanā: {'def': 'see parikeḷanā; i. e. counter-playing Dh.I,286. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikhamāpita: {'def': '[pp. of paṭi+khamāpeti, Caus. of khamati] forgiven DhA.II,78. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikibbisa: {'def': '(nt.) [paṭi+kibbisa] wrong doing in return, retaliation J.III,135. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikiliṭṭha: {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+kiliṭṭha] very miserable PvA.268 (v. l.); and perhaps at DhA.II,3 for paṭikiṭṭha (q. v.). (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikirati: {'def': '[paṭi+kirati] to strew about, to sprawl Pv IV.10⁸ (uttānā paṭikirāma=vikirīyamān’aṅgā viya vattāma PvA.271). (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikiṭṭha: {'def': 'inferior, low, vile A.I,286=Dh.I,144; in meaning “miserable” at DhA.II,3 is perhaps better to be read with v. l. as pakkiliṭṭha, or should it be paṭikuṭṭha? (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikkama: {'def': '【阳】去到旁边，回去。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】去到旁边，回去。paṭikkamosāna(paṭikkama回去+osāna停止)﹐减缓。paṭikkamosānaṁ paṅṅāyati no abhikkamo(知道(病)减缓不前进(增加)？)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. paṭi+kram] going back Pv IV.1² (abhikkama+”going forward and backward”; cp. PvA.219). (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikkamana: {'def': '【中】回去，引退。 ~sālā, 【阴】休息室。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】回去，引退。paṭikkamanasālā,【阴】休息室。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṭikkamati] returning, retiring, going back Dh.I,95; in °sālā meaning “a hall with seats of distinction” SnA 53. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikkamati: {'def': '[paṭi+kram] to step backwards, to return (opp. abhi°) Vin.II,110, 208; M.I,78; S.I,200, 226; II,282; Sn.388 (ger. °kkamma=nivattitvā SnA 374); SnA 53. -- Caus. paṭikkamāpeti to cause to retreat J.I,214 Miln.121. -- pp. paṭikkanta (q. v.). (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi + kam + a), 向后行走，回去，到旁边去。【过】 ~kami。【现分】 ~manta。【独】 ~mitvā。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi+kam(梵kram)+a), 向后行走(to step backwards)，回去(to return)。【过】paṭikkami。【现分】paṭikkamanta。【独】paṭikkamitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭikkamma: {'def': '【独】到旁边去了。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【独】到旁边去。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭikkanta: {'def': '(paṭikkamati 的【过分】)已向后行走，已回去。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭikkamati 的【过分】)。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of paṭikkamati] gone back from (-°), returned (opp. abhi°) D.I,70 (abhikkanta+); A.II,104, 106 sq., 210; Pv IV.1⁴³ (cp. PvA.240); DA.I,183 (=nivattana); VvA.6 (opp. abhi°) PvA.11 (piṇḍapāta°), 16 (id.). For opp. of paṭikkanta in conn. with piṇḍāya see paviṭṭha. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikkantaka: {'def': '[fr. last] one who has come or is coming back DhA.I,307. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikkhati: {'def': '[paṭi+īkṣ] to look forward to, to expect Sn.697 (paṭikkhaṁ sic ppr.=āgamayanā SnA 490). (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikkhepa: {'def': '[fr. paṭi+kṣip] opposition, negation, contrary SnA 228 for “na”), 502; PvA.189 (°vacana the opp. expression). °to (Abl.) in opposition or contrast to PvA.24. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】拒绝，否认，异议，否定。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】拒绝(opposition)，否认(negation)，异议(contrary)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭikkhipati: {'def': '(paṭi+khip(梵ksip)抛+a), 否决(refused)，拒绝(rejected)，杜绝。【过】paṭikkhipi。【过分】paṭikkhitta。【独】paṭikhipitvā, paṭikkhippa。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+khipati] to reject, refuse, object to, oppose J.I,67; IV,105; Miln.195; DA.I,290; DhA.I,45; II,75; PvA.73, 114, 151, 214 (aor. °khipi=vāresi). --appaṭikkhippa (grd.) not to be rejected J.II,370. ‹-› Contrasted to samādiyati Vism.62, 64 & passim. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi + khip + a), 否决，拒绝，反对。【过】 ~khipi。【过分】~khitta。【独】 ~pitvā, ~khippa。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭikkhitta: {'def': '[pp. of paṭikkhipati] refused, rejected D.I,142; M.I,78, 93; A.I,296; II,206; J.II,436; Nett 161, 185 sq.; DhA.II,71. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikkosana: {'def': '(nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. paṭikkosati] protest Vin.I,321; II,102 (a°). (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikkosanā: {'def': '【阴】抗议。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】抗议。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭikkosati: {'def': '(paṭi+kus(梵kruw)大叫+a), 责备，拒绝，轻蔑，辱骂(to blame, reject, revile, scorn, =paṭibāhati DA.I,160)。【过】paṭikkosi。【过分】paṭikkuṭṭha。【独】paṭikkositvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+kruś] to blame, reject, revile, scorn Vin.I,115; II,93; M.III,29; D.I,53 (=paṭibāhati DA.I,160); S.IV,118 (+apavadati); Sn.878; Dh.164; J.IV,163; Miln.131, 256; DhA.III,194 (opp. abhinandati). -- pp. paṭikuṭṭha (q. v.). (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi + kus + a), 责备，拒绝，轻蔑，辱骂。【过】 ~kosi。【过分】 paṭikkuṭṭha。【独】 ~kositvā。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭikkūla: {'def': '【形】讨厌的，不愉快的，该反对的。paṭikkūlatā,【阴】不愿，讨厌。paṭikkūlasaññā,【阴】厌恶想(有不净的意识)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】讨厌的，不愉快的，该反对的。 ~tā, 【阴】不愿，讨厌。~saññā, 【阴】厌想（有不纯净的意识）。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+kūla] lit. against the slope; averse, objectionable, contrary, disagreeable Vin.I,58 (°kūla); D.III,112, 113; M.I,341 (dukkha°); S.IV,172 (id.); J.I,393; VvA.92 (K.); PvA.77; VbhA.250 sq. -- app° without objection, pleasant, agreeable Vv 53² (K.); Vism.70 (k). -- nt. °ṁ loathsomeness, impurity VvA.232. See also abstr. pāṭikkūlyatā (paṭi°).

--gāhitā as neg. a° “refraining from contradiction” (Dhs.trslⁿ) Pug.24 (k.); Dhs.1327 (k.). --manasikāra realisation of the impurity of the body DhA.II,87 (°kkula); VbhA.251. --saññā (āhāre) the consciousness of the impurity of material food D.III,289, 291; S.V,132; A.IV,49; adj. °saññin S.I,227; V,119, 317; A.III,169. (Page 393)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikopeti: {'def': '[paṭi+kopeti] to shake, disturb, break (fig.) J.V,173 (uposathaṁ). (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikoṭṭeti: {'def': '[paṭi+koṭṭeti as Caus. of kuṭati] to bend away, to make refrain from M.I,115; S.II,265 (cp. id. p. A.IV,47 with trs. °kuṭati & v. l. °kujjati which may be a legitimate variant). The T. prints pati°. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikubbara: {'def': '[paṭi+kubbara] the part of the carriage-pole nearest to the horse(?) A.IV,191. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikujjana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṭi+kubj] covering, in °phalaka covering board, seat KhA 62 (vacca-kuṭiyā). (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】遮盖物。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】遮盖物(covering)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭikujjati: {'def': '(paṭi + kuj + a), 俯身，遮没，倒转。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+kubj, see kujja & cp. patikuṭati] to bend over, in or against, to cover over, to enclose D.II,162; M.I,30; A.III,58. Caus. °eti J.I,50, 69. -- pp. paṭikujjita (q. v.). (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+kuj (梵kubj)+a), 俯身(to bend over)，遮没，倒转。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭikujjeti: {'def': '(paṭi+kuj +e), 遮没，倒转。【过】paṭikujjesi。【过分】paṭikujjita。【独】paṭikujetvā, paṭikujitvā, paṭikujjiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + kuj + e), 遮没，倒转。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~kujjita。【独】~jetvā, ~jitvā, ~kujjiya。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭikujjhati: {'def': '(paṭi + kudh + ya), 倒生气。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi+kudh生气+ya), 倒生气。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+krudh] to be angry in return S.I,162= Th.1, 442. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikujjita: {'def': '[pp. of paṭikujjeti] covered over, enclosed A.I,141; Th.1, 681; J.I,50, 69; V,266; Pv.I,10¹³ (=upari pidahita PvA.52); DhsA.349. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikulyatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. paṭikūla, perhaps better to write patikkulyatā] reluctance, loathsomeness M.I,30; A.V,64. Other forms are paṭikūlatā, pāṭikkūlyatā, & pāṭikulyā (q. v.). (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikuttaka: {'def': '[or uncertain etym.; paṭi+kuttaka?] a sort of bird J.VI,538. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikuṇika: {'def': '(adj.) [for °kuṭita?] bent, crooked PvA.123 (v. l. kuṇita & kuṇḍita). (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikuṇṭhita: {'def': '[cp. kuṇṭhita]=pariguṇṭhita (q. v.); covered, surrounded J.VI,89. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikuṭati: {'def': '[paṭi+kuṭ as in kuṭila, cp. kuc & paṭikujjati] to turn in or over, to bend, cramp or get cramped; fig. to shrink from, to refuse A.IV,47 sq. (v. l. °kujjati); Miln.297 (pati°; cp. Miln.trslⁿ II.156); Vism.347 (v. l. BB; T. °kuṭṭati); DhA.I,71; II,42. -- Caus. patikoṭṭeti (q. v.). -- pp. paṭikuṭita (q. v.). See also paṭilīyati. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikuṭita: {'def': '[pp. of paṭikuṭati] bent back, turned over (?) Vin.II,195 (reading uncertain, vv. ll. paṭikuṭṭiya & paṭikuṭiya). (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikuṭṭha: {'def': '【过分】已轻蔑，已诽谤，该受责备的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of paṭi+kruś, see paṭikkosati & cp. BSk. pratikruṣṭa poor Divy 500] scolded, scorned, defamed, blameworthy, miserable, vile Vin.I,317; PvA.268 (v. l. paṭikiliṭṭha); as neg. app° blameless, faultless S.III,71‹-› 73; A.IV,246; Kvu 141, 341. See also paṭikiṭṭha. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已轻蔑，已诽谤，该受责备的。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭikā: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. paṭikā dial. fr. paṭa cloth] a (white) woollen cloth (: uṇṇāmayo set’attharako DA.I,86) D.I,7; A.I,137, 181; III,50; IV,94, 231, 394; Dāvs.V,36. See also paṭiya. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikāra: {'def': '[paṭi+kṛ] counteraction, remedy, requital Sdhp.201, 498; usually neg. app° adj. not making good or which cannot be made good, which cannot be helped Vin.IV,218 (=anosārita p. 219); PvA.274 (maraṇa) Cp. foll. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikārika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. preceding] of the nature of an amendment; app° not making amends, not making good J.V,418. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭikūlatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. paṭikkūla] disgustiveness Vism.343 sq. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹paṭikkūla),【阴】嫌恶(disgustiveness Vism 343 sq.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭikūṭa: {'def': '(nt.) [paṭi+kūṭa¹] cheating in return J.II,183. (Page 392)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭilabhati: {'def': '﹐paṭilabbhati (paṭi+labh+a), 获得，接受，取得(to obtain, receive, get)。【过】paṭilalabhi。【现分】paṭilabhanta。【独】paṭilabhitvā, paṭilaladdhā。pret. 3rd pl. paccaladdhaṁsu(paccalatthaṁsu). aor. 1st sg. paṭilacchiṁ. Caus. paṭilābheti.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+labhati] to obtain, receive, get It.77; J.I,91; Nd² 427 (pariyesati p. paribhuñjati); Pug.57; VvA.115; PvA.6, 7, 16, 50, 60, 67 etc. -- pret. 3^rd pl. paccaladdhaṁsu S.I,48 (so v. l. & C. T. °latthaṁsu), expl^d by paṭilabhiṁsu cp. K. S. 319. -- aor. 1^st sg. paṭilacchiṁ J.V,71. -- Caus. paṭilābheti to cause to take or get, to rob J.V,76 (paṭilābhayanti naṁ “rob me of him”). (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi + labh + a), 获得，接受，取得。【过】 ~labhi。【现分】~bhanta。【独】 ~bhitvā, ~laddhā。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭiladdha: {'def': '(Paṭilabhati的【过分】) 获得，接受，取得。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of paṭilabhati] received, got, obtained PvA.15 (=laddha), 88. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭileṇeti: {'def': '[Sec. derⁿ fr. pp. paṭilīna in sense of Caus.; cp. Sk. °lāpayati of lī] to withdraw, to make keep away, not to touch S.II,265 (pati°, as at Miln.297 patilīyati). (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭilika: {'def': 'v. l. BB together with paṭalika for talika at J.III,80 (cp. A III 36?). (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭilobheti: {'def': '[paṭi+Caus. of lubh] to fill with desire, to entice J.V,96. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiloma: {'def': '【形】颠倒的，相对的，相反的。paṭilomapakkha,【阳】反对党，反对派。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】颠倒的，相对的，相反的。 ~pakkha, 【阳】反对党，反对派。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+loma] “against the hair,” in reverse order, opposite, contrary, backward; usually comb^d with anuloma i. e. forward & backward Vin.I,1; A.IV,448; etc (see paṭiccasamuppāda); J.II,307. --°pakkha opposition PvA.114 (cp. paṭipakkha). (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭilābha: {'def': '[fr. paṭi+labh] obtaining, receiving, taking up, acquisition, assumption, attainment D.I,195; M.I,50; A.II,93, 143; Ps.II,182, 189; Nd¹ 262; Dh.333; Pug.57; VvA.113; PvA.50, 73, 74. -- attabhāva° obtaining a reincarnation, coming into existence S.II,256; III,144; A.II,159, 188; III,122 sq. -- See also paribhoga. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】达到，取得，获得。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】达到，取得，获得。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭilīna: {'def': '[pp. of paṭilīyati] having withdrawn, keeping away S.I,48 (°nisabha “expert to eliminate”; reading pati°); with reading pati also; A.II,41; IV,449; Sn.810, 852; Nd¹ 130, 224 (rāgassa etc. pahīnattā patilīno). (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭilīyati 的【过分】),远离。A.4.38./II,41.︰Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno asmimāno pahīno hoti ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṁkato āyatiṁ anuppādadhammo. Evaṁ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu patilīno hoti.…Panuṇṇapaccekasacco, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ‘samavayasaṭṭhesano passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro patilīno’ti vuccatī”ti.(世间有比丘，断我慢，切断其根，如截断多罗树头，令灭亡，当来不生。诸比丘！比丘有如是远离(patilino)。…遣除各别之见取，正确舍弃一切爱，身行轻安，名为远离。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭilīyana: {'def': '【中】防范，倒退。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】防范，倒退。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭilīyati: {'def': '(paṭi + lī + ya), 倒退，远离。【过】 ~līyi。【过分】 paṭilīna。【独】~līyitvā。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi+lī执著+ya), 倒退，远离。【过】paṭilīyi。【过分】paṭilīna。【独】paṭilīyitvā。paṭilīnanisabha, 【阳】人中最好的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+līyati of lī] to withdraw, draw back, keep away from, not to stick to A.IV,47=Miln.297 (+paṭikuṭati paṭivaṭṭati; Miln.& id. p. at S.II,265 print pati°); Vism.347 (+paṭikuṭṭati pativaṭṭati). -- pp. paṭilīna; Caus. paṭileṇeti (q. v.). (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭimagga: {'def': '【阳】逆途，来路。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+magga, cp. similarly paṭipatha] the way against, a confronting road; °ṁ gacchati to go to meet somebody J.IV,133; VI,127. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】逆途，来路。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭimalla: {'def': '[paṭi+malla] a rival wrestler S.I,110; Nd¹ 172. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】对手，摔交对手。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi+malla),【阳】对手，摔交对手(a rival wrestler)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭimantaka: {'def': '[fr. paṭi+mant] one who speaks to or who is spoken to, i. e. (1) an interlocutor J.IV,18 (=paṭivacana-dayaka C.); -- (2) an amiable person (cp. Lat. affabilis=affable) M.I,386. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭimanteti: {'def': '[paṭi+manteti] to discuss in argument, to reply to, answer, refute; as pati° at Vin.II,1; D.I,93 (vacane), 94; Dh.I,263; J.VI,82, 294. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭimasati: {'def': '[paṭi+masati of mṛś, cp. paṭimaṁsa] to touch (at) D.I,106; Sn.p. 108 (anumasati+). -- Caus. paṭimāseti (q. v.). (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭimaṁsa: {'def': '(adj.) [for paṭimassa=Sk. *pratimṛśya, ger. of prati+mṛś, cp. in consonants haṁsa for harṣa etc.] as neg. app° not to be touched, untouched; faultless Vin.II,248 (acchidda+); A.V,79. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭimaṇḍita: {'def': '[pp. of paṭi+maṇḍ] decorated, adorned with J.I,8, 41, 509; PvA.3, 66, 211. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭinaṇḍeti 的【过分】), 已用…装饰，已由…组成。sabbābharaṇapaṭimaṇḍito, 盛装。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭinaṇḍeti 的【过分】), 已用…装饰，已由…组成。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭimokkha: {'def': '[fr. paṭi+muc] 1. a sort of remedy, purgative D.I,12 osadhīnaṁ p. expl^d at DA.I,98 as “khārâdīni datvā tad-anurūpo khaṇe gate tesaṁ apanayanaṁ.” Cp. Dial. 26. -- 2. binding, obligatory J.V,25 (saṅgaraṁ p. a binding promise). Cp. pāṭimokkha. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭimukha: {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+mukha] facing, opposite; nt. °ṁ adv. opposite SnA 399 (gacchati). (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭimukka: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of paṭimuñcati; cp. also paṭimutta & ummukka, see Geiger, P.Gr. § 197] fastened on, tied to, wound round, clothed in S.IV,91; M.I,383; It.56; Th.2, 500 (? v. l. paripuṇṇa, cp. ThA.290); J.I,384; VI,64; Miln.390; DhA.I,394 (sīse); VvA.167 (so read for °mukkha), 296. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Paṭimuñcati的【过分】), 已使披上，已扣紧在，已被用带(或绳子等)系住在。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭimutta: {'def': ' (& Paṭimuttaka) (adj.) [pp. of paṭimuñcati, cp. paṭimukka] in sup° well purified, cleansed, pure J.IV,18 (°kambu=paṭimutta-suvaṇṇ’ālaṅkāra C.); V,400; Pv IV.1³³ (°ka-suṭṭhu paṭimuttabhāṇin PvA.230). (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭimuñcati: {'def': '(paṭi+muc释放+ṁ-a), 穿上(衣服)，扣紧，绑。【过】paṭimuñci。【独】paṭimuñcitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+muc] 1. to fasten, to bind (in lit. as well as appl^d sense), to tie, put on Vin.I,46; S.I,24 (veraṁ °muñcati for °muccati!); J.I,384; II,22, 88, 197; IV, 380 (ger. °mucca, v. l. °muñca), 395; V,25 (attain), 49; VI,525; DhA.III,295. -- Pass. paṭimuccati to be fastened, aor. °mucci J.III,239; VI,176. -- 2. to attain, obtain, find J.IV,285=VI,148. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi + muc + ŋ-a), 穿上（衣服），扣紧，绑。【过】 ~muñci。【独】 ~citvā。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭimā: {'def': '【阴】图像，图形。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹paṭi+mā),【阴】图像，图形。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. paṭi+mā] counterpart, image, figure J.VI,125; Dāvs.V,27; VvA.168 (=bimba); DhsA.334. --appaṭima (adj.) without a counterpart, matchless, incomparable Th.1, 614; Miln.239. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭimāneti: {'def': '[paṭi+Caus. of man] to wait on, or wait for, look after, honour, serve Vin.II,169; IV,112; D.I,106; J.IV,2, 203; V,314; Miln.8; PvA.12; DA.I,280. -- pp. paṭimānita (q. v.). (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi + mān + e), 尊敬，等待。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~mānita。【独】 ~netvā。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi+mān+e), 尊敬，等待。【过】paṭimānesi。【过分】paṭimānānita。【独】paṭimānetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭimānita: {'def': '[pp. of paṭimāneti] honoured, revered, served PvA.18. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭimāreti: {'def': '(paṭi+caus. of mr), 怒杀(to kill in revenge)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+Caus. of mṛ] to kill in revenge J.III,135. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭimāseti: {'def': '[Caus. of patimasati] to hold on to, to restrain, keep under control; imper. paṭimāse (for °māsaya) Dh.379 (opp. codaya; expl^d by °parivīmaṁse “watch” DhA.IV,117). (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭinandanā: {'def': '【阴】高兴。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】高兴。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭinandati: {'def': '[paṭi+nandati] to accept gladly, to greet in return S.I,189. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi + nand + a), 很高兴，高兴地接受。【过】 ~nandi。【过分】 ~dita。【独】 ~ditvā。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi+nand欢喜+a), 很高兴，高兴地接受。【过】paṭinandi。【过分】paṭinandita。【独】paṭinanditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭinandita: {'def': '[pp. of paṭi+nand] rejoicing or rejoiced; greeted, welcomed Sn.452 (pati°); J.VI,14, 412. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭineti: {'def': '(paṭi + ni + a), 引回去。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~nīta。【独】 ~netvā。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+neti] to lead back to (Acc.) Vv 52¹⁷; Th.2, 419; Pv.II,12²¹ (imper. °nayāhi); PvA.145, 160. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+nī +a), 引回去。【过】paṭinesi。【过分】paṭinīta。【独】paṭinetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭiniddesa: {'def': '[paṭi+niddesa] coming back upon a subject Nett 5. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭinijjhatta: {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+nijjhatta] appeased again J.VI,414. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭinissagga: {'def': '【阳】放弃，拒绝，丢弃。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】放弃，丢弃，对之无执著，舍遣，定弃。《清净道论大疏》(Vism-mhṭ﹐CS:p.1.79)：「对诸行转起对之无执著的随观，称为‘对之无执著’。」(Saṅkhārānaṁ paṭinissajjanākārena pavattā anupassanā paṭinissaggānupassanā.)(Vism-mhṭ﹐CS:p.2.442)：「对之无执著：遍舍、跳出，两种对之无执著。」(Paṭinissaggasaddo pariccāgattho, pakkhandanattho cāti paṭinissaggassa duvidhatā vuttā.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+nissagga of nissajjati, nis+sṛj, Cp. BSk. pratinisarga AvŚ II.118, pratiniḥsarga ib. II.194; MVastu II.549; pratinissagga MVastu III,314, 322] giving up, forsaking; rejection, renunciation Vin.III,173; M.III,31; S.V,421 sq.; A.I,100, 299; IV,148, 350; Ps.I,194 (two p., viz. pariccāga° and pakkhandana°); Pug.19, 21, 22. -- ādāna° S.V,24; A.V,233, 253 sq.; upadhi° It.46, 62; sabbûpadhi° S.I,136; III,133; V,226; A.I,49; V,8, 110, 320 sq.; °ânupassanā Ps.II,44 sq.; °ânupassin M.III,83; S.IV,211; V,329; A.IV,88, 146 sq.; V,112, 359. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭinissaggin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paṭinissagga] giving up, renouncing, or being given up, to be renounced, only in cpd. duppaṭi° (sup°) hard (easy) to renounce D.III,45; M.I,96; A.III,335; V,150. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭinissajjati: {'def': '[paṭi+nissajjati, cp. BSk. pratinisṛjati AvŚ II.190] to give up, renounce, forsake Vin.III,173 sq.; IV,294; S.II,110; A.V,191 sq. -- ger. paṭinissajja S.I,179; A.IV,374 sq.; Sn.745, 946 (cp. Nd¹ 430). -- pp. paṭinissaṭṭha (q. v.). (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+ni+saj+ya), 放弃，弃绝，抛弃( to give up, renounce, forsake)。【过】paṭinissajji。【过分】paṭinissaṭṭha。【独】paṭinissajitvā, paṭinissajjiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + ni + saj + ya), 放弃，弃绝，抛弃。【过】 ~jji。【过分】~nissaṭṭha。【独】 ~jitvā, ~jjiya。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭinissarati: {'def': '[paṭi+nissarati] to depart, escape from, to be freed from Nett 113 (=niyyāti vimuccati C.). (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭinissaṭṭha: {'def': '[pp. of paṭinissajjati, BSk. pratiniḥsṛṣṭa Divy 44 and °nisṛṣṭa Divy 275] given up, forsaken (act. & pass.), renouncing or having renounced Vin.III,95; IV,27, 137; M.I,37; S.II,283; A.II,41; It.49; Nd¹ 430, 431 (vanta pahīna p.); PvA.256. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭinivatta: {'def': '(paṭinivattati的【过分】), 已回返，已回来。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭinivattati: {'def': '(paṭi+ni+vat+a), 再折回。【过】paṭinivatti。【独】paṭinivattitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + ni + vat + a), 再折回。【过】 ~tti。【独】 ~titvā。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+nivattati] to turn back again Vin.I,216; J.I,225; Miln.120, 152 (of disease), 246; PvA.100, 126. -- Caus. °nivatteti to make turn back PvA.141; C. on A.III,28 (see paccāsāreti). (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭinivāsana: {'def': '(nt.) [paṭi+nivāsana¹] a dress given in return Vin.I,46=II.223. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭināsikā: {'def': '【阴】假鼻。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [paṭi+nāsikā] a false nose J.I,455, 457. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】假鼻。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭipadā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. paṭi+pad] means of reaching a goal or destination, path, way, means, method, mode of progress (cp. Dhs. trslⁿ 53, 82, 92, 143), course, practice (cp. BSk. pratipad in meaning of pratipatti “line of conduct” AvŚ II.140 with note) D.I,54 (dvatti p.), 249 (way to); S.II,81 (nirodhasāruppa-gāminī p.); IV,251 (bhaddikā), 330 (majjhimā) V,304 (sabbattha-gāminī), 361 (udaya-gāminī sotāpatti°), 421; D.III,288 (ñāṇadassana-visuddhi°); A.I,113, 168 (puñña°) II.76, 79, 152 (akkhamā); Vbh.99, 104 sq., 211 sq., 229 sq., 331 sq. -- In pregnant sense The path (of the Buddha), leading to the destruction of all ill & to the bliss of Nibbāna (see specified under magga, ariyamagga, sacca), thus a quâsi synonym of magga with which freq. comb^d (e.g. D.I,156) Vin.I,10; D.I,157; III,219 (anuttariya); M.II,11; III,251, 284; S.I,24 (daḷhā yāya dhīrā pamuccanti); A.I,295 sq. (āgālhā nijjhāmā majjhimā); Sn.714 (cp. SnA 497), 921; Ps.II,147 (majjhimā); Nett 95 sq.; Pug.15, 68; VvA.84 (°saṅkhāta ariyamagga). Specified in various ways as follows: āsava-nirodha-gāminī p. D.I,84; dukkha-nirodha-g°. D.I,84, 189; III,136; S.V,426 sq.; A.I,177; Ps.I,86, 119; Dhs.1057; lokanirodha-g° A.II,23; It.121; with the epithets sammā° anuloma° apaccanīka° anvattha° dhammânudhamma° Nd¹ 32, 143, 365; Nd² 384 etc. (see detail under sammā°). -- There are several groups of 4 paṭipadā mentioned, viz. (a) dukkhā dandhâbhiññā, sukhā & khippâbhiññā dandh° & khipp°, i. e. painful practice resulting in knowledge slowly acquired & quickly acquired, pleasant practice resulting in the same way D.III,106; A.II,149 sq., 154; V,63; SnA 497; (b) akkhamā, khamā, damā & samā p. i. e. want of endurance, endurance, self-control, equanimity. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】行道（行为的线路），进行的方式。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】行道(行为的线路)，进行的方式。A.4.161-162.说四种行(catasso paṭipadā)：Dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā(苦迟通行=贪瞋痴炽盛，五根弱，证道迟), dukkhā paṭipadā khippābhiññā(苦速通行=贪瞋痴炽盛，五根强，证道速), sukhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā(乐迟通行=贪瞋痴不炽盛，五根弱，证道迟), sukhā paṭipadā khippābhiññā(乐速通行=贪瞋痴不炽盛，五根强，证道速)。A.4.164.另说四种行：akkhamā paṭipadā(不堪忍行=以骂报骂等), khamā paṭipadā(堪忍行=不以骂报骂等), damā paṭipadā(调伏行=护诸根，眼见色不取於相), samā paṭipadā(寂静行=不容纳已生之欲寻，断之、除之、息之、远之、令灭亡)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭipaharati: {'def': '[paṭi+paharati] to strike in return DhA.I,51. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi + pa + har + a), 回击。【过】 ~hari。【过分】 ~pahaṭa。【独】 ~ritvā。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi相反+pa+har拿+a), 回击。【过】paṭipahari。【过分】paṭipahaṭa。【独】paṭiparitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭipahiṇati: {'def': '[paṭi+pahinati] to send back (in return) DhA.I,216. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭipahiṇāti: {'def': '(paṭi + pa + hi + ṇā), 送回。【过】 ~hiṇi。【过分】 ~pahita。【独】 ~hiṇitvā。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi+pa+hi+ṇā), 送回。【过】paṭipahiṇi。【过分】paṭipahita。【独】paṭipahiṇitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭipajjana: {'def': '【中】过程，练习，遵守。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṭipajjati] a way or plan to be followed, procedure, in °vidhi method, line of action PvA.131 (v. l. BB), 133. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】程序，练习，遵守。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭipajjati: {'def': '[paṭi+pad, cp. BSk. pratipadyate] to enter upon (a path), to go along, follow out (a way or plan), to go by; fig. to take a line of action, to follow a method, to be intent on, to regulate one’s life D.I,70 (saṁvarāya). 175 (tathattāya); S.II,98 (kantāramaggaṁ); IV,63 (dhammass’anudhammaṁ); V,346 (id.); IV,194 (maggaṁ); A.I,36 (dhammânudhammaṁ); II,4; Sn.317, 323, 706, 815, 1129 (cp. Nd² 384); Dh.274 (maggaṁ); Pug.20 (saṁvarāya); PvA.43 (maggaṁ), 44 (ummaggaṁ), 196 (dhanaṁ); Sdhp.30. -- 3rd sg. aor. paccāpādi J.IV,314. -- ger. pajjitabba to be followed PvA.126 (vidhi), 131 (id.), 281. -- pp. paṭipanna (q. v.). -- Caus. paṭipādeti (q. v.). (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi + pad + ya), 上路，起程，前进，跟随一个方法。【过】 ~jji。【过分】 ~panna。【现分】 ~pajjamāna。【独】 ~jitvā。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi+pad去+ya), 迈向，上路，启程，前进，跟随一个方法。【过】paṭipajji。【过分】paṭipanna。【现分】paṭipajjamāna, paṭipajjanta。【独】paṭipajitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭipakkha: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [paṭi+pakkha] opposed, opposite; (m.) an enemy, opponent (cp. pratipakṣa obstacle Divy 352) Nd¹ 397; J.I,4, 224; Nett 3, 112, 124; Vism.4; DhA.I,92; SnA 12, 21, 65, 168, 234, 257, 545; PvA.98; DhsA.164; Sdhp.211, 452. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+pakkha),【形】对治的，反对的，相反的(opposed, opposite)。【阳】敌人，对手(an enemy, opponent)。paṭipakhika, 有敌意的，对立党派的。《清净道论》(Vism.141)：Tathā hi samādhi kāmacchandassa paṭipakkho, pīti byāpādassa, vitakko thinamiddhassa, sukhaṁ uddhaccakukkuccassa, vicāro vicikicchāyāti peṭake vuttaṁ.(《彼多迦》(Peṭaka)中说：三昧对治慾欲，喜对治瞋恚，寻对治惛沉睡眠，乐对治掉举恶作，伺对治疑。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】反对的，相反的。【阳】敌人，对手。 ~khika, 有敌意的，属于对立党派的。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭipakkhika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paṭipakkha] opposed, inimical Sdhp.216. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭipanna: {'def': '(patipajjati 的【过分】)。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of paṭipajjati] (having) followed or following up, reaching, going along or by (i. e. practising), entering on, obtaining S.II,69; IV,252; A.I,120 (arahattāya); IV,292 sq. (id.), 372 sq.; It.81 (dhammânudhamma°); Sn.736; Dh.275 (maggaṁ); Vv 34²³ (=maggaṭṭha one who has entered the path VvA.154)=Pv IV.3⁴⁹; Pug.63; Miln.17; DA.I,26; PvA.78, 112 (maggaṁ), 130, 174 (sammā°), 242; (dhammiyaṁ paṭipadaṁ); DhA.I,233 (magga° on the road, wandering). (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(patipajjati 的【过分】) 已回击。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭipannaka: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. paṭipanna] one who has entered upon the Path (ariyamagga) Pug.13 (=maggaṭṭhaka, phalatthāya paṭipannattā p. nāma PugA 186); Miln.342, 344; Nett 50; DhsA.164. See also Miln.trsl. II.231, 237. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiparivatteti: {'def': '[paṭi+p.] to turn back or round once more M.I,133. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭipasaṁsati: {'def': '[paṭi+pasaṁsati] to praise back or in return J.II,439. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭipassambhanā: {'def': '(f.) & Paṭipassambhitatta (nt.) are exegetical (philosophical) synonyms of paṭippassaddhi at Dhs.40, 41, 320. (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭipassambhitatta: {'def': '【中】使回到轻安状态。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭipatha: {'def': '[paṭi+patha] a confronting road, opposite way Vin.II,193 (°ṁ gacchati to go to meet); III,131; IV,268; Miln.9; Vism.92; DhA.II,88. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】相反方向，前方。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】相反方向，前方。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭipatti: {'def': '行道、修行方式。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. paṭi+pad] “way,” method, conduct, practice, performance, behaviour, example A.I,69; V,126 (dhammânudhamma°), 136; Ps.II,15; Nd¹ 143; Nd² s. v.; Miln.131, 242; DhA.II,30; DhA.IV,34 (sammā° good or proper behaviour); PvA.16 (parahita°), 54, 67; DA.I,270; Sdhp.28, 29, 37, 40, 213, 521. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】操行，练习，行为，修行。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】操行，练习，行为，修行。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭipavisati: {'def': '[paṭi+pavisati] to go in(to) again; Caus. °paveseti to make go in again, to put back (inside) again Vin.I,276. -- pp. paṭipaviṭṭha (q. v.). (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭipaviṭṭha: {'def': '[pp. of paṭipavisati] gone inside again Sn.979. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭipaṇāmeti: {'def': '[paṭi+pa+Caus. of nam] to make turn back, to send back, ward off, chase away M.I,327 (siriṁ); S.IV,152 (ābādhaṁ); Miln.17 (sakaṭāni). (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭipaṇṇa: {'def': '【中】复信。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [paṭi+paṇṇa] a letter in return, a written reply J.I,409. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】回复信。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭipeseti: {'def': '[paṭi+peseti] to send out to PvA.20. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+pes +e), 送回，送出去。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + pes + e), 送回，送出去。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭipiṁsati: {'def': '[paṭi+piṁsati] to beat against S.II,98 (ure); J.VI,87; Vism.504 (urāni). (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭipiṇḍa: {'def': '[paṭi+piṇḍa] alms in return J.II,307; V,390 (piṇḍa° giving & taking of alms); Miln.370. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭippassaddha: {'def': '(paṭippassambhati 的【过分】)。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹ paṭi 对+ sambh(梵wrambh)使平静、平息；sambh at Dhtp 214 in meaning “vissāsa”信赖), (paṭippassambhati 的【过分】)。回到轻安。Paṭippassaddhi (‹paṭippassaddha回到轻安(【过分】),【阴】回到轻安。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of paṭippassambhati] allayed, calmed, quieted, subsided S.IV,217, 294; V,272; A.I,254; II,41; J.III,37, 148; IV,430; Ps.II,2; Pug.27; KhA 185; PvA.23, 245, 274. Note. The BSk. form is pratiprasrabdha Divy 265. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭippassaddhi: {'def': '(f.) [fr. paṭippassaddha] subsidence, calming, allaying, quieting down, repose, complete ease Vin.I,331 (kammassa suppression of an act); Ps.II,3, 71, 180; Nett 89; Dhs.40, 41, 320; SnA 9. Esp. frequent in the Niddesas in stock phrase expressing the complete calm attained to in emancipation, viz. vūpasama paṭinissagga p. amata nibbāna, e. g. Nd² 429. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹paṭippassaddha),【阴】subsidence, calming, allaying, quieting down, repose, complete ease。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】平静，镇静，静寂，完全的安逸。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭippassambhanā: {'def': '【阴】回到轻安。参考 paṭippassaddhi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】参考 paṭippassaddhi。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭippassambhati: {'def': '[paṭi+ppa+sambhati of śrambh. Note however that the BSk. is °praśrambhyati as well as °srambhyati, e. g. MVastu I.253, 254; Divy 68, 138, 494, 549, 568] to subside, to be eased, calmed, or abated, to pass away, to be allayed S.I,211; V,51; aor. °ssambhi DhA.II,86 (dohaḷo); IV,133 (ābādho). -- pp. paṭippassaddha (q. v.). -- Caus. paṭippassambheti to quiet down, hush up, suppress, bring to a standstill, put to rest, appease Vin.I,49 (kammaṁ), 144 (id.), 331 (id.); II,5 (id.), 226 (id.); M.I,76; J.III,28 (dohaḷaṁ). (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi回+pa+sambh+a), 回到轻安。【过】paṭippassambhi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + pa + sambh + a), 被放松，被平静，被镇静。【过】~mbhi。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭippaṇāmeti: {'def': '[paṭi+paṇāmeti] to bend (back), stretch out DhsA.324. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭippharati: {'def': '[paṭi+pharati] to effulge, shine forth, stream out, emit, fig. splurt out, bring against, object M.I,95 sq.; A.IV,193 (codakaṁ); J.I,123, 163; Nd¹ 196 (vādaṁ start a word-fight); Miln.372; DhA.IV,4 (vacanaṁ). (Page 397)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+sphur)﹐反对，敌对。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭipucchati: {'def': '[paṭi+pucchati] to ask (in return), to put a question to, to inquire D.I,60; M.I,27; S.III,2; Sn.p. 92; J.I,170; IV,194; PvA.32, 56, 81; A.I,197; II,46; also neg. appaṭipucchā (Abl. adv.) without inquiry Vin.I,325. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi + pucch + a), 反问，发问。【过】 ~cchi。【过分】 ~cchita。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi+pucch询问+a), 反问(反诘)，深究。【过】paṭipucchi。【过分】paṭipucchita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭipucchā: {'def': '【阴】反问的问题。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [paṭi+pucchā] a question in return, inquiry; only °- (as Abl.) by question, by inquiry, by means of question & answer in foll. cpds.: °karaṇīya Vin.I,325; °vinīta A.I,72; °vyākaraṇīya (pañha) D.III,229. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】反问的问题。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭipuggala: {'def': '[paṭi+puggala] a person equal to another, compeer, match, rival M.I,171=Miln.235; S.I,158; Sn.544; It.123 (natthi te paṭipuggala). -- appaṭipuggala without a rival, unrivalled, without compare S.I,158; III,86; Th.2, 185; J.I,40; Miln.239 (cp. Miln.trsl. II.43). (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】对手，伙伴，匹配。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】对手，夥伴，匹配。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭipuggalika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paṭipuggala] belonging to one’s equal, individual Dhs.1044. Perhaps read pāṭi° (q. v.). (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭipurisa: {'def': '[paṭi+purisa] a rival, opponent Nd¹ 172. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭipādaka: {'def': '【阳】 1. 安排者，提供者。 2. 床的支架。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. paṭi+pad] the supporter (of a bed) Vin.I,48; II,208. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】1.安排者，提供者。2.床的支架。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭipādeti: {'def': '(paṭi + pad + e), 带进，安排，提供。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~dita。【独】 ~detvā。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of paṭipajjati, cp. BSk. pratipādayati in same meaning AvŚ I.262, 315] to impart, bring into, give to, offer, present M.I,339; J.V,453, 497; Pv.II,8¹ (vittaṁ). (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+pad去+e), 带进，安排，提供。【过】paṭipādesi。【过分】paṭipādita。【独】paṭipādetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭipākatika: {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+pākatika] restored, set right again, safe and sound J.III,167 (=pākatika at PvA.66); IV,407; VI,372; PvA.123, 284. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭipāṭi: {'def': '【阴】次序，一连串的人或事。 ~pāṭiyā, 【副】井然有序地，连续地，一个接一个地。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】次序，一连串的人或事。paṭipāṭiyā,【副】井然有序地，连续地，一个接一个地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [paṭi+pāṭi] order, succession Vin.I,248 (bhatta°); Vism.411 (khandha°); usually in Abl. paṭipāṭiyā adv. successively, in succession, alongside of, in order Vism.343 = J.V,253 (ghara° from house to house); ThA.80 (magga°); DhA.I,156; II,89; III,361; SnA 23, 506; PvA.54; VvA.76, 137. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭipāṭika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. last] being in conformity with the (right) order ThA.41. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭipīta: {'def': 'in asuci° at A.III,226 is not clear (v. l. °pīḷita perhaps to be preferred). (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭipīḷana: {'def': '【中】压抑。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṭipīḷeti] oppression Miln.313, 352. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹paṭipīḷeti),【中】拥抱、压抑、压迫(oppression)。DhA.v.278.CS:pg.2.256.︰dukkhāti paṭipīḷanaṭṭhena dukkhā.(苦︰即以压迫之义称为苦。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭipīḷeti: {'def': '(paṭi + pīḷ + e), 压迫。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~ḷita。【独】 ~ḷetvā。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi+pīḷ虐待+e), 压迫。【过】paṭiīḷesi。【过分】paṭipīḷita。【独】paṭipīḷetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭipīḷita: {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+pp. of pīḍ] pressed against, oppressed, hard pressed Miln.262, 354. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭipūjana: {'def': '(nt.) or °ā (f.) [fr. paṭi+pūj] worship, reverence, honour Miln.241. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭipūjanā: {'def': '【阴】尊敬，敬意。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】尊敬，敬意。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭipūjeti: {'def': '[paṭi+pūjeti] to honour, worship, revere Sn.128; Pv.I,1³; Miln.241. (Page 396)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi + pūj + e), 尊敬，崇敬。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~jita。【独】~jetvā。(p194)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi+pūj礼拜+e), 尊敬，崇敬。【过】paṭipūjesi。【过分】paṭipūjita。【独】paṭipūjetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭirava: {'def': '[paṭi+rava] shouting out, roar Dāvs.IV,52. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭirodana: {'def': '(nt.) [paṭi+rodana] replying through crying J.III,80. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭirodati: {'def': '[paṭi+rodati of rud] to cry in return, to reply by crying J.III,80; pp. paṭirodita=paṭirodana. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭirodeti: {'def': '[paṭi+Caus. of rud] to scold back S.I,162. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭirosati: {'def': '[paṭi+rosati] to annoy in return, to tease back S.I,162; A.II,215; Nd¹ 397. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiruddha: {'def': '[pp. paṭi+rudh] obstructed, hindered, held back, caged J.IV,4 (oruddha-paṭiruddha sic.). (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭirāja: {'def': '【阳】怀敌意的国王。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】怀敌意的国王。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭirājā: {'def': '[paṭi+rājā] hostile king, royal adversary J.VI,472; DhA.I,193. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭirūpa: {'def': 'patirūpa, 【形】适合的，适当的。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'patirūpa,【形】适合的，适当的。patirūpadesavāsa﹐住处应适宜。patirūpadesavāso nāma yattha catasso parisā vicaranti, dānādīni puññakiriyavatthūni vattanti, navaṅgaṁ satthu sāsanaṁ dibbati, tattha nivāso sattānaṁ puññakiriyāya paccayattā maṅgalanti vuccati.(住处应适宜：无论何处有四众(比丘、比丘尼、优婆塞、优婆夷)走动，可做布施等功德处，有「九分教」的辉煌，说该处居民有作福因缘说为吉祥。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+rūpa] fit, proper, suitable, befitting, seeming D.I,91; Vin.II,166 (seyyā); M.I,123; S.I,214; II,194 (ap°); Th.2, 341; Pv.II,12¹⁵; J.V,99; Pug.27; DhA.III,142; PvA.26, 122 (=yutta), 124. --°desavāsa living in a suitable region D.III,276=A.II,32; Nett 29, 50. -- Spelt pati° at Dh.158; Sn.89, 187, 667; SnA 390. Cp. pāṭirūpika. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭirūpaka: {'def': 'patirūpaka, 【形】相似的，假扮成的，看起来象的。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. paṭirūpa] like, resembling, disguised as, in the appearance of, having the form of S.I,230; DhA.I,29 (putta°); PvA.15 (samaṇa°). As pati° at SnA 302, 348, 390. -- nt. an optical delusion DhA.III,56. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'patirūpaka,【形】相似的，假扮成的，看起来像的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭirūpatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. paṭirūpa] likeness, semblance, appearance, pretence PvA.268 (=vaṇṇa). (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】外观，相似物，适切性。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】外观，相似物，适切性。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭisakkati: {'def': '[paṭi+sakkati] to run back Vin.II,195; A.IV,190. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisalliyati: {'def': '(°līyati) [fr. paṭi+saṁ+ lī, cp. paṭilīyati] to be in seclusion (for the purpose of meditation) Vin.III,39 (inf. °salliyituṁ); D.II,237; S.V,12 (id.), 320, 325; Miln.139. -- pp. paṭisallīna (q. v.). (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisallāna: {'def': '(paṭi+saṁ+lī执著),【中】隐居禅修(retirement for the purpose of meditation)，隐居(seclusion)，宴默，孤独(Paṭisallānāti ekībhāvā.(S.A.CS:p.2.275))，果定(Paṭisallānāti phalasamāpattito.(S.A.CS:p.3.18))，身远离(paṭisallānanti kāyavivekaṁ (S.A.CS:p.3.31) ) paṭisāruppa,【形】适当隐居的。(Paṭisallānasāruppānīti nilīyanasāruppāni.(S.A.CS:p.3.13))', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】退休，隐居。 ~sāruppa, 【形】适当隐居的。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(& °āṇa, e. g. S.V,320) (nt.) [for *paṭisallayana, fr. paṭi+saṁ+ lī, cp. paṭilīna & paṭilīyati, also BSk. pratisaṁlayana Divy 156, 194, 494] retirement for the purpose of meditation, solitude, privacy, seclusion D.III,252; M.I,526; S.I,77; III,15; IV,80, 144; V,12, 398, 414; A.II,51, 176; III,86 sq., 116 sq., 195; IV,15, 36, 88; V,166, 168; Sn.69 (cp. Nd² s. v.); J.II,77 (pati°); Vbh.244, 252; Miln.138, 412.

--ārāma fond(ness) of solitude or seclusion (also °rata) A.III,261 sq.; It.39; Nd² 433. --sāruppa very suitable for seclusion Vism.90. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisallīna: {'def': '[pp. of paṭisalliyati; cp. BSk. pratisaṁlīna Divy 196, 291.] secluded, retired, gone into solitude, abstracted, plunged in meditation, separated Vin.I,101 (rahogata+); D.I,134, 151; S.I,71, 146 sq. (divāvihāragata+), 225; II,74 (rahogata+); IV,80, 90, 144; V,415; A.II,20; SnA 346 (pati°); J.I,349; Miln.10, 138 sq.; VvA.3; DA.I,309 (pati°). (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisallīyati: {'def': '(paṭi+saṁ+lī执著+ya), 退隐(to be in seclusion)。【过】paṭisallīyi。【过分】paṭisallīna。【独】paṭisallīyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + saŋ + lī + ya), 退隐，隐居。【过】 ~līyi。【过分】 ~līna。【独】 ~līyitvā。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭisama: {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+sama] equal, forming, a counterpart Miln.205 (rāja°); neg. appaṭisama not having one’s equal, incomparable J.I,94; Miln.331. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisambhidā: {'def': '(f.) [paṭi+saṁ+bhid; the BSk. pratisaṁvid is a new formation resting on confusion between bhid & vid, favoured by use & meaning of latter root in P. paṭisaṁvidita. In BSk. we find pratisaṁvid in same application as in P., viz. as fourfold artha° dharma° nirukti° pratibhāna° (?). MVastu III,321] lit. “resolving continuous breaking up,” i. e. analysis, analytic insight, discriminating knowledge. See full discussion & explⁿ of term at Kvu trslⁿ 377--382. Always referred to as “the four branches of logical analysis” (catasso or catupaṭisambhidā), viz. attha° analysis of meanings “in extension”; dhamma° of reasons, conditions, or causal relations; nirutti° of [meanings “in intension” as given in] definitions paṭibhāna° or intellect to which things knowable by the foregoing processes are presented (after Kvu trslⁿ). In detail at A.II,160; III,113. 120; Ps.I,88, 119; II,150, 157, 185, 193; Vbh.293--305; VbhA.386 sq. (cp. Vism.440 sq.), 391 sq. -- See further A.I,22; IV,31; Nd² 386 under paṭibhānavant; Ps.I,84. 132, 134; II,32, 56, 116, 189; Miln.22 (attha-dh°nirutti-paṭibhāna-pāramippatta), 359; VvA.2; DhA.IV,70 (catūsu p-° āsu cheka). p°-patta one who has attained mastership in analysis A.I,24; III,120; Ps.II,202. -- Often included in the attainment of Arahant‹-› ship, in formula “saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṁ pāpunāti,” viz. Miln.18; DhA.II,58, 78, 93. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹bhid破,梵 pratisaṁvid),【阴】无碍解，分析的洞察力，识别的知识。Paṭisambhidāmagga, 《无碍解道》。catasso paṭisambhidā, 四无碍解。四无碍解，即义无碍解智(attha-paṭisambhidā)：对苦谛的无碍解智。法无碍解智(dhamma-paṭisambhidā)：对集谛的无碍解智。辞无碍解智(nirutti-paṭisambhidā)：对苦谛法与集谛法的语词及文法使用上的无碍解智。应辩无碍解智(paṭibhāna-paṭisambhidā)：对上述三种无碍解智的无碍解智。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】无碍解，分析的洞察力，识别的知识。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭisambhidā-magga: {'def': 'm. 無礙解道 [小部經之一].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'm. 無碍解道 [小部経の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Paṭisammajjati: {'def': '[paṭi+sammajjati] to sweep over again Miln.15. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisammodati: {'def': '(paṭi+sam+mud +a), 友善地交谈，友善地欢迎。【过】paṭisammodi。【过分】paṭisammodita。【独】paṭisammoditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + sam + mud + a), 友善地交谈，友善地欢迎。【过】~modi。【过分】 ~modita。【独】 ~ditvā。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭisammodeti: {'def': '[paṭi+saṁ+Caus. of mud] to greet friendly in return J.VI,224 (=sammodanīya-kathāya paṭikatheti C.). (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisandahati: {'def': '(paṭi+saṁ+dah放置+a), 重聚。【过】paṭisandahi。【过分】paṭisandhita 或 paṭisandahita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+sandahati] to undergo reunion (see next) Miln.32. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi + saŋ + dah + a), 重聚。【过】 ~dahi。【过分】 ~sandhita或 ~sandahita。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭisandhi: {'def': '【阴】结生，再投胎，怀孕，团圆。(Vibhv.CS:p.125)：Bhavato bhavassa paṭisandhānaṁ paṭisandhikiccaṁ.(从(前一生的)‘存在’(有)，成为存在的结生，为‘结生的作用’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. paṭi+saṁ+dhā] reunion (of vital principle with a body), reincarnation, metempsychosis Ps.I,11 sq., 52, 59 sq.; II,72 sq.; Nett 79, 80; Miln.140; DhA.II,85; VvA.53; PvA.8, 79, 136, 168. A detailed discussion of p. is to be found at VbhA.155--160. -- appaṭisandhika see sep. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】再投胎，怀孕，团圆。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭisandhicitta: {'def': '﹐【中】结生心，投生的(第一个)心识(三界中有十九种结生心paṭisandhicittāni ekūnavīsati)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭisandhāna: {'def': '【中】团圆。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】结生，团圆。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭisandhātu: {'def': '【阳】重聚者，调解者，和事佬。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】重聚者，调解者，和事佬。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭisantharati: {'def': '[paṭi+saṁ+tharati of stṛ] to receive kindly, to welcome, Miln.409; DhsA.397Q ger. °santhāya J.VI,351. -- pp. paṭisanthata (q. v.). (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+saṁ+tharati ‹str散播), 编造，关心。ger. paṭisanthāya. pp. paṭisanthata.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭisanthata: {'def': '[pp. of paṭisantharati] kindly received (covered, concealed? C.) J.VI,23 (=paṭicchāditaṁ guttaṁ paripuṇṇaṁ vā C.). (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisanthāra: {'def': '【阳】欢迎，宽待。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】欢迎，宽待。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. paṭi+saṁ+stṛ] lit. spreading before, i. e. friendly welcome, kind reception, honour, goodwill, favour, friendship D.III,213, 244; A.I,93; III,303 sq.; IV,28, 120; V,166, 168 (°aka adj. one who welcomes); J.II,57; Dh.376 (expl^d as āmisa° and dhamma° at DhA.IV,111, see also DhsA.397 sq. & Dhs.trsl. 350); Dhs.1344; Vbh.360; Miln.409. paṭisanthāraṁ karoti to make friends, to receive friendly PvA.12, 44, 141, 187. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisarati: {'def': '² [paṭi+smṛ] to think back upon, to mention DA.I,267. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [paṭi+sṛ] to run back, stay back, lag behind Sn.8 sq. (opp. atisarati; aor. paccasāri expl^d by ohiyyi SnA 21). (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisaraṇa: {'def': '【中】庇护所，帮忙，保护。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】庇护所，帮忙，保护。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [paṭi+saraṇa¹] refuge in (-°), shelter, help, protection M.I,295 (mano as p. of the other 5 senses); III,9; S.IV,221; V,218; A.I,199 (Bhagavaṁ°); II,148 (sa° able to be restored); III,186 (kamma°); IV,158, 351; V,355; J.I,213; VI,398. -- appaṭisaraṇa (adj.) without shelter, unprotected Vin.II,153 (so read for appaṭiss°). -- Note. In meaning “restoration” the derivation is prob. fr paṭi+sṛ to move (Sk. saraṇa and not saraṇa protection). Cp. paṭisāraṇiya. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisata: {'def': '(paṭi回﹑对+ sata2‹pp. of sarati, of smr记忆、正念),【中】回到正念者，护念。【形】回想的。Paṭissatoti paṭissatisaṅkhātāya satiyā yutto.(已回到正念︰所谓的回到正念(回想)，与念相关联的。) S.35.95./IV,74.︰“Na so rajjati rūpesu, rūpaṁ disvā paṭissato; Virattacitto vedeti, tañca nājjhosa tiṭṭhati. “Yathāssa passato rūpaṁ, sevato cāpi vedanaṁ; Khīyati nopacīyati, evaṁ so caratī sato. Evaṁ apacinato dukkhaṁ, santike nibbānamuccati.(他在诸色(相)不染，见色而回到正念，体验心无执著，也不黏住於此。他如此见色(相)，和正被交会的感受，被灭尽，没有被累积，如是他具正念而行，如是正散失苦，靠近涅盘解脱。) sampajāno paṭissato, 有正知地回到正念。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭisatena: {'def': '(adv.) [paṭi+Instr. of sataṁ] by the hundred, i. e. in front of a hundred (people) Vin.I,269. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisattu: {'def': '[paṭi+sattu] an enemy (in retaliation) J.II,406; Nd¹ 172, 173; Miln.293. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisañcikkhati: {'def': '[paṭi+saṁ+cikkhati of khyā; cp. paṭisaṅkhāti & BSk. pratisañcikṣati MVastu II.314] to think over, to discriminate, consider, reflect Vin.I,5; D.I,63; M.I,267, 499; III,33; S.I,137; A.I,205; Pug.25; Vism.283. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'paṭisaṁcikkhati (paṭi对+saṁ一起+cikkh+a), 思择，思虑，区别。【过】paṭisañcikhi。【过分】paṭisañcikhita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + saŋ + cikkh + a), 区别，考虑。【过】 ~khi。【过分】~khita。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭisañjānati: {'def': '溯源，溯往。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭisañjīvita: {'def': '[pp. of paṭi+saṁ+jīv] revived, resurrected M.I,333. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisaŋharati: {'def': '(paṭi + saŋ + har + a), 撤回，移掉，折叠。【过】 ~hari。【过分】 ~harita, ~haṭa。【独】 ~haritvā。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭisaŋharaṇa: {'def': '【中】 Paṭisaŋhāra, 【阳】折叠，移动。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭisaŋvedeti: {'def': '(paṭi + saŋ + vid + e), 遭受，感觉，经历。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~vidita, ~vedita。【独】 ~detvā。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭisaŋvedī: {'def': '【阳】感觉到的人，经验者，遭受者，享受者。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭisaŋyutta: {'def': '(patisaŋyujjati 的【过分】), 已连接，已属于。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭisaṁharati: {'def': '(paṭi+saṁ+har(梵hr)拿+a), 撤回，移掉，折叠。【过】paṭisaṁhari。【过分】paṭisaṁharita, paṭisaṁhaṭa。【独】paṭisaṁharitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+saṁ+hṛ, cp. BSk. pratisaṁharati MVastu I.82] to draw back, withdraw, remove, take away, give up Vin.II,185 (sakavaṇṇaṁ); D.I,96; S.V,156; PvA.92 (devarūpaṁ). (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisaṁharaṇa: {'def': '(fr. paṭisaṁharati),【中】Paṭisaṁhāra,【阳】折叠，移动 (removing Nett 27, 41.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṭisaṁharati] removing Nett 27, 41. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisaṁvedeti: {'def': '[paṭi+saṁ+vedeti, Caus. of vid] to feel, experience, undergo, perceive D.I,43, 45; A.I,157 (domanassaṁ); IV,406 (id.); Pug.59; PvA.192 (mahādukkhaṁ). There is also a by-form, viz. paṭisaṁvediyati S.II,18, 75, 256 (attabhāva-paṭilābhaṁ); It.38 (sukkha-dukkhaṁ; v. l. °vedeti). (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'paṭisaṁvediyati(by-form), (paṭi对+saṁ一起+vid知+e), 【使】体验，体证，感觉，经历(to feel, experience, undergo, perceive)。【过】paṭisaṁvesi。【过分】paṭisaṁvidita, paṭisaṁvedita。【独】paṭisaṁdetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭisaṁvedin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paṭisaṁvedeti; BSk. pratisaṁvedin Divy 567] experiencing, feeling, enjoying or suffering M.I,56; S.I,196; II,122; IV,41; V,310 sq.; A.I,164 (sukhadukkha°); IV,303 (id.); V,35 (id.); It.99; Ps.I,95, 114 (evaṁsukhadukkha°), 184, 186 sq.; Pug.57, 58. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. paṭisaṁvedeti; BSk. pratisaṁvedin Divy.567),【阳】【形】感觉到的人，经验者，体证者，享受者，具有感受的人(experiencing, feeling, enjoying or suffering)。sabbakāyapaṭisaṁvedī, 体验全呼吸(者)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭisaṁvidita: {'def': '[pp. of paṭi+saṁ+vid; same (prati) at MVastu III,256] apperceived, known, recognised, in phrase “pubbe appaṭisaṁvidita pañho” S.II,54. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisaṁyamati: {'def': '[paṭi+saṁyamati] to restrain, to exercise self-control J.IV,396. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisaṁyujati: {'def': '[paṭi+saṁ+yuj] to connect with, fig. to start, begin (vādaṁ a discussion or argument) S.I,221 (bālena paṭisaṁyuje=paṭipphareyya C.; “engage himself to bandy with a fool” K.S. 284); Sn.843 (vādaṁ p.= paṭipphareyya kalahaṁ kareyya Nd¹ 196). -- pp. paṭisaṁyutta (q. v.). (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisaṁyutta: {'def': '[pp. of paṭisaṁyujati] connected with, coupled, belonging to Vin.IV,6; S.I,210 (nibbāna °dhammikathā); Th.1, 598; It.73; VvA.6, 87; PvA.12. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(patisaṁyujjati 的【过分】), 已连接，已属於。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭisaṅkharaṇa: {'def': '【中】恢复，修改。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】恢复，修改。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭisaṅkharoti: {'def': '(paṭi + saŋ + kar + o), 修理，回复，修改。【过】 ~khari。【过分】 ~khata。【独】 ~kharitvā。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+saṁ+kṛ] to restore, repair, mend Vin.II,160; A.II,249; J.III,159 (nagaraṁ). Caus. II. paṭisaṅkhārāpeti to cause to repair or build up again M.III,7; J.VI,390 (gehāni). (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+saṁ+kar行+o), 修理，回复，修改(to restore, repair, mend)。【过】paṭisaṅkhari。【过分】paṭisaṅkhata。【独】paṭisaṅkharitvā。Caus. II. paṭisaṅkhārāpeti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭisaṅkhata: {'def': '(patisaṅkharoti 的【过分】), 已修理，已准备。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(patisaṅkharoti 的【过分】), 已修理，已准备。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭisaṅkhayanto: {'def': 'is ppr. of paṭi+saṁ+kṣi, to be pacified Th.1, 371. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisaṅkhā: {'def': 'paṭisaṅkhāya(‹khyā测、察),【独】省察了，考虑了，区别了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'paṭisaṅkhāya, 【独】考虑了，区别了。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [paṭi+saṅkhā of khyā] reflection, judgment, consideration Vin.I,213; S.IV,104 (°yoniso); Ps.I,33, 45, 57, 60, 64; Pug.25, 57; Dhs.1349. appaṭisaṅkhā (see also °saṅkhāti) want of judgment, inconsideration Ps.I,33, 45; Dhs.1346=Pug.21. -- Note. In combⁿ paṭisaṅkhā yoniso “carefully, with proper care or intention” p. is to be taken as ger. of paṭisaṅkhāti (q. v.). This connection is frequent, e. g. S.IV,104; A.II,40; Nd¹ 496; Nd² 540. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisaṅkhāna: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṭisaṅkhāti] carefulness, mindfulness, consideration J.I,502; VvA.327; DhsA.402 (°paññā); Sdhp.397. --°bala power of computation A.I,52, 94; II,142; D.III,213, 244; Ps.II,169, 176; Dhs.1354 (cp. Dhs.trslⁿ 354); Nett 15, 16, 38. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】辨别，考虑，留心。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】辨别，考虑，留心。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭisaṅkhāra: {'def': '【阳】参考 paṭisaṅkharaṇa。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】回复，恢复，修改。参考 paṭisaṅkharaṇa。Vibhv.p.197.︰Bhāvanāya paṭisaṅkhārakammabhūtā.(一再回到原本的工作(禅修对象)的修习。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭisaṅkhārika: {'def': '& Paṭisaṅkhāriya (adj.) [fr. paṭisaṅkharoti] serving for repair Vin.III,43 (dārūni); PvA.141 (id.; °ya). (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisaṅkhāti: {'def': '[paṭi+saṁ+khyā] to be careful, to think over, reflect, discriminate, consider; only in ger. paṭisaṅkhā (as adv.) carefully, intently, with discrimination Vin.I,213; M.I,273; III,2; J.I,304; Nd² 540; Pug.25; cp. paṭisaṅkhā (+yoniso); also ger. paṭisaṅkhāya Sddp 394. -- Opp. appaṭisaṅkhā inconsiderately, in phrase sahasā app° rashly & without a thought M.I,94; S.II,110, 219. -- Cp. paṭisañcikkhati. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisedha: {'def': '[fr. paṭi+sidh¹, sedhati drive off] warding off, prohibition Miln.314 (“resubjugation”); SnA 402 (with ref. to part “na”); KhA 170 (id.); PvA.11 (°nipāta=“mā”); VvA.224. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. paṭi+sidh 1, sedhati drive off),【阳】paṭisedhana,【中】防止，禁令，拒绝(warding off, prohibition)。paṭisedhaka,【形】禁止，预防，防止，拒绝。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 Paṭisedhana, 【中】禁令，防止，拒绝。 ~ka, 【形】禁止，预防，防止，拒绝。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭisedhaka: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. paṭisedha] warding off, one who prevents or puts a stop to S.I,221; Miln.344. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisedhana: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. paṭisedha] warding off, refusal, prohibition, stopping S.I,221, 223; PvA.11, 25; Sdhp.397. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisedhati: {'def': '(paṭi+sedhati), 防止，禁止，避免，拒绝(to ward off, prohibit, prevent, refuse)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& (Caus.) Paṭisedheti [paṭi+sedhati] to ward off, prohibit, prevent, refuse S.IV,341; PvA.11. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisedheti: {'def': '(paṭi + sidh + e), 防止，避免，拒绝，禁止。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~dhita。【独】 ~dhetvā。 ~dhiya。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi+sidh+e) (caus.), 防止，禁止，免除。【过】paṭisedhesi。【过分】paṭisedhita。【独】paṭisedhetvā。paṭisedhiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭisedhitar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. paṭisedhati] one who prohibits or refuses J.II,123.=V.91. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisena: {'def': '[paṭi+sena, of either sī or śri, cp. usseneti] repulsion, opposition, enmity, retaliation; only in compⁿ with kṛ as °senikaroti to make opposition, to oppose, retaliate Sn.932, cp. Nd¹ 397; --°senikattar (n. ag.), one who repulses, fighter, retaliator, arguer Sn.832, cp. Nd¹ 173. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiseneti: {'def': '[paṭi+seneti, see usseneti] to repel, push away, be inimical towards, retaliate (opp. usseneti) A.II,215 (paṭisseneti); Sn.390 (°seniyati). (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisevana: {'def': '【中】练习，使用，跟随。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】练习，使用，跟随。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṭisevati] going after, indulging in, practice M.I,10. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisevati: {'def': '[paṭi+sevati, cp. BSk. pratisevate Divy 258 in same meaning] to follow, pursue, indulge in (Acc.), practise Vin.II,296 (methunaṁ dhammaṁ); M.I,10; A.II,54 (methunaṁ); J.I,437; VI,73, 505; Dh.67; Nd¹ 496; Pug.62; Miln.224; DhA.II,40; PvA.130; Sdhp.396. ‹-› Note. paṭisevati is spelt pati° at Dh.67, 68; J.III,275, 278. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+sev+a), 跟随，追求，练习，沉迷於，使用药等。【过】paṭisevi。【过分】paṭisevita。【现分】paṭisevanta。【独】paṭisevitvā。paṭiseviya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + sev + a), 跟随，追求，练习，沉迷于，使用药等。【过】~sevi。【过分】 ~vita。【现分】 ~sevanta。【独】 ~sevitvā。 ~seviya。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭisevitar: {'def': '[n. ag. of paṭisevati] one who practises, pursues or indulges in (Acc.) A.III,143 sq. (bhesajjaṁ). (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiseṭṭha: {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+seṭṭha] having a superior; neg. app° incomparable, unsurpassed Miln.357 (appaṭibhāga+). (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisibbita: {'def': '[pp. of paṭi+sibbati] sewn, embroidered VvA.167 (pati°). (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisotaŋ: {'def': '【副】逆流地。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭisotaṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [paṭi+sotaṁ, Acc. of sota] against the stream (opp. anusotaṁ) It.114; J.I,70; PvA.154. ‹-› paṭisotagāmin going against the stream, toiling, doing hard work S.I,136; A.II,6 (opp. anu°), 214 sq. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【副】逆流地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭissata: {'def': '[paṭi+sata, pp. of smṛ] recollecting, thoughtful, mindful, minding Sn.283=Miln.411; Dh.144 (t); Vv 21¹⁰; and with spelling pati° at S.III,143; IV,74, 322, 351; A.III,24; It.10, 21, 81; Sn.283, 413. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+smr的【过分】),【形】回想的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭissati: {'def': '(paṭi+sati of smr)﹐【阴】回想。appṭissati﹐不能回想(lapse of memory)。DhsA.(CS:p.191)：「当面的(记住)，离去了之后，处於再回想记住，为回想。」(Abhimukhaṁ gantvā viya saraṇato paṭisaraṇavasena paṭissati.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [paṭi+sati of smṛ] mindfulness, remembrance, memory M.I,36 sq.; Dhs.23; Pug.25. app° lapse of memory Dhs.1349. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭissatika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paṭissati] mindful, thoughtful Th.1, 42. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹paṭissati)﹐【形】回想的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭissava: {'def': '(‹paṭi+ su(梵wru, wrus)听到),【阳】诺言，赞成(assent, promise, obedience (cp. paṭissaya VvA 347))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】诺言，赞成。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. paṭi+śru] assent, promise, obedience J.VI,220; VvA.351 (cp. paṭissaya VvA.347). (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭissavatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. paṭissava] obedience; neg. appaṭissavatā want of deference Dhs.1325=Pug.20. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(abstr.‹paṭissava)﹐【阴】遵守(obedience)。【反】appaṭissavatā (want of deference)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭisseneti: {'def': 'see paṭiseneti. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭissuṇāti: {'def': '(paṭi + su + ṇā), 同意，允诺。【过】 ~suṇi。【过分】 ~suta。【独】 suṇitvā。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+ śru] to assent, promise, agree aor. paccassosi Vin.I,73; D.I,236; S.I,147, 155; Sn.p. 50, and paṭisuṇi SnA 314; ger. °suṇitvā freq. in formula “sādhū ti patissuṇitvā” asserting his agreement, saying yes S.I,119; PvA.13, 54, 55; & passim; also paṭissutvā S.I,155. -- f. abstr. paṭissutavatā SnA 314. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+su(梵wru, wrus)听到+ṇā), 同意，允诺，应(声)。【过】paṭissuṇi。【过分】paṭissuta。【独】paṭisuṇitvā。【3.复.过】paccassosuṁ(他们应(声))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭissā: {'def': '& Patissā (paṭi+ su(梵wru, wrus)听到, cp. paṭissuṇāti & paṭissāvin)﹐【阴】(deference, obedience, only in cpd. sappaṭissa obedient, deferential (sappatissa) & appaṭissa disobedient, not attached to。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Patissā (f.) [paṭi+ śru, cp. paṭissuṇāti & paṭissāvin; in BSk. we find pratīsā which if legitimate would refer the word to a basis different than śru. The form occurs in cpd. sapratīśa respectful Divy; also MVastu I.516; II,258; besides as sapratisa MVastu III,345] deference, obedience, only in cpd. sappaṭissa (q. v.) obedient, deferential It.10 (sappatissa); Vv 84⁴¹ (cp. VvA.347), & appaṭissa disobedient, not attached to S.I,139; II,224 sq.; A.II,20; III,7, 247, 439; J.II,352 (°vāsa anarchy; reading t); PvA.89. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭissāvin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paṭi+ śru] assenting, ready, obedient, willing D.I,60; S.III,113 (kiṅkāra-paṭi°). (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹paṭi+ su(梵wru, wrus)听到),【形】(assenting, ready, obedient, willing)。S III.113 (kiṅkāra-paṭi°).', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭisumbhita: {'def': '[pp. of paṭi+śumbh] fallen down Pv III,1⁸ (=patita PvA.174). (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisutta: {'def': '[pp. of paṭi+svap] sunk into sleep Th.1, 203. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisāmeti: {'def': '(paṭi + sam + e), 井然有序地设定，防范。【过】 ~esi。【过分】~mita。【独】 ~metvā。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+Caus. of śam, samati to make ready; cp. BSk. pratiśāmayati Divy passim] to set in order, arrange, get ready Vin.II,113, 211, 216; M.I,456; J.III,72; Miln.15 (pattacīvaraṁ); VvA.118 (v. l. °yāpeti), 157 (v. l. °nameti). (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+sam+e), 井然有序地设定，防范。【过】paṭisesi。【过分】paṭisāmita。【独】paṭisāmetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭisāmita: {'def': '[pp. of paṭisāmeti] arranged, got ready Vism.91. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisāra: {'def': '[paṭi+ smṛ] see vi°. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisārana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṭi+sāreti] act of protection, expiation, atonement Miln.344 (in law); appl^d. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisāraṇiya: {'def': '(adj. nt.) [a grd. formation fr. paṭi+sāreti, Caus. of sṛ to move] only as t.t. in combⁿ with kamma (official act, chapter), i. e. a formal proceeding by which a bhikkhu expiates an offence which he has committed against someone, reconciliation (cp. Vin. Texts II.364) Vin.I,49 (one of the 5 Saṅgha-kammas, viz. tajjaniya°, nissaya°, pabbājaniya°, p.°, ukkhepaniya°), 143 (id.), 326; II,15--20, 295; A.I,99; IV,346; DhA.II,75. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisārin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paṭi+sṛ, cp. paṭisāraniya & paṭisaraṇa Note] falling back upon, going back to, trusting in, leaning on (-°) D.I,99 (gotta°); S.I,153 (id.); II,284 (id.). (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisāsana: {'def': '【阴】答覆，提出抗衡的情报。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [paṭi+sāsana] counter-message, reply DhA.I,392. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】答复，提出抗衡的情报。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭisāyati: {'def': '[paṭi+sāyati] to taste, eat, partake of food Vin.II,177. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisāṭheyya: {'def': '(nt.) [paṭi+sāṭheyya] a deceit in return (cp. paṭikūṭa) J.II,183. (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisīsaka: {'def': '[paṭi+sīsaka] a false top-knot, “chignon” (?) J.II,197 (°ṁ paṭimuñcitvā); V,49 (id.); Miln.90 (muṇḍaka°). (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭisūra: {'def': '[paṭi+sūra] a rival hero or fighter, an opponent in fight Sn.831 (=paṭipurisa paṭisattu paṭimalla Nd¹ 172); Nd¹ 173 (id.). (Page 401)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭita: {'def': '(adj.) satisfied, happy DhA.II,269 (°ācāra) (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭitittha: {'def': '(nt.) [paṭi+tittha] opposite bank (of a river) J.V,443. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭitiṭṭhati: {'def': '(paṭiṭṭhahati) etc. see pati°. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭitthambhati: {'def': '[paṭi+thambhati] to stand firm (against) Miln.372. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivacana: {'def': '【中】答案，答复。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】答案，答覆。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [paṭi+vacana] answer, reply, rejoinder J.IV,18; Miln.120; PvA.83 (opp. vacana); ThA.285. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivadati: {'def': '(paṭi + vad + a), 回答，答复，反对。【过】 ~vadi。【过分】~vutta。【独】 ~vatvā, ~vaditvā。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi+vad说+a), 回答，答覆，反对。【过】paṭivadi。【过分】paṭivutta。【独】paṭivatvā, paṭivaditvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+vadati] to answer, reply A.IV,168 (v. l. for paṭicarati); Sn.932; Dh.133; Nd¹ 397; PvA.39. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivasati: {'def': '[paṭi+vasati] to live, dwell (at) D.I,129; Vin.II,299; S.I,177; J.I,202; SnA 462; PvA.42, 67. Paṭivāṇa, Paṭivāṇitā, Paṭivāṇī etc. occur only in neg. form app°, q. v. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+vas住+a), 居住。【过】paṭivasi。【过分】paṭivuttha。【独】paṭivasitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + vas + a), 居住。【过】 ~vasi。【过分】 ~vuttha。【独】~sitvā。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭivatta: {'def': '(nt.) [pp. of paṭivattati] moving backwards, only in cpd. vatta-paṭivatta-karaṇa “moving forth or backwards, “ performance of different kinds of duties; doing this, that & the other DhA.I,157. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivattana: {'def': '【中】倒退，折回。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】倒退，折回。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭivattar: {'def': '[paṭi+vattar, n. ag. of vac] one who contradicts S.I,222. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivatteti: {'def': '(paṭi + vat + e), 击退，折回。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~vattita。【独】~tetvā, ~vattiya。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi+vat+e), 击退，折回。【过】paṭivattesi。【过分】paṭivattita。【独】paṭivattetvā, paṭivattiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭivattiya: {'def': '【形】被折转的，被击退的。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】被折转的，被击退的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭivattu: {'def': '【阳】反对者，反驳者。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】反对者，反驳者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭivaṭṭati: {'def': ' (& Paṭivattati) [paṭi+vṛt] (intrs.) to roll or move back, to turn away from A.IV,47=Miln.297 (paṭilīyati paṭikutati p.); Caus. paṭivaṭṭeti in same meaning trs. (but cp. Childers s. v. “to knock, strike”) S.II,265 (T. spells pati°, as also at Miln.297). -- grd. paṭivattiya only in neg. ap° (q. v.). -- pp. paṭivatta (q. v.). (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivedeti: {'def': '(paṭi+vid知+e), 使知道，告知，宣布。【过】paṭivesi。【过分】paṭivedita。【独】paṭivedetvā。pot. paṭivedayi', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+vedeti, Caus. of vid] to make known, declare, announce Vin.I,180; S.I,101, 234; Sn.415 (aor. °vedayi); DA.I,227; PvA.6 (pītisomanassaṁ). (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi + vid + e), 使知道，告知，宣布。【过】 ~esi。【过分】~vedita。【独】 ~detvā。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭivedha: {'def': '[fr. paṭi+vyadhī cp. paṭivijjhati & BSk. prativedha MVastu I.86] lit. piercing, i. e. penetration, comprehension, attainment, insight, knowledge A.I,22, 44; D.III,253; Ps.I,105; II,50, 57, 105, 112, 148, 182; Vbh.330; Miln.18; SnA 110, 111; Sdhp.65. -- appaṭivedha non-intelligence, ignorance Vin.I,230; S.II,92; III,261; V,431; A.II,1; Dhs.390, 1061, 1162; Pug.21. -- duppaṭivedha (adj.) hard to pierce or penetrate; flg. difficult to master Miln.250. -- maggaphala° realisation of the fruit of the Path DhA.I,110. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】渗透，达到，理解。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹paṭi+vyadh贯通), cp.paṭivijjhati & BSk.prativedha),【阳】渗透，通达(体证道、果、涅盘)，贯通、洞察(piercing)。duppaṭivedha﹐【形】难以通达。lakkhaṇapaṭivedhā, 通达相(通达(喜)的自相和共相，(Mṭ.118./II,pp.312.))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭivekkhiya: {'def': 'see ap°. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivellati: {'def': '[paṭi+vellati] to embrace, cling to J.V,449. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivera: {'def': '[paṭi+vera] revenge DhA.I,50. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivibhajati: {'def': '(paṭi+vi+bhaj +a), 分开，定义(analysed)。【过】paṭivibhaji。【过分】paṭivibhatta。【独】paṭivibhajitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+vibhajati] to divide off, to divide into (equal) parts M.I,58 (cp. III,91; paṭibhaj° & v. l. vibhaj°). (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi + vi + bhaj + a), 分开，定义。【过】 ~bhaji。【过分】~vibhatta。【独】 ~bhajitvā。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭivibhatta: {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+vibhatta] (equally) divided M.I,372; A.IV,211; VvA.50. On neg. ap° in cpd. °bhogin see appaṭivibhatta. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭividdha: {'def': '(paṭivijjhati 的【过分】), 已看穿，已了解。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of paṭivijjhati] being or having penetrated or pierced; having acquired, mastering, knowing M.I,438; S.II,56 (sup°); Ps.II,19, 20; J.I,214; VvA.73 (°catusacca=saccānaṁ kovida). -- appaṭividdha not pierced, not hurt J.VI,446. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭivijjhati 的【过分】), 已看穿(being or having penetrated or pierced)，已了解(having acquired, mastering, knowing)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭividita: {'def': '(paṭivijānāti 的【过分】), 已知道，已确定。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of paṭi+vid] known, ascertained D.I,2; Ps.I,188. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭivijānāti 的【过分】), 已知道，已确定( known, ascertained)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭivigacchati: {'def': '[paṭi+vi+gacchati] to go apart again, to go away or asunder A.III,243; Miln.51. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivijjha: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of paṭivijjhati] in cpd. dup° hard to penetrate (lit. & fig.) S.V,454. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(grd. of paṭivijjhati),【形】贯通的。【反】duppaṭivijjha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭivijjhanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [paṭi+vijjhana+ka,of vyadh] only in neg. ap° impenetrable DhA.IV,194. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivijjhati: {'def': '(paṭi+vidh(梵vyadh / vidh)贯穿+ya), 贯通，透彻，看穿，了解(to pierce through, penetrate (lit. & fig.), intuit, to acquire, master, comprehend)。【过】paṭivijjha﹐paccavyādhi。【独】paṭivijjha﹐paṭivijjhitvā。【现分】paṭivijjhanta。3rd pl. paccavidhuṁ。【过分】paṭividdha。Mv.I,40., 42︰paccabyattha padamasokaṁ, 你已到达无忧处。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + vidh + ya), 看穿，了解。【过】 ~jhi。【独】 ~vijjha,~vijjhitvā。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+vijjhati of vyadh] to pierce through, penetrate (lit. & fig.), intuit, to acquire, master, comprehend Vin.I,183; S.II,56; V,119, 278, 387, 454; A.IV,228, 469; Nd² 378; J.I,67, 75; Ps.I,180 sq.; Miln.344; DhA.I,334. -- aor. paṭivijjha Sn.90 (=aññāsi sacchākāsi SnA 166), and paccavyādhi Th.1, 26=1161 (°byādhi); also 3rd pl. paccavidhuṁ A.IV,228. -- pp. paṭividdha (q. v.). On phrase uttariṁ appaṭivijjhanto. See uttari. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivijānāti: {'def': '[paṭi+vi+jānāti] to recognise Vin.III,130; Nd² 378 (ājānāti vijānāti p. paṭivijjhati); Miln.299. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi + vi + ñā + nā), 认可，知道。【过】 ~jāni。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi+vi +ā+nā), 认可，知道。【过】paṭivijāni。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭivinaya: {'def': '[paṭi+vi+nī] repression, subdual, only in cpd. āghāta° D.III,262, 289; A.III,185 sq. See āghāta. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivineti: {'def': '(BSk.Praṭivineti), (paṭi+vi+nī ), 驱逐，除去，征服(to drive out, keep away, repress, subdue)。【过分】paṭivinīta。【义】paṭivineyya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi+vi+nī] to drive out, keep away, repress, subdue S.I,228; M.I,13; A.III,185 sq.; J.VI,551; PvA.104 (pipāsaṁ). Cp. BSk. prativineti MVastu II.121. -- pp. paṭivinīta (q. v.). (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivinicchinati: {'def': '[paṭi+vinicchinati] to try or judge a case again, to reconsider J.II,187. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivinodana: {'def': '(‹paṭivinodeti),【中】移掉，开除，逐出(removal, driving out, explusion)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. paṭivinodeti] removal, driving out, explusion A.II,48, 50; Miln.320. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】移掉，开除，逐出。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭivinodaya: {'def': '(‹paṭivinodeti),【形】【中】驱散，除去，摆脱(dispelling, subduing, riddance, removal)。duppaṭivinodaya, 不易摆脱(hard to dispel)。【独】paṭivinodayitvā(=pavinodayitvā)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. paṭivinodeti] dispelling, subduing, riddance, removal; dup° hard to dispel A.III,184 sq. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivinodeti: {'def': '(paṭi + vi + nud + e), 驱散，除去，摆脱。【过】 ~esi。【过分】~dita。【独】 ~detvā。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+vi+Caus. of nud, Cp. BSk. prativinudati Divy 34, 371 etc.] to remove, dispel, drive out, get rid of D.I,138; M.I,48; Pv III,5⁸; Pug.64; VvA.305; PvA.60. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+vi+nud+e；cp. BSk. prativinudati), 驱散，除去，摆脱。【过】paṭivinodesi。【过分】paṭivinodita。【独】paṭivinodetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭivinīta: {'def': '[pp. of paṭivineti] removed, dispelled, subdued S.II,283; V,76, 315. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiviramati: {'def': '(paṭi+vi+ram+a), 戒除(to abstain from)。【过】paṭivirami。【现分】paṭiviramanta。【独】paṭiviramitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + vi + ram + a), 戒除。【过】 ~rami。【现分】 ~manta。【独】 ~mitvā。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+viramati] to abstain from M.I,152. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivirata: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of paṭiviramati, cp. BSk. prativiramati Divy II, 302, 585] abstaining from, shrinking from (with Abl.) D.I,5; M.III,23; S.V,468; It.63; Pug.39, 58; DA.I,70; PvA.28, 260. -- app° not abstaining from Vin.II,296; S.V,468; It.64. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Paṭiviramati的【过分】；cp. BSk. prativiramati) 戒除(abstaining from, shrinking from (with Abl.))。appaṭivirata﹐不戒除。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭivirati: {'def': '(‹paṭivirata),【阴】戒除(abstinence from)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. paṭivirata] abstinence from Dhs.299; M.III,74; PvA.206. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivirodha: {'def': '[paṭi+virodha] hostility, enmity, opposition Dhs.418, 1060; Pug.18; Miln.203. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+virodha障碍),【阳】敌意(hostility, enmity, antagonism)，反对派。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭiviruddha: {'def': '(paṭivirujjhati的【过分】；cp. BSk. prativiruddha rebellious ), 已反对，已相抵触(obstructed or obstructing, an adversary, opponent)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of paṭivirujjhati, cp. BSk. prativiruddha rebellious Divy 445] obstructed or obstructing, an adversary, opponent J.VI,12; DA.I,51 (°ā satta=pare); Miln.203, 403. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivirujjhati: {'def': '(paṭi+vi+rudh成长+ya), 抗拒，怀敌意，反驳(to act hostile, to fall out with somebody, to quarrel (saddhiṁ) )。【过】paṭivirujjhi。【独】paṭivirujjhitvā。【过分】paṭiviruddha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(paṭi + vi + rudh + ya), 怀敌意，反驳。【过】 ~jhi。【独】~jhitvā。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+vi+rudh] to act hostile, to fall out with somebody, to quarrel (saddhiṁ) J.IV,104. -- pp. paṭiviruddha (q. v.). (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivirūhati: {'def': '[paṭi+virūhati] to grow again Vism.419. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi + vi + ruh + a), 再生长。【过】 ~rūhi。【过分】 ~virūḷha。【独】 ~rūhitvā。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(paṭi+vi+ruh上升+a), 再生长(to grow again)。【过】paṭivirūhi。【过分】paṭivirūḷha。【独】paṭivirūhitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭivisesa: {'def': '[paṭi+visesa] sub-discrimination J.II,9. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivisiṭṭha: {'def': '[paṭi+visiṭṭha] peculiar M.I,372. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+visiṭṭha), 奇异(peculiar)，特殊的(distinguished)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭivissaka: {'def': '【阳】邻居。【形】附近的，住近的。(p196)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. paṭi+*veśman or *veśya] dwelling near, neighbouring M.I,126; J.I,114, 483; III,163; IV,49; V,434; DhA.I,47 (°itthi), 155, 235 (°dārakā). (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】邻居。【形】附近的，住近的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭiviŋsa: {'def': '【阳】部份，部分。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭiviṁsa: {'def': '(paṭi-aṁsa with euphonic consonant v instead of y (paṭi-y-aṁsa) and assimilation of a to i (paṭiyiṁsa› paṭiviṁsa)),【阳】部份。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[paṭi-aṁsa with euphonic consonant v instead of y (paṭi-y-aṁsa) and assimilation of a to i (paṭiyiṁsa› paṭiviṁsa)] lit. “divided part,” sub-part, share, bit, portion, part Vin.I,28; III,60 (T. reads paṭivisa); J.II,286; DhsA.135; DhA.I,189; III,304; VvA.61 (°vīsa), 64 (v. l. °vīsa), 120 (id.). (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiviṁsaka: {'def': '[prec.+ka] part share, portion DhA.II,85. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivutta: {'def': '(paṭi+vutta, pp. of vac] said against, replied Vin.III,131, 274. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivyāharati: {'def': '[paṭi+vyāharati] to desist from, aor. paccavyāhāsi D.II,232. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivyūhati: {'def': '(pati°) [paṭi+vyūhati] to heap up against (?) SnA 554. (Page 400)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivāda: {'def': '[paṭi+vāda] retort, recrimination Miln.18 (vāda° talk and counter-talk). (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】反驳，反责。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】反驳，反诘(retort, recrimination)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭivāmeti: {'def': '[paṭi+Caus. vam] to throw out again DA.I,39.

Cp. J.P.T.S. 1886, p. 160, suggesting paṭivādh°, or paṭibādhayamāno, and referring to Th.1, 744. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivāpeti: {'def': '[Caus. of paṭi+vap] to turn away from, to free from, cleanse M.I,435=A.IV,423; DhsA.407. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭivāta: {'def': '﹐逆风。paṭivātaṁ,【副】逆风地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭivātaŋ: {'def': '【副】逆风地。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭivātaṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [paṭi+vātaṁ, Acc. cp. Sk. prativāta & prativātaṁ] against the wind (opp. anuvātaṁ) Vin.II,218; S.I,13; Sn.622; Dh.54, 125; PvA.116; Sdhp.425. (Page 399)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiya: {'def': '(nt.) [=paṭikā] a white woollen counterpane J.IV,352 (=uṇṇāmaya-paccattharaṇāni setakambalāni pi vadanti yeva C.). (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiyatta: {'def': '[pp. of paṭi+yat] prepared, got ready, made, dressed Vin.IV,18 (alaṅkata°); J.IV,380 (C. for pakata), PvA.25 (C. for upaṭṭhita), 75 (alaṅkata°), 135 (id.), 232 (id.), 279 (id.); KhA 118 (alaṅkata°). (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiyodha: {'def': '【阳】怀敌意的战士，反攻。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】怀敌意的战士，反攻。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[paṭi+yodha] counterfight J.III,3. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiyoloketi: {'def': '(T. paṭi-oloketi) [paṭi+oloketi] to look at, to keep an eye on, observe J.II,406. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiyādeti: {'def': '(paṭi + yat + e), 准备，安排，交出，供应。【过】 ~esi。【过分】~dita, ~yatta。【独】 ~detvā。(p195)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[for *paṭiyāteti=Sk. pratiyātayati, Caus. of paṭi+yat, like P. niyyādeti=Sk. niryātayati] to prepare, arrange, give, dedicate SnA 447. -- pp. paṭiyādita (q. v.). -- Caus.II, paṭiyādāpeti to cause to be presented or got ready, to assign, advise, give over Vin.I,249 (yāguṁ); Sn.p. 110 (bhojaniyaṁ); P.vA 22, 141. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(paṭi+yat+e), 准备，安排，交出，供应。【过】paṭiyādesi。【过分】paṭiyādita, paṭiyatta。【独】paṭiyādetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭiyādita: {'def': '[pp. of paṭiyādeti] given, prepared, arranged, dedicated Miln.9; DhA.II,75. (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiyāti: {'def': '[paṭi+yā, cp. pacceti] to go back to, reach J.VI,149 (C. for paṭimuñcati). (Page 398)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭiñña: {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中，例： samaṇapaṭiñña), 假装的。(p192)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [=paṭiññā] acknowledged; making belief, quâsi-; in phrase samaṇa° a quâsi-Samaṇa, pretending to be a Samaṇa A.I,126; II,239; cp. Sakyaputtiya° S.II,272; sacca° J.IV,384, 463; V,499. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】(在【合】中，例：samaṇapaṭiñña), 假装的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭiññā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. paṭi+jñā; cp. later Sk. pratijñā] acknowledgment, agreement, promise, vow, consent, permission D.III,254; J.I,153; Pv IV.1¹², 1⁴⁴; Miln.7; DhA.II,93: PvA.76, 123; SnA 397, 539.-patiññaṁ moceti to keep one’s promise DhA.I,93. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】诺言，誓约，同意，许可。(p193)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】诺言，誓约，同意，许可，表白。中国人谨慎处世的至理名言「有言在先」。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭiññāta: {'def': '(patijānāti的【过分】) 承认，答应，同意。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of paṭijānāti] agreed, acknowledged, promised Vin.II,83, 102; D.I,88; A.I,99; IV,144; PvA.55. (Page 395)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭola: {'def': '[dial.?] a kind of cucumber, Trichosanthes Dioeca Vin.I,201 (°paṇṇa). (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】蛇瓜(snake-gourd﹐一种栝楼属植物 (Trichosanthes anguina)，果实长形，扭转，绿色和白色，可食，在完全成熟时呈鲜橙黄色)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】蛇瓜（一种栝楼属植物 (Trichosanthes anguina)，果实长形，扭转，绿色和白色，可食，在完全成熟时呈鲜橙黄色）。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭu: {'def': '【形】聪明的，有技术的，聪明的人。paṭutā,【阴】paṭutta,【中】聪明，技术。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】聪明的，有技术的，聪明的人。 ~tā, 【阴】~tta, 【中】聪明，技术。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Epic. Sk. paṭu] sharp, pungent; fig. keen, wise, clever, skilful Vism.337 (°saññākicca), 338. Cp. paddha¹ & pāṭava. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭuppādana: {'def': '(nt.) [paṭa (?) +upp°] subtraction (opp. saṅkalana) DA.I,95. The word is not clear (cp. Dial. I.22). (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭuva: {'def': 'at D.I,54 is read as pacuṭa by Bdhgh. & trslⁿ (see Dial. I.72). See under pavuṭā. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭāka: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. paṭāka, connected with paṭa] a flag M.I,379; Miln.87; Vism.469; ThA.70. (Page 391)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭākā: {'def': '【阴】旗子。(p191)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】旗子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭāṇi: {'def': 'at Vin.IV,46 (paṭāṇi dinnā hoti) is not clear, it is expl^d by Bdhgh as “mañcapidhānaṁ (for °pīṭhānaṁ) pādasikhāsu āṇi dinno hoti.” At DA.I,77 we find the foll. . “visūkaṁ paṭāni (sic.) --bhūtaṁ dassanan ti visūkadassanaṁ, “ and at DhsA.393: “paṭāni-gahaṇaṁ gahetvā ekapaden’eva taṁ nissaddaṁ akāsiṁ.” (Page 391)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭṭa: {'def': 'paṭṭaka, 【中】薄片，平板，金属板，条板。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'paṭṭaka,【中】薄片，平板，金属板，条板。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】丝布料，绷带，长布条。【形】绸的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. late Sk. paṭṭa, doubtful etym.] 1. slab, tablet, plate, in cpds. ayo° iron plate A.IV,130, 131; J.IV,7 (suvaṇṇa°); PvA.43 (ayomaya°); loha° brass plate PvA.44; silā° stone slab J.I,59 etc. When written on, it is placed into a casket (mañjūsā) J.II,36; IV,335. ‹-› 2. a bandage, strip (of cloth) Vv 33⁴¹ (āyoga°)=VvA.142. -- 3. fine cloth, woven silk, cotton cloth, turban (-cloth) Vin.II,266 (dussa°=setavattha-paṭṭa &Bacute;dhgh, see Vin. Texts III,341); S.II,102 (id.) J.I,62 (sumana° cloth with a jasmine pattern); VI,191 (°sāṭaka), 370 (nāḷi°); KhA 51 (°bandhana); DA.I,87 (āmilāka); DhA.I,395 (°vattha); II,42 (rajata°). --dupaṭṭa “double” cloth, see under dvi B II. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】丝布料，绷带，长布条。【形】绸的。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭṭaka: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. paṭṭa] made of or forming a strip of cloth; a bandage, strip (of cloth), girdle Vin.II,136 (paṭṭikā); A.I,254 (=paṭṭikā C.); J.V,359 (aya° an iron girdle), VbhA.230 (paṭṭikā). (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭṭana: {'def': '【中】港口，靠近港口的城镇。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】港口，靠近港口的城镇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭṭha: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pa+ sthā, see patthahati] “standing out,” setting out or forth, undertaking, able (clever?) Vin.III,210 (dhammiṁ kathaṁ kātuṁ); IV,60 (cīvarakammaṁ kātuṁ), 254 (dhammiṁ kathaṁ kātuṁ) 285, 290; Nd² p. 46 (for Sn.prose part puṭṭha; v. l. seṭṭha); Nd² no. 388 (in explⁿ of paṭṭhagū Sn.1095; here it clearly means “being near, attending on, a pupil or follower of”). See also paddha¹ and paddhagu. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭṭhahati: {'def': '[pa+ sthā =P. tiṭṭhati, with short base *ṭṭha for *tiṭṭha in trs. meaning, see patiṭṭhahati] to put down, set down, provide; ppr. paṭṭhayamāna PvA.128 (varamāna+; v. l. paṭṭhap°); aor. paṭṭhayi Pv.II,9³⁴ (dānaṁ; v. l. paṭṭhapayi, expl^d by paṭṭhapesi PvA.126). ger. paṭṭhāya see sep. -- Caus. II. paṭṭhapeti to put out or up, to furnish, establish, give S.II,25; Pv.II,9²⁴ (fut. °ayissati dānaṁ, v. l. paṭṭhayissati; expl^d by pavattessati PvA.123); J.I,117; PvA.54 (bhattaṁ), 126 (dānaṁ). -- pp. paṭṭhapita (q. v.). (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭṭhapeti: {'def': '(pa+ṭhā(sthā)站+āpe), 建立，开始。【过】paṭṭhapesi。【过分】paṭṭhapita。【独】paṭṭhapetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pa + ṭhā + āpe), 建立，开始。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。【独】~petvā。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭṭhapita: {'def': '[pp. of paṭṭhahati; cp. BSk. prasthapita Divy 514] established, or given PvA.119 (cp. patiṭṭhāpitatta). (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭṭhika: {'def': 'in pañca° see under pañca. Paṭhati [paṭh to read, Sk. paṭhati] to read (of a text) VvA.72; PvA.58, 59, 70 etc.; see also pāṭha. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Paṭṭhāna: {'def': 'n. 發趣論 [七論之一].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '(pa+ ṭhā, cp.paṭṭhahati；梵prasṭhāna),【中】出发、端绪、发端(setting forth)，放出(putting forward)，出发点(starting point)。《发趣论》(Paṭṭhānappakaraṇa)︰又称《发趣大论》(Patthānamahāppakaraṇa)，乃七论中最大之论书，故称大论。内容详述「论本母」一二二门与二十四缘的关系，初分论母设置分(列举二十四缘之名目)及缘分别分(释论二十四缘)，次述由二十四发趣组成的本文。所谓二十四发趣，先分为顺发趣、逆发趣、顺逆发趣、逆顺发趣四大类，其后四大类再各自衍伸出三法发趣、二法发趣、二法三法发趣、三法二法发趣、三法三法发趣、二法二法发趣等六种，共二十四发趣。(《中华佛教百科全书(六)》p.3253.2)《发趣论注》(PtnA.CS:pg.343)︰Kenaṭṭhena paṭṭhānanti? Nānappakārapaccayaṭṭhena. ‘Pa-kāro’ hi nānappakāratthaṁ dīpeti, ṭhānasaddo paccayatthaṁ.(所谓「发趣」︰各种不同的缘之义。「发」解释各种不同的(缘)之义。「趣」缘之义。) 在《发趣论》中，「各种不同的缘」，指二十四缘。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'n. 発趣論 [七論の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+ sthā, cp. paṭṭhahati] setting forth, putting forward; only in cpd. sati° setting up of mindfulness (q. v. and see discussion of term at Dial II.324). Besides in later lit. meaning “origin,” starting point, cause, in title of the 7th book of the Abhidhamma, also called Mahāpakaraṇa. See Ledi, J.P.T.S. 1915--16, p. 26; Mrs. Rh. D., Tika p. 1, vi. -- At Sdhp.321 it has the Sk. meaning of “setting out” (?). (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】出发，放出，出发点。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭṭhānanaya: {'def': '﹐发趣法，有二十四缘：1.因缘(hetupaccayo ; root-cause condition)，2.所缘缘(ārammaṇapaccayo ; object condition)，3.增上缘(adhipatipaccayo ; predominance condition)，4.无间缘(anantarapaccayo ; proximity condition)，5.相续缘 (等无间缘) (samanatarapaccayo ; contiguity condition)，6.俱生缘(sahajātapaccayo ; conascence condition)，7.相互缘(aññamaṇṇapaccayo ; mutuality condition)，8.依止缘(nissayapaccayo ; support condition)，9.亲依止缘(upanissayapaccayo;decisive-support condition)，10.前生缘(purejātapaccayo ; prenascence condition)，11.后生缘(pacchājātapaccayo ; postnascence condition)，12.重复缘(数数习行缘) (āsevanapaccayo ; repetition condition)，13.业缘(kammapaccayo ; kamma condition)，14.异熟缘(vipākapaccayo ; kamma-result condition)，15.食缘(āhārapaccayo ; nutriment condition)，16.根缘(indriyapaccayo ;faculty condition)，17.禅那缘(jhānapaccayo ; jhāna condition)，18.道缘(maggapaccayo ; path condition)，19.相应缘(sampayuttapaccayo ; association condition)，20.不相应缘(vippayuttapaccayo ; dissociation condition)，21.有缘(atthipaccayo ; presence condition)，22.无有缘(非有缘) (natthipaccayo ; absence condition)，23.离去缘(vigatapaccayo ; disappearance condition)，24.不离去缘(avigatapaccayo ; non-disappearance condition)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Paṭṭhāya: {'def': '(indecl.) [ger. fr. paṭṭhahati] putting down, starting out from, used as prep. (with Abl.) from . . . onward, beginning with, henceforth, from the time of, e. g. ajjato p. from to-day VvA.246; ito p. from here, henceforth J.I,60, 63, 150; cp. J.I,52 (mūlato); VI,336 (sīsato); PvA.11 (galato), 13 (gihīkālato). paṭṭhāyayāva (with Acc.) from-up to Vism.374. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【独】首先，自此以后，今后，从…时候起。tatopaṭṭhāya, 自那以后，自那时以来。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】首先，自此以后，今后，从…时候起。 Tato~, 自那以后，自那时以来。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭṭikā: {'def': 'see paṭṭaka. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】长布条，绷带，腰带。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】长布条，绷带，腰带。(p197)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Paṭṭoli: {'def': 'in yāna° at Vism.328 is doubtful. It might be read as yāna-kaḷopi (on account of combⁿ with kumbhimukha), or (preferably) as putoḷi (with v. l. BB), which is a regular variant for mutoli. The trslⁿ would be “provision bag for a carriage.” See further discussed under mutoḷi. (Page 402)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pe: {'def': 'is abbreviation of peyyāla (q. v.); cp. la. (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pecca: {'def': '[ger. of pa+i, cp. BSk. pretya Jtm 3154] “after having gone past,” i. e. after death, having departed S.I,182; III,98; A.II,174 sq.; III,34, 46, 78; Sn.185, 188, 248, 598, 661; It.111; Dh.15, 131 (=paraloke DhA HI.51); J.I,169; V,489, Pv.I,119; III,75 (v. l. pacca). The form peccaṁ under influence of Prk. (AMg.) peccā (see Pischel, Prk. Gr. 587) at J.VI,360. (Page 472)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ger. of pa+i, BSk.pretya),【独】死后(after death)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】死后。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pehi: {'def': 'is imper. 2nd sg. of pa+i, “go on,” said to a horse A.IV,190 sq., cp. S.I,123. (Page 474)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pek: {'def': '(k)havant [fr. pekkhā] desirous of (Loc.) J.V,403. (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(k)hā (f.) [fr. pa+īkṣ] 1. consideration, view Vbh.325, 328. -- 2. desire J.V,403 (p. vuccati taṇhā). -- 3. (or (pekkhaṁ?) show at a fair D.I,6 (=naṭa-samajjā DA.I,84); see Dial. I.7, n. 4 and cp. J.R.A.S. 1903, 186. (Page 472)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pekhuṇa: {'def': '(pekkh°) (nt.) [not with Childers fr. *pakṣman, but with Pischel, Gr. § 89 fr. Sk. preṅkhaṇa a swing, Vedic preṅkha, fr. pra+īṅkh, that which swings, through *preṅkhuṇa›prekhuṇa›pekhuṇa] 1. a wing Th.1, 211 (su° with beautiful feathers), 1136; J.I,207. -- 2. a peacock’s tail-feathers J.VI,218 (=morapiñja C.), 497 (citrapekkhuṇaṁ moraṁ). (Page 472)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】孔雀的尾部羽毛。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】孔雀的尾部羽毛。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pekkha: {'def': '² (adj.) [grd. of pekkhati, Sk. prekṣya] to be looked for, to be expected, desirable J.VI,213. (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2 (grd.of pekkhati, 梵preksya)【形】盼望(to be looked for)，to be expected, desirable。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) (-°) [cp. Sk. prekṣā f. & prekṣaka adj.; fr. pa+īks] looking out for, i. e. intent upon, wishing; usually in puñña° desirous of merit S.I,167; Dh.108 (=puññaṁ icchanto DhA.II,234); Vv 3421 (=puññaphalaṁ ākaṅkhanto VvA.154); PvA.134. (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1 (-°) (cp.梵preksā f.& preksaka adj.; fr.pa+īks) 【形】looking out for, i.e.intent upon, wishing。puñña° desirous of merit.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pekkhaka: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. pekkha1] seeing, looking at; wishing to see ThA.73 (Ap. V,59), f. °ikā S.I,185 (vihāra°). (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】正在看著的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】正在看着的人。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pekkhati: {'def': '(pa + ikkh + a), 看，看着。【过】 pekkhi。【过分】 ~khita。【独】~khitvā。【现分】 pekkhamāna。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pa+ikkh见+a), 看，看著。【过】pekkhi。【过分】pekkhita。【独】pekkhitvā。【现分】pekkhamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pa+īkṣ] to behold, regard, observe, look at D.II,20; S.IV,291; J.VI,420. -- ppr. pekkhamāna Vin.I,180; Sn.36 sq. (=dakkhamāna Nd2 453), 1070, 1104; Pv.II,37; Vism.19 (disā-vidisaṁ). Gen. pl. pekkhataṁ Sn.580 (cp. SnA 460). -- Caus. pekkheti to cause one to behold, to make one see or consider Vin.II,73≈ A.V,71. -- Cp. anu°. (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pekkhaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+īkṣ] seeing, sight, look DA.I,185, 193; KhA 148 (=dassana). (Page 471)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】看，视力。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '﹐pekkhana﹐【中】看，视力。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pekkhin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pekkhati] looking (in front), in phrase yugamattaṁ p. “looking only the distance of a plough” Miln.398. (Page 472)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pelaka: {'def': '【阳】野兔。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】野兔(hare)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[etym.?] a hare J.VI,538 (=sasa C.). (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pema: {'def': '(‹prī, see pīṇeti & piya；梵 Prema),【中】爱(友情)，感人的。pemanīya,【形】挚爱的，亲切的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】爱，感人的。 ~nīya, 【形】挚爱的，亲切的。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. prī, see pīṇeti & piya & cp. BSk. prema Jtm 221; Vedic preman cons. stem] love, affection D.I,50; III,284 sq.; M.I,101 sq.; S.III,122; IV,72, 329; V,89, 379; A.II,213; III,326 sq.; Sn.41; Dh.321; DA.I,75. --(a)vigata-pema with(out) love or affection D.III,238, 252; S.III,7 sq., 107 sq., 170; IV,387; A.II,174 sq.; IV,15, 36, 461 sq. (Page 472)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pemaka: {'def': '(m. or nt.) [fr. pema]=pema J.IV,371. (Page 472)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pemanīya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pema as grd. formation, cp. BSk., premaṇīya MVastu III,343] affectionate, kind, loving, amiable, agreeable D.I,4 (cp. DA.I,75); II,20 (°ssara); A.II,209; Pug.57; J.IV,470. (Page 472)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Perita: {'def': 'is Kern’s (Toev. s. v.) proposed reading for what he considered a faulty spelling in bhaya-merita (p for m) J.IV,424=V.359. This however is bhaya-m-erita with the hiatus-m, and to supplant perita (=Sk. prerita) is unjustified. (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pesa: {'def': 'is spurious spelling for pessa (q. v.). (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pesaka: {'def': '【阳】寄件人，叁加者。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. pa+iṣ, cp. Vedic preṣa order, command] employer, controller, one who attends or looks after Vin.II,177 (ārāmika° etc.); A.III,275 (id.). (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】寄件人，参加者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pesakāra: {'def': '[pesa+kāra, epsa=Vedic peśaḥ, fr. piś: see piṁsati1] weaver D.I,52; Vin.III,259; IV,7; J.IV,475; DhA.I,424 (°vīthi); III,170 sq.; VbhA.294 sq. (°dhītā the weaver’s daughter; story of --) PvA.42 sq., 67. (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】织布者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】织布者。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pesala: {'def': '(cp. Epic Sk. pewala; SA.6.9.︰Pesalāti piyasīlā.),【形】举止良好( lovable, pleasant, well-behaved, amiable)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】很好地举止。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pesana: {'def': '【中】送出，资讯，服务。pesanakaraka。【阳】仆人。pesanakārikā,【阴】女仆人，婢女。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】送出，信息，服务。 ~karaka。【阳】仆人。 ~kārikā, 【阴】女仆人，婢女。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pa+iṣ, see peseti] sending out, message; service J.IV,362 (pesanāni gacchanti); V,17 (pesane pesiyanto.) --kāraka a servant J.VI,448; VvA.349. --kārikā (a girl) doing service, a messenger, servant J III 414; DhA.I,227. (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pesanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pesana] “message sender,” employing for service, in °corā robbers making (others) servants J.I,253. (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pesanika: {'def': '(°iya) (adj.) [fr. pesana] connected with mes‹-› sages, going messages, only in phrase jaṅgha° messenger on foot Vin.III,185; J.II,82; Miln.370 (°iya). Pesala (adj.) [cp. Epic Sk. peśala; Bdhgh’s pop. etym. at SnA 475 is “piya-sīla”] lovable, pleasant, well-behaved, amiable S.I,149; II,387; A.IV,22; V,170; Sn.678; Sn.p. 124; Miln.373; Sdhp.621. Often as Ep. of a good bhikkhu, e. g. at S.I,187; Vin.I,170; II,241; J.IV,70; VvA.206; PvA.13, 268. (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Peseti: {'def': '(pes + e), 送出，送去，雇用，召唤，派人去拿。【过】 ~esi。【过分】pesita。【现分】 pesenta。【独】 pesetvā。【潜】 pesetabba。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pa+iṣ to send] to send forth or out, esp. on a message or to a special purpose, i. e. to employ as a servant or (intrs.) to do service (so in many derivations) 1. to send out J.I,86, 178, 253; IV,169 (paṇṇaṁ); V,399; VI,448; Mhvs 14, 29 (rathaṁ); DhA.III,190; PvA.4, 20, 53. -- 2. to employ or order (cp. pesaka), in Pass. pesiyati to be ordered or to be in service Vin.II,177 (ppr. pesiyamāna); J.V,17 (ppr. pesiyanto). -- pp. pesita. See also pessa & derivations. (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pes+e), 送出，送去，雇用，召唤，派人去拿。【过】pesesi。【过分】pesita。【现分】pesenta。【独】pesetvā。【义】pesetabba。。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pesi: {'def': 'pesikā, 【阴】薄的切片，第三阶段的胎儿。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Pesī(梵 pewī), Pesikā,【阴】薄的切片；闭尸，意译为凝结、肉段。指第三个七日间的胎位。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(pesī) (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. peśī] 1. a lump, usually a mass of flesh J.III,223=DhA.IV,67 (pesi=maṁsapesi C.). Thus maṁsapesi, muscle Vin.II,25 ≈ (maṁsapes’ûpamā kāmā); III,105; M.I,143, 364; S.II,256; IV,193 (in characteristic of lohitaka); Vism.356; PvA.199. ‹-› 2. the fœtus in the third stage after conception (between abbuda & ghana) S.I,206; J.IV,496; Nd1 120; Miln.40; Vism.236. -- 3. a piece, bit (for pesikā), in veḷu° J.IV,205. (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pesikā: {'def': '(f.) (-°) [cp. Sk. *peśikā] rind, shell (of fruit) only in cpds. amba° Vin.II,109; vaṁsa° J.I,352; veḷu° (a bit of bamboo) D.II,324; J.II,267, 279; III,276; IV,382. (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pesita: {'def': '(peseta 的【过分】) 已送出，已放出(sent out or sent forth)。pesitatta﹐自己已豁出去。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of peseti] 1. sent out or forth Sn.412 (rājadūta p.) Vv 217 (=uyyojita VvA.108); DhA.III,191. pesit-atta is the C. expln at S.I,53 (as given at K.S. 320) of pahit-atta (trsln “puts forth all his strength”); Bdhgh incorrectly taking pahita as pp. of pahiṇati to send whereas it is pp. of padahati. -- 2. ordered, what has been ordered, in pesit-âpesitaṁ order and prohibition Vin.II,177. (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(peseta 的【过分】)。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pessa: {'def': 'pessiya, pessika(‹peseti),【阳】报信者，仆人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'pessiya, pessika, 【阳】仆人，报信者。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[grd. formn fr. peseti, Vedic preṣya, f. preṣyā. This is the contracted form, whilst the diaeretic form is pesiya, for which also pesika] a messenger, a servant, often in combn dāsā ti vā pessā ti vā kammakarā ti vā, e. g. D.I,141; S.I,76, 93 (slightly diff. in verse); A.II,208 (spelt pesā); IV,45; DhA.II,7. See also A.III,37; IV,266, 270; J.V,351; Pug.56; DA.I,300. At Sn.615 pessa is used in the sense of an abstr. n.= pessitā service (=veyyavacca SnA 466). So also in cpds. --kamma service J.VI,374; --kāra a servant J.VI,356. (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pessitā: {'def': '(‹pessa, 梵presyatā),【阴】作仆人(being a servant, doing service)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. pessa, Sk. *preṣyatā] being a servant, doing service J.VI,208 (para° to someone else). (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pessiya: {'def': '& Pessika [see pessa] servant; m. either pessiya Vv 8446 (spelt pesiya, expld by pesana-kāraka, veyyāvaccakara VvA.349); J.VI,448 (=pesana-kāraka C.), or pessika Sn.615, 651; J.VI,552; f. either pessiyā (para°) Vv 185 (spelt pesiyā, but v. l. SS pessiyā, expld as pesaniyā paresaṁ veyyāvacca-kārī VvA.94); J.III,413 (=parehi pesitabbā pesana-kārikā C. 414), or pessikā J.VI,65. (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pesuñña: {'def': '【中】中伤，毁谤，诽谤。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. pisuṇa, cp. Epic Sk. paiśunya. The other (diaeretic) forms are pesuṇiya & pesuṇeyya] backbiting, calumny, slander M.I,110; D.III,69; A.IV,401; Vin.IV,12; Nd1 232, 260; PvA.12, 15. (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】中伤，譭谤，诽谤。Pāci.IV,12(CS:p.20)︰Pesuññaṁ nāma dvīhākārehi pesuññaṁ hoti-- piyakamyassa vā bhedādhippāyassa vā. Dasahākārehi pesuññaṁ upasaṁharati-- jātitopi, nāmatopi, gottatopi, kammatopi, sippatopi, ābādhatopi, liṅgatopi, kilesatopi, āpattitopi, akkosatopi.(诽谤︰有两种情况︰讨好别人、有挑拨的意图。集录十种诽谤情况︰(由)名字、种姓、工作、手艺、疾病、特徵(或男性性器官)、染、犯罪、责备。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pesuṇa: {'def': '【中】诽谤。pesuṇakāraka,【形】诽谤者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】诽谤。 ~kāraka, 【形】诽谤者。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. pisuṇa, cp. Epic Sk. paiśuna]=pesuñña S.I,240; Sn.362, 389, 862 sq., 941; J.V,397; Pv.I,33; PvA.16; Sdhp.55, 66, 81. --kāraka one who incites to slander J.I,200, 267. (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pesuṇika: {'def': '【阳】诽谤。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】诽谤。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pesuṇa] slanderous, calumnious PvA.12, 13. (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pesuṇiya: {'def': '& Pesuṇeyya (nt.)=pesuñña; 1. (pesuṇiya) Sn.663, 928; Pv.I,32. -- 2. (pesuṇeyya) S.I,228, 230; Sn.852; Nd1 232. (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pesāca: {'def': 'is reading at D.I,54 for pisāca (so v. l.). (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pesīyati: {'def': '(peseta 的【被】), 被送。【现分】pesiyamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(peseta 的【被】), 被送。【现分】 pesiyamāna。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Peta: {'def': '[pp of pa+ī, lit. gone past, gone before] dead, departed, the departed spirit. The Buddhistic peta represents the Vedic pitaraḥ (manes, cp. pitṛyajña), as well as the Brāhmaṇic preta. The first are souls of the “fathers,” the second ghosts, leading usually a miserable existence as the result (kammaphala) or punishment of some former misdeed (usually avarice). They may be raised in this existence by means of the dakkhiṇā (sacrificial gift) to a higher category of mahiddhikā petā (alias yakkhas), or after their period of expiation shift into another form of existence (manussa, deva, tiracchāna). The punishment in the Nirayas is included in the peta existence. Modes of suffering are given S.II,255; cp K.S. ii, 170 p. On the whole subject see Stede, Die Gespenstergeschichten des Peta Vatthu, Leipzig 1914; in the Peta Vatthu the unhappy ghosts are represented, whereas the Vimāna Vatthu deals with the happy ones. -- 1. (souls of the departed, manes) D.III,189 (petānaṁ kālakatānaṁ dakkhiṇaṁ anupadassati); A.III,43 (id.); I,155 sq.; V,132 (p. ñātisalohita); M.I,33; S.I,61=204; Sn.585, 590, 807 (petā-kālakatā=matā Nd1 126); J.V,7 (=mata C.); Pv.I,57; I,121; II,610. As pubba-peta (“deceased-before”) at A.II,68; III,45; IV,244; J.II,360. -- 2. (unhappy ghosts) S.II,255 sq.; Vin.IV,269 (contrasted with purisa, yakkha & tiracchāna-gata); A.V,269 (dānaṁ petānaṁ upakappati); J.IV,495 sq. (yakkhā pisācā petā, cp. preta-piśācayoḥ MBhār. 13, 732); Vbh.412 sq.; Sdhp.96 sq. --manussapeta a ghost in human form J.III,72; V,68; VvA.23. The later tradition on Petas in their var. classes and states is reflected in Miln.294 (4 classes: vantāsikā, khuppipāsā, nijjhāma-taṇhikā, paradatt’ûpajīvino) & 357 (appearance and fate); Vism.501=VbhA.97 (as state of suffering, with narakā, tiracchā, asurā); VbhA.455 (as nijjhāmataṇhikā, khuppipāsikā, paradatt’upajīvino). ‹-› 3. (happy ghosts) mahiddhikā petī Pv.I,101; yakkha mahiddhika Pv IV.154; Vimānapeta mahiddhika PvA.145; peta mahiddhika PvA.217. [Cp. BSk. pretamahardhika Divy 14]. -- f. petī Vin.IV,20; J.I,240; Pv.I,62; PvA.67 and passim. Vimānapetī PvA.47, 50, 53 and in Vimāna-vatthu passim. --upapattika born as a peta PvA.119. --katha (pubba°) tales (or talk) about the dead (not considered orthodox) D.I,8, cp. DA.I,90; A.V,128. --kicca duty towards the deceased (i. e. death-rites) J.II,5; DhA.I,328. --rājā king of the Petas (i. e. Yama) J.V,453 (°visayaṁ na muñcati “does not leave behind the realm of the Petaking”); C. expls by petayoni and divides the realm into petavisaya and kālakañjaka-asura-visaya. --yoni the peta realm PvA.9, 35, 55, 68, 103 and passim. --loka the peta world Sdhp.96. --vatthu a peta or ghost-story; N. of one (perhaps the latest) of the canonical books belonging to the Suttanta-Piṭaka KhA 12; DA.I,178 (Aṅkura°). (Page 472)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】死的，已故的。【阳】鬼。 ~kicca, 【中】丧事。 ~yoni, 【阴】鬼的状态。 ~loka, 【阳】鬼的世界。 ~vatthu, 【中】鬼故事。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '饿鬼', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '【形】死的，已故的。【阳】鬼。petakicca,【中】丧事。petayoni,【阴】鬼的状态。petaloka,【阳】鬼的世界。petavatthu,【中】鬼故事。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Petattana: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. peta] state or condition of a Peta Th.1, 1128. (Page 472)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Petavatthu: {'def': 'n. 餓鬼事 Pv. [Khuddaka 7].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Pettanika: {'def': '[fr. pitar] one who lives on the fortune or power inherited from his father A.III,76=300. (Page 472)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pettaṇika: {'def': '【形】靠父亲的财产生活的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】靠父亲的财产生活的人。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Petteyya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pitar; cp. Vedic pitrya] father-loving, showing filial piety towards one’s father D.III,72, 74; S.V,467; A.I,138; J.III,456; V,35; Pv.II,718. See also matteyya. Petteyyatā (f.) [abstr. fr. petteyya] reverence towards one’s father D.III,70 (a°), 145, 169; Dh.332 (=pitari sammāpaṭipatta DhA.IV,34); Nd2 294. Cp. matteyyatā. (Page 472)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】尊敬父亲的(father-loving, showing filial piety towards one’s father)。pettayyatā,【阴】孝顺，孝心。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】尊敬父亲的。 ~tā, 【阴】孝顺，孝心。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pettika: {'def': '(‹pitar；梵paitrka),【形】父亲的(paternal)。pettika gocara, 父亲行处(sake p. visaye “your own home-grounds” )。mātā-pettika, 母亲的及父亲的(maternal & paternal)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pitar, for pētika, cp. Epic Sk. paitṛka & P. petteyya] paternal Vin.III,16; IV,223; D.II,232; S.V,146=Miln.368 (p. gocara); (sake p. visaye “your own home-grounds” ) D.III,58; S.V,146; J.II,59; VI,193 (iṇa). Also in cpd. mātā-pettika maternal & paternal D.I,34, 92; J.I,146. (Page 472)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】父亲的。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pettivisaya: {'def': '(& Pitti°) (petti饿鬼+visaya境) (梵paitrya-visaya & pitryavisaya, ‹pitar, 但受到peta(鬼)的影响),【阳】祖灵界(the world of the manes)，饿鬼界(the realm of the petas)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(& Pitti°) [Sk. *paitrya-viṣaya & *pitryaviṣaya, der. fr. pitar, but influenced by peta] the world of the manes, the realm of the petas (synonymous with petavisaya & petayoni) D.III,234; It.93; J.V,186; Pv.II,22; II,79; Miln.310; DhA.I,102; IV,226; Vism.427; VbhA.4, 455; PvA.25 sq., 29, 59 sq., 214, 268; Sdhp.9. (Page 472)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】阴灵的世界。(p231)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pettāpiya: {'def': '(for pettāviya (Epic Sk. pitrvya)),伯父(father’s brother, paternal uncle)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[for pettāviya (Epic Sk. pitṛvya), cp. Trenckner, Notes 6216, 75] fatḥer’s brother, paternal uncle A.III,348; V,138 (gloss pitāmaho). (Page 472)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Petyā: {'def': '(adv.) [fr. pitar, for Sk. pitrā; cp. Trenckner, Notes 564] from the father’s side J.V,214 (=pitito). (Page 472)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Petī: {'def': '【阴】女鬼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Peyya: {'def': '【形】可以喝的。【中】饮料。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [grd. of pibati] to be drunk, drinkable, only in compn or neg. apeyya undrinkable A.III,188; J.IV,205, 213 (apo apeyyo). maṇḍa° to be drunk like cream, i. e. of the best quality S.II,29. manāpika° sweet to drink Miln.313. duppeyya difficult to drink Sdhp.158. See also kākapeyya. (Page 472)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² =piya, only in cpds. vajja° [*priya-vadya] kindness of language, kind speech, one of the 4 saṅgaha-vatthus (grounds of popularity) A.II,32, 248; IV,219, 364; D.III,190, 192, 232; J.V,330. Cp. BSk. priya-vādya MVastu I.3; and °vācā kind language D.III,152; Vv 8436 (=piyavacana VvA.345). -- It is doubtful whether vāca-peyya at Sn.303 (Ep. of sacrifice) is the same as °vācā (as adj.), or whether it represents vāja-peyya [Vedic vāja sacrificial food] as Bdhgh expls it at SnA 322 (=vājam ettha pivanti; v. l. vāja°), thus peyya= peyya1. (Page 472)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】可以喝的。【中】饮料。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Peyyavajja: {'def': '【中】善意的话。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】善意的话。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Peyyāla: {'def': '(nt.?) [a Māgadhism for pariyāya, so Kern, Toev. s. v. after Trenckner, cp. BSk. piyāla and peyāla MVastu III,202, 219] repetition, succession, formula; way of saying, phrase (=pariyāya 5) Vism.46 (°mukha beginning of discourse), 351 (id. and bahu°-tanti having many discourses or repetitions), 411 (°pāḷi a row of successions or etceteras); VvA.117 (pāḷi° vasena “because of the successive Pāli text”). -- Very freq. in abridged form, where we would say “etc.,” to indicate that a passage has be to repeated (either from preceding context, or to be supplied from memory, if well known). The literal meaning would be “here (follows) the formula (pariyāya).” We often find pa for pe, e. g. A.V,242, 270, 338, 339, 355; sometimes pa+pe combd, e. g. S.V,466. -- As pe is the first syllable of peyyāla so la is the last and is used in the same sense; the variance is according to predilection of certain MSS.; la is found e. g. S.V,448, 267 sq.; or as v. l. of pe: A.V,242, 243, 354; or la+pe combd: S.V,464, 466. -- On syllable pe Trenckner, Notes 66, says: “The sign of abridgment. pe, or as it is written in Burmese copies, pa, means peyyāla which is not an imperative “insert, fill up the gap,” but a substantive, peyyālo or peyyālaṁ, signifying a phrase to be repeated over & over again. I consider it a popular corruption of the synonymous pariyāya, passing through *payyāya, with --eyy- for --ayy-, like seyyā, Sk. śayyā.” See also Vin. Texts I.291; Oldenberg, K.Z. 35, 324. (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】同上（省略填词）。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】同上(省略填词)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Peḷa: {'def': '[a Prk. form for piṇḍa, cp. Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 122 peḍhāla] a lump, only in yaka° the liver (-lump) Sn.195 (=yakana-piṇḍa SnA 247)=J.I,146. (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Peḷikā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. peḷā] a basket DhA.I,227 (pasādhana°, v. l. pelakā). (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Peḷā: {'def': '【阴】盒子，箱子，柜子，容器(箱、盆、罐、壶、桶、罎子)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Class. & B. Sk. peṭa, f. peṭī & peṭā, peḍā Divy 251, 365; and the BSk. var. phelā Divy 503; MVastu II.465] 1. a (large) basket J.IV,458; VI,185; Cp. II.25; Miln.23, 282; Vism.304; KhA 46 (peḷāghata, wrong reading, see p. 68 App.); ThA.29. -- 2. a chest (for holding jewelry etc.) Pv IV.142; Mhvs 36, 20; DhsA.242 (peḷ-opamā, of the 4 treasure-boxes). -- Cp. piṭaka. (Page 473)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】盒子，箱子，柜子，容器（箱、盆、罐、壶、桶、坛子）。(p232)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Peṇāhikā: {'def': '(f.) [dial.; etym. uncertain] a species of bird (crane?) Miln.364, 402; shortened to peṇāhi at Miln.407 (in the uddāna). Cp. Miln.trsl. II.343. (Page 472)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Peṇṇakata: {'def': 'is v. l. for paṇṇakata Npl. at Vv 455 sq. (see VvA.197). (Page 472)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Peṭaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. piṭaka] “what belongs to the Piṭaka,” as title of a non-canonical book for the usual Peṭak’opadesa “instruction in the Piṭaka.” dating from the beginning of our era (cp. Geiger, P.Gr. p. 18), mentioned at Vism.141 DhsA.165. Cp. tipeṭaka, see also piṭaka. (Page 472)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Peṭakopadesa: {'def': 'm. 蔵釈 [書名].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Ph: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第二十二个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中送气清音的 p。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第二十二个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中送气清音的 p。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Phaggu: {'def': '[in for’=Vedic phalgu (small, feeble), but in meaning different] a special period of fasting M.I,39= DA.I,139. See also pheggu. (Page 476)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】禁食的时期。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】禁食的时期(a special period of fasting)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Phagguṇa: {'def': '(cp. Vedic phālguna),【阳】孟春月(月份名，大约在二月至三月之间，农历1月16至2月15；marking the beginning of Spring; always with ref. to the spring full moon, as phagguṇa-puṇṇamā at Vism.418)。phagguṇī, 二十七星宿之二(张宿 (pubbaphagguṇī)，翼宿 (uttaraphagguṇī))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Phagguṇī (f.) [cp. Vedic phālguna & °ī] N. of a month (Feb. 15th-March 15th), marking the beginning of Spring; always with ref. to the spring full moon, as phagguṇa-puṇṇamā at Vism.418; phagguṇi° J.I,86. (Page 476)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】孟春月（月份名，大约在二月至三月之间）。 ~guṇī, 二十七星宿之二（张宿 (pubbaphagguṇī)，翼宿 (uttaraphagguṇī)）。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Phagguṇī: {'def': '(cp. Vedic phālgunī),【阴】孟春月。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Phala: {'def': '² is spelling for pala (a certain weight) at J.VI,510. See pala & cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 40. (Page 477)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '果。维持一刹那的「道心」拔除相对应的烦恼。[61]紧接在「道心」之后(仍以涅盘为所缘)的两、三个心识，即名为「果心」，他们只是「道心」的结果，享受著涅盘而未作任何(拔除烦恼的)工作。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '果', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [cp. Vedic phala, to phal [sphal] to burst, thus lit. “bursting,” i. e. ripe fruit; see phalati] 1. (lit.) fruit (of trees etc.) Vv 8414 (dumā nicca-phal’ûpapannā, not to phalu, as Kern, Toev. s. v. phalu); Vism.120. --amba° mango-fruit PvA.273 sq.; dussa° (adj.) having clothes as their fruit (of magic trees) Vv 462 (cp. VvA.199); patta° leaves & fruits, vegetables Sn.239; PvA.86 pavatta° wild fruit D.I,101; puppha° flower & fruit J.III,40. rukkha°-ûpama Th.1, 490 (in simile of kāmā, taken fr. M.I,130) lit. “like the fruit of trees” is expld by ThA.288 as “aṅga-paccaṅgānaṁ p(h)alibhañjan’aṭṭhena, and trsld according to this interpretation by Mrs. Rh. D. as “fruit that brings the climber to a fall.” -- Seven kinds of medicinal fruits are given at Vin.I,201 scil. vilaṅga, pippala, marica, harītaka, vibhītaka, āmalaka, goṭhaphala. At Miln.333 a set of 7 fruits is used metaphorically in simile of the Buddha’s fruit-shop, viz. sotāpatti°, sakadāgāmi°, anāgāmi°, arahatta°, suññata° samāpatti (cp. Cpd. 70), animitta° samāpatti, appaṇihita° samāpatti. -- 2. a testicle J.III,124 (dantehi °ṁ chindati=purisabhāvaṁ nāseti to castrate); VI,237 (uddhita-pphalo, adj.,=uddhaṭa-bījo C.), 238 (dantehi phalāni uppāṭeti, like above). ‹-› 3. (fig.) fruit, result, consequence, fruition, blessing. As t.t. with ref. to the Path and the progressive attainment (enjoyment, fruition) of Arahantship it is used to denote the realization of having attained each stage of the sotāpatti, sakadāgāmi etc. (see the Miln.quot. under 1 and cp. Cpd. 45, 116). So freq. in exegetical literature magga, phala, nibbāna, e. g. Tikp 155, 158; VbhA.43 & passim. -- In general it immediately precedes Nibbāna (see Nd2 no 645b and under satipaṭṭhāna), and as agga-phala it is almost identical with Arahantship. Frequently it is combd with vipāka to denote the stringent conception of “consequence,” e. g. at D.I,27, 58; III,160. Almost synonymous in the sense of “fruition, benefit, profit” is ānisaṁsā D.III,132; phala at Pv.I,125=ānisaṁsa PvA.64 -- Vin.I,293 (anāgāmi°); II,240 (id.); III,73 (arahatta°); D.I,51, 57 sq. (sāmañña°); III,147, 170 (sucaritassa); M.I,477 (appamāda°); S.I,173 (Amata°); Pv.I,1110 (kaṭuka°); II,83 (dāna°); IV,188 (mahap° & agga°); Vism.345 (of food, being digested); PvA.8 (puñña° & dāna°), 22 (sotāpatti°), 24 (issā-macchariya°). --atthika one who is looking for fruit Vism.120. --āpaṇa fruit shop Miln.333. --âphala [phala+aphala, see ā4; but cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 331] all sorts of fruit, lit. what is not (i. e. unripe), fruit without discrimination; a phrase very freq. in Jātaka style, e. g. J.I,416; II,160; III,127; IV,220; 307, 449, V,313; VI,520; DhA.I,106. --āsava extract of fruit VvA.73. --uppatti ripening PvA.29. --esin yielding fruit J.I,87=Th.1, 527, cp. phalesin MVastu III,93. --gaṇḍa see palagaṇḍa. --ṭṭha “stationed in fruition,” i. e. enjoying the result or fruition of the Path (cp. Cpd. 50) Miln.342. --dāna gift of fruit VbhA.337. --dāyin giver of fruit Vv 676. --pacchi fruit-basket J.VI,560. --pañcaka fivefold fruit Vism.580; VbhA.191. --puṭa fruit-basket J.VI,236. --bhājana one who distributes fruit, an official term in the vihāra Vin.IV,38, cp. BSk. phalacāraka. --maya see sep. --ruha fruit tree Mbvs 82. --sata see palasata. (Page 477)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Vedic phala, to phal [sphal] to burst),【中】水果，坚果，结果，武器的刀锋。phalacitta,【中】果心，道果。phalaṭṭha,【形】停住在道的享乐。phalatthika,【形】找寻果报。phaladāyī,【形】成功的，有利的，结果的，产生果报的。phalaruha,【形】从种子生长的。phalabhāranamita,【形】果实硕重下垂。phalavantu,【形】产生果实的，有果实的。phalāphala,【中】各种不同的果实。phalāsava,【阳】果计。phalasamāpatti 果定(果三摩地)。D.16./II,100︰「阿难！当如来於一切相不作意(sabbanimittānaṁ amanasikārā)，於灭诸受的无相心三昧(=果定)具足住(ekaccānaṁ vedanānaṁ nirodhā animittaṁ cetosamādhiṁ upasampajja viharati。)阿难！那时如来的身体，才会最舒服。」 DA.16./II,548.︰由住於‘果定’才会舒服(yasmā iminā phalasamāpattivihārena phāsu hoti)。‘果定’与‘灭尽定’不同。巴宙译︰入於灭想定；元亨版译︰入於灭受想三昧时。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】水果，坚果，结果，武器的刀锋。 ~citta, 【中】果心，道果。~ṭṭha, 【形】停住在道的享乐。 ~tthika, 【形】找寻果报。 ~dāyī, 【形】成功的，有利的，结果的，产生果报的。 ~ruha,【形】从种子生长的。 ~vantu,【形】产生果实的，有果实的。 ~lāphala,【中】各种不同的果实。 ~lāsava,【阳】果计。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '³ [etym.? Sk. *phala] the point of a spear or sword S.II,265 (tiṇha°). Cp. phāla2. (Page 477)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phalagaṇḍa: {'def': 'is spurious writing for palagaṇḍa (q. v.). (Page 477)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phalaka: {'def': '【阳、中】甲板，厚木板，盾。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. phal=*sphal or *sphaṭ (see phalati), lit. that which is split or cut off (cp. in same meaning “slab”); cp. Sk. sphaṭika rock-crystal; on Prk. forms see Pischel, Prk. Gr. §206. Ved. phalaka board, phāla ploughshare; Gr. a]ζpalon, spolaζ, yaliζ scissors; Lat. pellis & spolium; Ohg. spaltan=split, Goth, spilda writing board, tablet; Oicel. spjald board] 1. a flat piece of wood, a slab, board, plank J.I,451 (a writing board, school slate); V,155 (akkhassa ph. axle board); VI,281 (dice-board). pidhāna° covering board VbhA.244= Vism.261; sopāna° staircase, landing J.I,330 (maṇi°); Vism.313; cp. MVastu I.249; °āsana a bench J.I,199; °kāya a great mass of planks J.II,91. °atthara-sayana a bed covered with a board (instead of a mattress) J.I,304, 317; II,68. °seyya id. D.I,167 (“plank-bed”). -- 2. a shield J.III,237, 271; Miln.355; DhA.II,2. ‹-› 3. a slip of wood or bark, used for making an ascetic’s dress (°cīra) D.I,167, cp. Vin.I,305. ditto for a weight to hang on the robe Vin.II,136. -- 4. a post M.III,95 (aggaḷa° doorpost); ThA.70 (Ap. V,17). (Page 477)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】【中】甲板，厚木板，盾。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Phalamaya: {'def': 'stands in all probability for phalika-maya, made of crystal, as is suggested by context, which gives it in line with kaṭṭha-maya & loha-maya (& aṭṭhi°, danta°, veḷu° etc.). It occurs in same phrase at all passages mentioned, and refers to material of which boxes, vessels, holders etc. are made. Thus at Vin.I,203 (of añjani, box), 205 (tumba, vessel); II,115 (sattha-daṇḍa, scissors-handle), 136 (gaṇṭhikā, block at dress). The trsln “made of fruits” seems out of place (so Kern, Toev. s. v.), one should rather expect “made of crystal” by the side of made of wood, copper, bone, ivory, etc. (Page 477)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phalasamāpatti: {'def': '果等至——除了紧接道心之后的果心之外，其他享受著涅盘乐的果心即是果等至。随著个人的定力不同，果等至的时间，可能延续几秒，或最多七天。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}

Phalasata: {'def': 'see palasata.-At J.VI,510 it means “goldbronze” (as material of which a “sovaṇṇa-kaṁsa” is made). (Page 477)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phalati: {'def': '(phal + a), 结（果），爆裂开，分裂。【过】 phali。【过分】 phalita。【独】 phalitvā。【现分】 phalanta。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(phal +a),1.分裂(to split, burst open)。2.结(果)，爆裂开(to become ripe, to ripen)。【过】phali。【过分】phalita, phulla。【独】phalitvā。【现分】phalanta。【使】phāleti , phāṭeti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[phal to split, break open=*sphal or *sphaṭ, cp. phāṭeti. On etym. see also Lüders, K.Z. XLII, 198 sq.] 1. to split, burst open (intrs.) A.I,77 (asaniyā phalantiyā); usually in phrase “muddhā sattadhā phaleyya,” as a formula of threat or warning “your (or my) head shall split into 7 pieces,” e. g. D.I,95; S.I,50; Sn.983; J.I,54; IV,320 (me); V,92 (=bhijjetha C.); Miln.157 (satadhā for satta°); DhA.I,41 (m. te phalatu s.); VvA.68; whereas a similar phrase in Sn.988 sq. has adhipāteti (for *adhiphāṭeti=phalati). -- Caus. phāleti (& phāṭeti). -- pp. phalita & phulla. -- 2. to become ripe, to ripen Vin.II,108; J.III,251; PvA.185. (Page 477)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phalatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. phala] the fact or condition of bearing fruit PvA.139 (appa°). (Page 477)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phalavant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. phala] bearing or having fruit J.III,251. (Page 477)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phalañāṇa: {'def': '果智。与道心一同生起，直观涅盘的智慧。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}

Phaleti: {'def': 'at D.I,54 is spurious reading for paleti (see palāyati), expld by gacchati DA.I,165; meaning “runs,” not with trsln “spreads out” [to sphar]. (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phalika: {'def': '¹ [fr. phala] a fruit vendor Miln.331. (Page 477)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² & °kā (f.) [also spelt with ḷ; cp. Sk. sphaṭika; on change ṭ›ḷ see Geiger, P.Gr. § 386. The Prk. forms are phaḷiha & phāḷiya, see Pischel, Gr. § 206] crystal, quartz Vin.II,112; J.VI,119 (°kā=phaḷika-bhittiyo C.); Vv 351 (=phalika-maṇi-mayā bhittiyo VvA.160); 783 (°kā); Miln.267 (ḷ), 380 (ḷ). (Page 477)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐水晶(crystal)。又作水精、颇梨。《翻译名义集》卷第三(大54.1105.3)作：「颇梨，或云塞颇胝迦。此云水玉，即苍玉也，或云水精，又云白珠。」', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Phalima: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. phala] bearing fruit, full of fruit J.III,493. (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phalin: {'def': '(fr. phala),【形】有果实(的树)，产生果实(bearing fruit)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. phala] bearing fruit J.V,242. (Page 477)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phalina: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. phala, phalin?] at J.V,92 is of doubtful meaning. It cannot very well mean “bearing fruit,” since it is used as Ep. of a bird (°sakuṇī). The Cy. expln is sakuṇa-potakānaṁ phalinattā (being a source of nourishment?) phalina-sakuṇī.” The v. l. SS is phalīna & palīna. (Page 477)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phalita: {'def': '² [pp. of phal to burst, for the usual phulla, after analogy with phalita3] broken, only in phrase hadayaṁ phalitaṁ his heart broke DhA.I,173; hadayena phalitena with broken heart J.I,65. (Page 477)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (adj.) [sporadic spelling for palita] grey-haired PvA.153. (Page 477)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ [pp. of phal to bear fruit] fruit bearing, having fruit, covered with fruit (of trees) Vin.II,108; J.I,18; Miln.107, 280. (Page 477)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phallava: {'def': 'is spelling for pallava sprout, at J.III,40. (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phalu: {'def': '(cp. Vedic paru),【中】(芦苇等的)节(a knot or joint in a reed)。phalubīja,【中】(竹等)产出植物的节。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic paru] a knot or joint in a reed, only in cpd. °bīja (plants) springing (or propagated) from a joint D.I,5; Vin.IV,34, 35. (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】（芦苇等的）节。 ~bīja, 【中】（竹等）产出植物的节。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Phalī: {'def': '【阳】有果实（的树），产生果实。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Phandana: {'def': '【中】 Phandanā, 【阴】悸动，运动，激动。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. phandati, cp. Sk. spandana] 1. (adj.) throbbing, trembling, wavering Dh.33 (phandanaṁ capalaṁ); J.VI,528 (°māluvā trembling creeper); DhA.I,50 (issa° throbbing with envy). -- 2. (m.) N. of a tree Dalbergia (aspen?) A.I,202; J.IV,208 sq.; Miln.173. -- 3. (nt.) throb, trembling, agitation, quivering J.VI,7 (°mattaṁ not even one throb; cp. phandita); Nd1 46 (taṇhā etc.). (Page 476)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹phandati, 梵spandana),【中】phandanā,【阴】悸动(throbbing)，震颤(trembling)，激动(wavering)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Phandanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. phandati] throbbing, agitation, movement, motion SnA 245 (calanā+); DA.I,111; Nett 88 C.; cp. iñjanā. (Page 476)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phandati: {'def': '(phad(梵spand)颤抖+ṁ-a), 战栗(to throb, palpitate)。2.激起，悸动，搅乱(to twitch, tremble, move, stir)。【过】phandi。【过分】phandita。【现分】phandamāna,【独】phandetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[spand, cp. Gr. sfadάcw to twitch, sfodrόs violent; Lat. pendeo “pend” i. e. hang down, cp. pendulum; Ags. finta tail, lit. mover, throbber] 1. to throb, palpitate D.I,52=M.I,404, cp. DA.I,159; Nd1 46. -- 2. to twitch, tremble, move, stir J.II,234; VI,113 (of fish wriggling when thrown on land). -- Caus. II. phandāpeti to make throb D.I,52=M.I,404. -- pp. phandita (q. v.). Cp. pari°, vi°, sam°. The nearest synonym is calati. (Page 476)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(phad + ŋ-a), 战栗，悸动，激起。【过】 phandi。【过分】 ~dita。【现分】 ~damāna, 【独】 ~detvā。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Phandita: {'def': '【中】激动。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pp. of phandati),【中】悸动，激动(throbbing, flashing; throb)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [pp. of phandati] throbbing, flashing; throb M.II,24 (°mattā “by his throbbings only”); pl. phanditāni “vapourings,” imaginings Vbh.390 (where VbhA.513 only says “phandanato phanditaṁ”) cp. Brethren 344. (Page 476)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phanditatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. phandita]=phandanā S.V,315 (=iñjitatta). (Page 476)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pharasu: {'def': '[cp. Vedic paraśu=Gr. pέlekus; on p›ph cp. Prk. pharasu & parasu, Pischel Gr. § 208; Geiger, Gr. § 40] hatchet, axe A.III,162; J.I,199, 399; II,409; V,500; DhA.II,204; PvA.277. The spelling parasu occurs at S.V,441 & J.III,179. (Page 476)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'parasu,【阳】斧头(hatchet)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'parasu, 【阳】斧头。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pharati: {'def': '(phar + a), 弥漫，遍布，充满。【过】 phari。【过分】 pharita。【独】pharitvā。【现分】 pharanta。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(phar弥漫+a), 弥漫，遍布，徧满。【过】phari。【过分】pharita。【独】pharitvā。【现分】pharanta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[sphur & sphar, same root as in Gr. spaiρw to twitch; Lat. sperno “spurn” lit. kick away; Ags. speornan to kick; spurnan=spur] 1. (trs.) to pervade, permeate, fill, suffuse Pv.I,1014 (=vyāpetvā tiṭṭhati PvA.52); J.III,371 (sakala-sarīraṁ); V,64 (C. for pavāti); PvA.14 (okāsaṁ), 276 (obhāsaṁ). To excite or stimulate the nerves J.V,293 (rasa-haraṇiyo khobhetvā phari: see under rasa). -- Often in standard phrase mettā-sahagatena cetasā ekaṁ (dutiyaṁ etc.) disaṁ pharitvā viharati D.II,186; S.V,115 and passim, where pharitvā at Vism.308=VbhA.377 is expld by phusitvā ārammaṇaṁ katvā. Cp. BSk. ekaṁ disāṁ spharitvopasampadya viharati MVastu III,213. Also in phrase pītiyā sarīraṁ pharati (aor. phari) to thrill the body with rapture, e. g. J.I,33; V,494; DhA.II,118; IV,102. -- 2. [in this meaning better to be derived from sphar to spread, expand, cp. pharita & phālita] to spread, make expand J.I,82 (metta-cittaṁ phari). -- 3. [prob. of quite a diff. origin and only taken to pharati by pop. analogy, perhaps to phal=sphaṭ to split; thus kaṭṭh’atthaṁ pharati=to be split up for fuel] to serve as, only with °atthaṁ in phrases āhāratthaṁ ph. (after next phrase) to serve as food Miln.152; kaṭṭhatthaṁ ph. to serve as fuel A.II,95=S.III,93=It.90=J.I,482; khādaniyatthaṁ & bhojaniyatthaṁ ph. to serve as eatables Vin.I,201 (so to be read in preference to °attaṁ). -- pp. pharita, phurita & phuṭa; cp. also phuṭṭha; see further anu°, pari°. (Page 476)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pharaṇa: {'def': '(fr. pharati),【中】1.充满(pervading, suffused (with), quite full (of))。2.弥漫，震颤( pervasion, suffusion, thrill)。pharaṇaka,【形】遍布的，装满的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [fr. pharati] 1. (adj.) pervading, suffused (with), quite full (of) Miln.345. -- 2. (nt.) pervasion, suffusion, thrill J.I,82 (°samattha mettacitta); Nett 89 (pīti° etc., as m., cp. pharaṇatā); DhsA.166 (°pīti all-pervading rapture, permeating zest; cp. pīti pharaṇatā). -- Cp. anu°. (Page 476)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】弥漫，充满，震颤。 ~ka, 【形】遍布的，装满的。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Pharaṇaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. pharaṇa] thrilling, suffusing, pervading, filling with rapture VvA.16 (dvādasa yojanāni °pabho sarīra-vaṇṇo). (Page 476)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pharaṇatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. pharaṇa] suffusion, state of being pervaded (with), only --° in set of 4--fold suffusion, viz. pīti° of rapture, sukha° of restful bliss, ceto° of [telepathic] consciousnss, āloka° of light, D.III,277; Ps.I,48; Vbh.334; Nett 89. (Page 476)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pharita: {'def': '[pp. of pharati] 1. being pervaded or permeated (by) VvA.68 (mettāya). -- 2. spread (out) J.VI,284 (kittisaddo sakala-loke ph.). -- Cp. phuṭṭha & phālita. (Page 476)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pharusa: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Vedic paruṣa, on ph.›p see pharasu, on attempt at etym. cp. Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. fario] 1. (lit.) rough Pv.II,41. -- 2. (fig.) harsh, unkind, rough (of speech) Vin.II,290 (caṇḍa+); Pv.II,34; III,57; J.V,296; Kvu 619. In combn with vācā we find both pharusa-vācā and pharusā-vācā D.I,4, 138; III,69 sq., 173, 232; M.I,42 (on this and the same uncertainty as regards pisuṇā-vācā see Trenckner, at M.I,530). pharusa vacana rough speech PvA.15, 55, 83. -- 3. cruel Pv IV.76 (kamma=daruṇa PvA.265). (Page 476)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】粗糙的，苛刻的，无情的。pharusavacana,【中】pharusāvācā,【阴】言语粗鲁、苛薄，恶口。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】粗糙的，苛刻的，无情的。 ~vacana, 【中】 ~sāvācā, 【阴】言语粗鲁。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Phassa: {'def': '¹ [cp. Ved. sparśa, of spṛś: see phusati] contact, touch (as sense or sense-impression, for which usually phoṭṭhabbaṁ). It is the fundamental fact in a senseimpression, and consists of a combination of the sense, the object, and perception, as expld at M.I,111: tiṇṇaṁ (i. e. cakkhu, rūpā, cakkhu-viññāṇa) saṅgati phasso; and gives rise to feeling: phassa-paccayā vedanā. (See paṭicca-samuppāda & for expln Vism.567; VbhA.178 sq.). -- Cp. D.I,42 sq.; III,228, 272, 276; Vism.463 (phusatī ti phasso); Sn.737, 778 (as fundamental of attachment, cp. SnA 517); J.V,441 (rājā dibba-phassena puṭṭho touched by the divine touch, i. e. fascinated by her beauty; puṭṭho=phutto); VbhA.177 sq. (in detail), 193, 265; PvA.86 (dup° of bad touch, bad to the touch, i. e. rough, unpleasant); poet. for trouble Th.1, 783. See on phassa: Dhs. trsl. 5 & introd. (lv.) lxiii.; Cpd. 12, 14, 94. --āyatana organ of contact (6, referring to the several senses) PvA.52. --āhāra “touch-food,” acquisition by touch, nutriment of contact, one of the 3 āhāras, viz. phass°, mano-sañcetanā° (n. of representative cogitation) and viññāṇ° (of intellection) Dhs.71--73; one of the 4 kinds of āhāra, or “food,” with ref. to the 3 vedanās Vism.341. --kāyā (6) groups of touch or contact vîz. cakkhu-samphasso, sota°, ghāna°, kāya°, mano° D.III,243. --sampanna endowed with (lovely) touch, soft, beautiful to feel J.V,441 (cp. phassita). (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1, (‹phussati 去触)【阳】触觉，接触，古译：更乐。tiṇṇaṁ saṅgati phasso﹐三事和合触(i.e.眼cakkhu, 色rūpā, 眼识cakkhu-viññāṇa)，三法相依相关；亦即能缘之心(与心所)，依靠「依处」(vatthu﹐六依处之一)，取「所缘」(ārammaṇa﹐对象)，而产生识知的作用。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】触觉，接触。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2 (grd.‹phusati,梵sprwya) 【形】被感觉(to be felt)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (adj.) [grd. fr. phusati, corresp. to Sk. spṛśya] to be felt, esp. as a pleasing sensation; pleasant, beautiful J.IV,450 (gandhehi ph.). (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phassanā: {'def': '(‹phassa)【阴】触(touch, contact with )。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. phassa] touch, contact with DhsA.167 (jhānassa lābho . . . patti . . . phassanā sacchikiriyā). (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phassati: {'def': 'stands for phusati at Vism.527 in def. of phassa (“phassatī ti phasso”). (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐与phusati(触)相同。phassatī ti phasso.(Vism.527)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Phasseti: {'def': '(phas + e), 触，达到。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~sita。【独】 ~sitvā。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Caus. of phusati1] to touch, attain J.V,251 (rājā dhammaṁ phassayaṁ=C. phassayanto; vv. ll. pa° & phu°); Miln.338 (amataṁ, cp. phusati), 340 (phassayeyya Pot.). -- Pass. phassīyati Vin.II,148 (kavāṭā na ph.; v. l. phussiy°). -- pp. phassita & phussita3. (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(phus+e), 触，达到。【过】phassesi。【过分】phassita。【独】phassitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Phassita: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of phasseti=Sk. sparśayati to bring into contact] made to touch, brought into contact, only in cpd. suphassita of pleasant contact, beautiful to the touch, pleasant, perfect, symmetrical J.I,220 (cīvara), 394 (dantā); IV,188 (dant’āvaraṇaṁ); V,197 (of the membrum muliebre), 206 (read °phassita for °phussita), 216 (°cheka-karaṇa); VvA.275 (as expln of atīva saṅgata Vv 642). -- Note. Another (doubtful) phassita is found at J.V,252 (dhammo phassito; touched, attained) where vv. ll. give passita & phussita. (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phaṇa: {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. phaṇa] the hood of a snake Vin.I,91 (°hatthaka, with hands like a snake’s hood); J.III,347 (patthaṭa°); DhA.III,231 (°ṁ ukkhipitvā); IV,133. Freq. as phaṇaṁ katvā (only thus, in ger.) raising or spreading its hood, with spread hood J.II,274; VI,6; Vism.399; DhA.II,257. (Page 476)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】（眼镜蛇等）颈部因胁骨运动而膨胀的。 ~ka, 【中】（用来弄平头发等，外形象眼镜蛇膨着的颈部的）工具。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cp. Epic Sk. phaṇa),【阳】(眼镜蛇等)颈部因胁骨运动而膨胀的(the hood of a snake)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Phaṇaka: {'def': '(fr. phaṇa),【中】(用来弄平头发等，外形像眼镜蛇膨著的颈部的)工具(Vin.II,107.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. phaṇa] an instrument shaped like a snake’s hood, used to smooth the hair Vin.II,107. (Page 476)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phaṇijjaka: {'def': '[etym.?] a kind of plant, which is enumd at Vin.IV,35=DA.I,81 as one of the aggabīja, i. e. plants propagated by slips or cuttings, together with ajjuka & hirivera. At J.VI,536 the C. gives bhūtanaka as expln. According to Childers it is the plant Samīraṇa. (Page 476)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phaṇī: {'def': '【阳】眼镜蛇。(p233)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】眼镜蛇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pheggu: {'def': '(cp. Vedic phalgu ),【中】围绕木髓的木材，无价值的事物(accessory wood, wood surrounding the pith of a tree)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic phalgu & P. phaggu in form] accessory wood, wood surrounding the pith of a tree, always with ref. to trees (freq. in similes), in sequence mūla, sāra, pheggu, taca, papaṭikā etc. It is represented as next to the pith, but inferior and worthless. At all passages contrasted with sāra (pith, substance). Thus at M.I,192 sq., 488; D.III,51; S.IV,168; A.I,152 (pheggu+ sāra, v. l. phaggu); II,110=Pug.52; A.III,20; J.III,431 (opp. sāra); Miln.267, 413 (tacchako phegguṁ apaharitvā sāraṁ ādiyati). (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】围绕木髓的木材，无价值的事物。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Phegguka: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. pheggu] having worthless wood, weak, inferior M.I,488 (apagata°, where °ka belongs to the whole cpd.); J.III,318 (a°+sāramaya). (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pheggutā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. pheggu] state of dry wood; lack of substance, worthlessness Pug.A 229. (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pheṇa: {'def': '[cp. Vedic phena, with *ph fr. sp°, connected with Lat. spūma, scum, Ags. fām=Ger. feim=E. foam] scum, foam, froth, only in cpds. viz.: --uddehakaṁ (adv.) (paccamāna, boiling) with scum on top, throwing up foam M.III,167; A.I,141; Nd2 304III C; J.III,46; Miln.357. --paṭala a film of scum Vism.359; VbhA.65. --piṇḍa a lump or heap of foam S.III,140 sq.=Vism.479 (in simile of rūpa); Nd2 680 AII; Vism.40 (in comp); VbhA.32 sq. bubbuḷaka a bubble of scum Vism.171, 259, 345; VbhA.242. --mālā a wreath or garland of scum Miln.117. --mālin with a wreath of scum Miln.260. --missa mixed with froth Vism.263. --vaṇṇa colour of scum Vism.263. (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】泡沫，浮渣，泡。 ~piṇḍa, 【阳】一团泡沫。 ~ṇuddehaka, 【形】呕吐泡沫。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cp. Vedic phena),【中】泡沫，浮渣，泡(scum, foam, froth)。pheṇapiṇḍa,【阳】一团泡沬。pheṇuddehaka,【形】呕吐泡沫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Pheṇaka: {'def': '=pheṇa Vism.254; VbhA.237. (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Pheṇila: {'def': '(梵arisṭa 阿唎瑟迦柴),【阳】无患子(soap-berry plant；Sapindus mukorossii Gaertn.，又称为黄目子、肥皂果、假龙眼破布子，无患子科，落叶乔木，高二三丈。成树1～3月落叶前转金黄色，甚美观，适作行道树、庭园树、诱鸟树。种子可代替肥皂洗涤衣物)。《木槵子经》中说：「佛告王言。若欲灭烦恼障报障者。当贯木患子一百八。以常自随。若行若坐若卧。恒当至心无分散意。称佛陀达摩僧伽名。乃过一木患子。如是渐次度木患子。若十若二十。若百若千。乃至百千万。若能满二十万遍。身心不乱。无诸谄曲者。舍命得生第三焰天。衣食自然。常安乐行。若复能满一百万遍者。当得断除百八结业。始名背生死流。趣向泥洹。永断烦恼根。获无上果。」(T17.726.1)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】无患子（(Sapindus mukurosi) 植物名，无患子科，落叶乔木，高二三丈。叶互生，偶数羽状复叶，小叶长卵形。夏月开淡黄色小花，圆锥花序；雄花八雄蕊，雌花子房三室。花後结实，形圆，果皮坚硬；内有种子一，色黑而坚，可作念珠；果皮含钾，其煎汁可供洗濯之用。名见本草，又有木患子〔亦作木槵子〕菩提子等名。李时珍曰：『释家取为数珠〔即念珠〕，故谓之菩提子。』）。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Phiya: {'def': '【中】桨、橹(oar)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】桨，橹。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[etym. unknown] oar Sn.321 (+aritta rudder, expld by dabbi-padara SnA 330); J.IV,21 (°ârittaṁ). See also piya2 which is the more freq. spelling of phiya. (Page 479)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phoseti: {'def': '(Caus. of phusati2, cp. Sk. prusāyati=P. phusayati), 洒(to sprinkle (over) Vin.II,205 (inf. phosituṁ)。pp. phosita。cp. pariphoseti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Caus. of phusati2, cp. Sk. pruṣāyati=P. phusayati] to sprinkle (over) Vin.II,205 (inf. phosituṁ). ‹-› pp. phosita. Cp. pari°. (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phosita: {'def': '(pp. of phoseti, cp. Sk. prusita),【过分】已洒(sprinkled)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【过分】已洒。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of phoseti, cp. Sk. pruṣita] sprinkled J.VI,47 (candana°, v. l. pusita). (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phoṭa: {'def': '【阳】 ~ṭaka, 【中】疖子，水泡。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. sphuṭ, cp. Sk. sphoṭa)( (v.l. pota & poṭha),【阳】phoṭaka,【中】疖子，水泡(swelling, boil, blister)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. sphuṭ, cp. Sk. sphoṭa] swelling, boil, blister J.IV,457; VI,8 (v. l. pota & poṭha); cp. poṭa bubble. (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phoṭaka: {'def': '=phoṭa Vism.258; VbhA.242. Phoṭana “applause,” in brahma-pphoṭana at DhA.III,210 should be taken as ā+phoṭana (=apphoṭana). (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phoṭeti: {'def': '[Caus. of sphuṭ, if correct. Maybe mixed with sphūrj. The form apphoṭesi seems to be ā+phoṭeti= Sk. āsphoṭayati] to shake, toss (or thunder?) only at two places in similar formula, viz. devatā sādhukāraṁ adaṁsu, brahmāno apphoṭesuṁ (v. l. appoṭh°) Miln.13, 18; Sakko devarājā appoṭhesi (v. l. appoṭesi), Mahābrahmā sādhukāraṁ adāsi J.VI,486. Perhaps we should read poṭheti (q. v.), to snap one’s fingers (clap hands) as sign of applause. At DhA.III,210 we read fut. apphoṭessāmi (i. e. ā+phoṭ). (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phoṭṭhabba: {'def': '(nt.) [grd. of phusati] tangible, touch, contact; it is synonymous with phassa, which it replaces in psychol. terminology. Phoṭṭhabbaṁ is the senseobject of kāya (or taca) touch (“kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā” D.III,226, 250, 269; Nd2 p. 238 under rūpa). See also āyatana. -- D.III,102 (in list of ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni: kāyo c’eva phoṭṭhabbā ca; with pl. like m.); VbhA.79 (°dhātu). (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】触觉，接触。(p235)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(grd. of phusati),【中】能被触者，触觉，接触，触(tangible, touch, contact)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Phra: {'def': '(泰语)尊者;法师', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Phulaka: {'def': '(=pulaka) a kind of gem VvA.111. (Page 479)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phulla: {'def': 'phullita,【过分】已完全打开，已完全扩大，已盛开花。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'phullita, 【过分】已完全打开，已完全扩大，已盛开花。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of phalati, or root formation fr. phull, cp. phalita3] blossoming, in blossom J.V,203. Also as Intensive phāliphulla “one mass of flowers” M.I,218; J.I,52. Note. phulla1 may stand for phuṭa2. (Page 479)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [pp. of phalati, cp. phalita2] broken, in phrase akhaṇḍa-phulla unbroken (q. v.), Pv IV.176 and passim. (Page 479)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phullita: {'def': '[pp. of phullati] in flower, blossoming J.V,214 (for phīta=rich), 216 (su°-vana). (Page 479)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phunati: {'def': '[?] to shake, sprinkle, of doubtful spelling, at J.VI,108 (aṅgārakāsuṁ ph.; v. l. punanti perhaps better; C. explns by vidhunati & okirati). Perhaps we should read dhunati. (Page 479)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phus: {'def': '(s)ita³ [=phassita2, Kern. Toev. s. v. takes it as pp. of *puṁsayati] touched, put on, in °aggaḷa with fastened (clinched) bolts (or better: door-wings) M.I,76 (reads phassit°; cp. v. l. on p. 535 phussit°); A.I,101; Th.1, 385; J.VI,510. (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phusana: {'def': '(abstr. fr. phusati1), 【中】触(touch)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. phusati1 1] touch Vism.463. (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 phusanā, 【阴】触。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Phusanā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. phusati1 2] attainment, gaining, reaching Vism.278 (=phuṭṭha-ṭṭhāna); DhA.I,230 (ñāṇa°); VvA.85 (samādhi°). (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(abstr. fr. phusati1),【阴】得到，触证(attainment, gaining, reaching)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Phusati: {'def': '(phas, phus(梵sprw)接触+a), 触，到达，达到。【过】phusi。【现分】phusanta, phusamāna。【过分】phusita, phuṭṭha。【独】phusitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² this is a specific Pali form and represents two Sk. roots, which are closely related to each other and go back to the foll. 2 Idg. roots: 1. Idg. *sp(h)ṛj, burst out, burst (forth), spring, sprinkle, as in Sk. sphūrjati burst forth, parjanya rain cloud; Gr. sfaragέw; Ags. spearca=E. spark, E. spring, sprinkle. This is an enlargement of sphur (cp. pharati, phuṭṭha, phuta). ‹-› 2. Idg. *spṛk to sprinkle, speckle, as in Sk. pruṣ, pṛśni speckled, pṛṣan, pṛṣatī spotted antelope, pṛṣata raindrop; Gr. perknόs of dark (lit. spotted) colour; Lat. spargere=Ger. sprenGen. To this root belong P. pasata, phoseti, paripphosaka, phussa, phusita. -- Inf. phusituṁ, conjectured reading at Vin.I,205 for T. phosituṁ (vv. ll. posituṁ & dhovituṁ), & Vin.II,151 for T. posituṁ; Vin. Texts III,169 translate “bespatter.” (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(phus + a), 触，到达，达到。【过】 phusi。【现分】 phusanta,~māna。【过分】 phusita, phuṭṭha。【独】 phusitvā。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [spṛś, fr. which sparśa=phassa; cp. also phassati] 1. (lit.) to touch Vism.463 (phusatī ti phasso); DA.I,61 (aor. phusī=metri causa for phusi); Miln.157 (grd. aphusa not to be touched). -- 2. (fig.) [see on this term of Buddhist ecstatic phraseology Cpd. 1332. In this meaning it is very closely related to pharati, as appears e. g. from the foll. explns of Cys.: D.I,74 parippharati=samantato phusati DA.I,217; D.II,186 ≈ pharitvā=phusitvā ārammaṇaṁ katvā Vism.308] to attain, to reach, only in specific sense of attaining to the highest ideal of religious aspiration, in foll. phrases: ceto-samādhiṁ ph. D.I,13=III,30, 108 etc.; nirodhaṁ D.I,184; samatha-samādhiṁ Vv 169 (reads āphusiṁ but should prob. be aphusiṁ as VvA.84, expld by adhigacchiṁ); phalaṁ aphussayi (aor. med.) Pv IV.188; cp. PvA.243; amataṁ padaṁ Pv IV.348; amataṁ Miln.338 (but T. reads khippaṁ phasseti a.); in bad sense kappaṭṭhitikaṁ kammaṁ Miln.108 (of Devadatta). -- pp. phuṭṭha. Cp. upa°. (Page 479)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phusita: {'def': '²[pp. of phusati2 2. i. e. pruṣ, cp. Sk. pruṣita sprinkled, pṛṣatī spotted antelope] spotted, coloured, variegated (with flowers) Sn.233 (°agga=supupphit’agga-sākha KhA 192). (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '3, Phussita3 (=phassita2, Kern. Toev. s. v. takes it as pp. of *puṁsayati), 已触(touched, put on, in phusitaggaḷa with fastened (clinched) bolts (or better: door-wings)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [either pp. of phusati2 or direct correspondent of Sk. pṛṣata (see pasata2)] rain-drop M.III,300; S.II,135; DhA.III,243. The Prk. equivalent is phusiya (Pischel, Gr. § 208), cp. Ger. sprenkeln› E. sprinkle. (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1 (either pp. of phusati2 or direct correspondent of Sk. prsata (see pasata2)), 下雨(rain-drop)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'phusitaka, 【中】下降，触觉。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Phusitaka: {'def': '(fr. phusita1),【形】下降(having raindrops)。S.12.23./II,32.︰“Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, uparipabbate thullaphusitake deve vassante taṁ udakaṁ yathāninnaṁ pavattamānaṁ pabbatakandarapadarasākhā paripūreti. Pabbatakandarapadarasākhāparipūrā kusobbhe paripūrenti. Kusobbhā paripūrā mahāsobbhe paripūrenti. Mahāsobbhā paripūrā kunnadiyo paripūrenti. Kunnadiyo paripūrā mahānadiyo paripūrenti. Mahānadiyo paripūrā mahāsamuddaṁ paripūrenti. (诸比丘！譬如天降雨於山顶，落大粒时，其水转向低处、充满山侧之洞穴、罅、隙、壑，充满山侧之洞穴、罅、隙、壑，更充满小池，充满小池更充满大池，充满大池更充满小河，充满小河更充满大河，充满大河，继而充之於海，大海。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. phusita1) having raindrops, only in phrase thulla° deva (the sky) shedding big drops of rain S.II,32 (reads phulla-phusitaka); III,141; A.I,243; II,140; V,114; Vism.259. (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phussa: {'def': '【阳】报沙月（月份名，大约在十二月至一月之间），鬼宿（二十七星宿之一）。【形】华丽彩色的，吉兆的。 ~ratha, 【阳】国家马车（它自己到处奔跑，为了要找一位王座的继承人）。 ~rāga, 【阳】黄晶。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1 (fr. pus to blossom, nourish, etc. cp. Ved. pusya),【阳】报沙月(月份名，大约在十二月至一月之间，11月16至12月15)，鬼宿(二十七星宿之一)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '3 (grd. formation fr. phusati2; scarcely fr. Sk. pusya (to pus nourish, cp. poseti),【形】有斑驳的，华丽彩色的(speckled, gaily-coloured)。 phussakokila, 斑驳的杜鹃鸟(the spotted cuckoo)。phussaka(pussaka), 有斑驳。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '³ (adj.-n.) [grd. formation fr. phusati2 2; scarcely fr. Sk. puṣya (to puṣ nourish, cp. poseti), but meaning rather “speckled” in all senses. The Sk. puṣyaratha is Sanskritisation of P. phussa°] 1. speckled, gaily-coloured, °kokila the spotted cuckoo [Kern, Toev. s. v. phussa however takes it as “male-cuckoo,” Sk. puṁs-kokila] J.V,419, 423; VvA.57. -- As phussaka at A.I,188 (so read for pussaka). -- 2. in sense of “clear, excellent, exquisite” (or it is puṣya in sense of “substance, essence” of anything, as Geiger, P. Gr. § 40 1a?) in °ratha [cp. Sk, puṣpa°, but prob. to be read puṣya°?] a wonderful state carriage running of its own accord J.II,39; III,238; IV,34; V,248; VI,39 sq.) v. l. pussa°); PvA.74. --rāga [cp. Sk. puṣpa-rāga] topaz Miln.118; VvA.111. -- At Nd1 90 as v. l. to be preferred to pussa° in °tila, °tela, °dantakaṭṭha, etc. with ref. to their use by Brahmins. (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [ger. of phusati1] touching, feeling, realising; doubled at D.I,45, 54. (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2 (ger. of phusati1), 接触(touching, realising)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [fr. puṣ to blossom, nourish, etc. cp. Ved. puṣya] 1. see phussa3 2. -- 2. N. of a month (Dec.-Jan.) J.I,86. N. of a lunar mansion or constellation Vv 534 (=phussa-tārakā VvA.236). -- Frequent as Np., cp. Vism.422, and combns like °deva, °mitta. (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phussaphussaratha: {'def': '【阳】国家马车 (它自己到处奔跑，为了要找一位王座的继承人)。phussarāga,【阳】黄晶(topaz)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Phusāyati: {'def': '[Caus. of pruṣ, but formed fr. P. phusati2] to sprinkle (rain), to rain gently, drizzle S.I,104 sq., 154, 184 (devo ekaṁ ekaṁ ph. “drop by drop”). See also anuphusāyati (so read for °phusīyati). (Page 480)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phusīyati: {'def': '(phusati 的【被】), 被触。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(phusati 的【被】), 被触。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Phuṭa: {'def': '(pharati 的【过分】), 已遍及，已弥漫，已传布。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '3, 充满。A.I,159.︰‘Pubbe sudaṁ ayaṁ loko avīci maññe phuṭo ahosi manussehi, kukkuṭasaṁpātikā gāmanigamarājadhāniyo’ti.’(往昔此世界是充满有如无间(地狱)之人，村、邑、庄、都市栉比。)。The same passage as M.I,377 is found at D.I,57, where T. reads phuṭṭa (as also at DA.I,168), with vv. ll. puṭṭha & phuṭa.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2 (pp. of sphuṭ to expand, blossom),开花(blossoming out, opened, in full bloom)。phuṭakumuda(Dāvs.IV,49.), 白莲开敷。cp. phuṭita.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1 (pharati 的【过分】)(=phuta; at DA.I,217 puṭṭha, phuṭṭha), 已遍及，已弥漫，已传布(pervaded, permeated, thrilled；cp. pariphuṭa)。aphuṭa﹐不遍满。pītiyā phuṭa-sarīro,喜遍满身体。See also ophuṭa & cp. phuta3.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [pp. of sphuṭ to expand, blossom] blossoming out, opened, in full bloom Dāvs.IV,49 (°kumuda). Cp. phuṭita. (Page 479)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of pharati] 1. (cp. pharati1) pervaded, permeated, thrilled (cp. pari°) D.I,73, 74 (pītisukhena; T. prints phuta; v. l. phuṭa; v. l. at DA.I,217 p(h)uṭṭha); M.I,276; J.I,33 (sarīraṁ pītiyā ph.); DhA.II,118 (pītiyā phuṭa-sarīro); SnA 107 (referring to the nerves of taste). -- 2. (cp. pharati2) expanded, spread out, spread with (Instr.) Vin.I,182 (lohitena); J.V,266 (in nirayapassage T. reads bhūmi yojana-sataṁ phuṭā tiṭṭhanti, i. e. the beings fill or are spread out over such a space; C. 272 explns by “ettakaṁ ṭhānaṁ anupharitvā tiṭṭhanti.” The id. p. at Nd1 405=Nd2 304III D reads bh. yojana-sataṁ pharitvā (intrs.: expanding, wide) tiṭṭhati, which is the more correct reading). -- See also ophuṭa & cp. phuta3. (Page 479)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ at M.I,377 (sabba-vāri°, in sequence with vārita, yuta, dhuta) is unnecessarily changed by Kern, Toev. s. v. into pūta. The meaning is “filled with, spread with,” thus=phuṭa1, cp. sequence under ophuṭa. The v. l. at M.I,377 is puṭṭha. On miswriting of phuṭṭa & puṭṭha for phuṭa cp. remark by Trenckner, M.I,553. A similar meaning (“full of, occupied by, overflowing with”) is attached to phuṭa in Avīci passage A.I,159 (Avīci maññe phuṭo ahosi), cp. Anāgata Vaṁsa (J.P.T.S. 1886, V,39) & remarks of Morris’s J.P.T.S. 1887, 165. -- The same passage as M.I,377 is found at D.I,57, where T. reads phuṭṭa (as also at DA.I,168), with vv. ll. puṭṭha & phuṭa. (Page 479)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phuṭita: {'def': '[for phoṭita, pp. of *sphoṭayati, sphuṭ] 1. shaken, tossed about, burst, rent asunder, abstr. nt. phutitattaṁ being tossed about Miln.116 (v. l. put °). ‹-› 2. cracked open, chapped, torn (of feet) Th.2, 269 (so read for T. phuṭika, ThA.212 explns by bāhita & has v. l. niphuṭita). (Page 479)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phuṭṭha: {'def': '(phusati 的【过分】)。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(phusati 的【过分】) 接触(touched, affected by, influenced by)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of phusati1] touched, affected by, influenced by; in specific sense (cp. phusati1 2) “thrilled, permeated” Vin.I,200 (ābādhena); A.II,174 (rogena); J.I,82 (mettacittena, v. l. puṭṭha); V,441 (dibbaphassena); Vism.31 (°samphassa contact by touch), 49 (byādhinā); VvA.6 (in both meanings, scil. pītiyā & rogena). On phuṭṭha at D.I,57 see phuṭa3. Cp. sam°. (Page 479)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phāla: {'def': '【阳】1.鑱、犁头(ploughshare)。2.伐木楔。3.咸鱼，咸鱼片(loṇa-macchaphāla a string (?) or cluster of salted fish)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '³ in loṇa-maccha° a string (?) or cluster of salted fish Vism.28. (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. （犁）铧，铧头。 2. 伐木楔。 3. 一条半咸鱼，咸鱼片。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (m. & nt.) [cp. Vedic phāla] ploughshare S.I,169; Sn.p. 13 & V,77 (expld as “phāletī ti ph.” SnA 147); J.I,94; IV,118; V,104; Ud.69 (as m.); DhA.I,395. (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [to phala3] an (iron) board, slab (or ball?), maybe spear or rod. The word is of doubtful origin & meaning, it occurs always in the same context of a heated iron instrument, several times in correlation with an iron ball (ayogula). It has been misunderstood at an early time, as is shown by kapāla A.IV,70 for phāla. Kern comments on the word at Toev. II.139. See Vin.I,225 (phālo divasantatto, so read; v. l. balo corr. to bālo; corresp. with guḷa); A.IV,70 (divasa-santatte ayokapāle, gloss ayogule); J.V,268; V,109 (phāle ciraratta-tāpite, v. l. pāle, hale, thāle; corresp. with pakaṭṭhita ayogula), id. V,113 (ayomayehi phālehi pīḷeti, v. l. vālehi). (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Phālaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. phāleti] splitting; one who splits Vism.413 (kaṭṭha°). (Page 478)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. phāleti),【阳】分离者，打破者(splitting; one who splits)。Vism.413 (kaṭṭhaphālana)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】分离者，打破者。(p234)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

【經文資訊】
【原始資料】原始资料皆来自网络
【其他事項】本資料庫可自由免費流通，詳細內容請參閱【中華電子佛典協會資料庫版權宣告】